Volvo XC40 2020 Early Owner's Manual

Add to my manuals
660 Pages

advertisement

Volvo XC40 2020 Early Owner's Manual | Manualzz
XC40
O W NE R 'S M ANU AL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo strives to build one of the safest cars in the
world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and
environmental requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you
read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and
other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some
other way.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OWNER'S INFORMATION
YOUR VOLVO
16
Volvo ID
26
Safety
42
Owner's manual in centre display
17
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
26
Safety during pregnancy
42
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
18
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
28
Whiplash Protection System
43
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
20
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
31
Seatbelts
44
Volvo Cars support site
21
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
32
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
45
Reading the owner's manual
21
Software updates
35
Seatbelt tensioner
47
The owner's manual and the environment
23
Recording data
35
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner*
48
Terms & Conditions for Services
36
Door and seatbelt reminder
48
Customer Privacy Policy
36
Airbags
49
Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment
37
Driver airbags
50
Installation of accessories
37
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
38
Showing the car's identification
number
39
Driver distraction
2
SAFETY
Owner information
39
Passenger airbag
51
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag*
52
Side airbags
55
Inflatable curtains
55
Safety mode
56
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
57
Child safety
58
Child seats
58
Upper mounting points for child seats
59
Lower mounting points for child seats
60
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
60
Child seat positioning
61
DISPLAYS AND VOICE
CONTROL
Child seat mounting
62
64
Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car
72
Handling a message saved from
the driver display
95
Overview table for location of
child seats
Overview of centre display
97
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
65
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
73
Managing the centre display
100
Table for location of i-Size child seats
67
Driver display
75
Activating and deactivating centre
display
103
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
68
Driver display settings
77
78
Navigating in the centre display's
views
103
Fuel gauge
Trip computer
78
Managing subviews in centre display
107
Function view in centre display
110
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
112
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
112
Keyboard in centre display
114
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
117
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre display
117
Show trip data in the driver display
79
Resetting the trip meter
80
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
81
Settings for trip statistics
81
Date and time
82
Outside temperature gauge
82
Indicator symbols in the driver display
83
Warning symbols in the driver display
85
License agreement for the driver
display
86
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
119
Application menu in driver display
91
119
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
92
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
Changing system units
Messages in the driver display
120
93
Changing system language
Managing messages in the driver
display
120
94
Other settings in the centre display's top view
120
3
Open contextual setup in the centre display
121
LIGHTING
Lighting control
136
WINDOWS, GLASS AND
MIRRORS
137
152
122
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Windows, glass and mirrors
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
152
Resetting settings in the centre
display
122
Position lamps
138
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
Daytime running lights
138
Reset sequence for pinch protection
153
Table showing centre display settings
123
Dipped beam
139
Power windows
153
Using main beam
140
Operating power windows
154
140
Rearview and door mirrors
155
141
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
155
156
Driver profiles
4
124
Selecting driver profile
125
Renaming a driver profile
125
Protect driver profile
126
Linking remote control key to
driver profile
126
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
128
Message in centre display
128
Managing messages in the centre
display
129
Handling a message saved from
the centre display
129
Voice recognition
130
Using voice recognition
131
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
Active main beam
Using direction indicators
Active bending lights*
142
Angling the door mirrors
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
143
Panorama roof*
158
Rear fog lamp
144
Operating the panorama roof*
159
Brake lights
144
161
Emergency brake lights
145
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind
Hazard warning flashers
145
Wiper blades and washer fluid
162
Using home safe lighting
146
Approach light duration
146
Interior lighting
146
Adjusting interior lighting
148
Using windscreen wipers
162
Using the rain sensor
163
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
164
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
165
133
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
166
Voice control of radio and media
133
134
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
167
Settings for voice recognition
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
CLIMATE
Manual front seat
170
Climate
180
Power* front seat
171
Climate zones
180
Adjusting the power* front seat
171
Climate control - sensors
181
Using a stored position for seat
and door mirrors
172
Perceived temperature
181
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
173
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
the front seat
174
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel*
195
Activating auto climate control
195
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
196
182
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
196
Air quality
183
Clean Zone*
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
197
183
174
Clean Zone Interior Package*
184
198
Interior Air Quality System*
184
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Adjusting the head restraints in
the rear seat
176
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
185
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen*
199
Steering wheel controls and horn
177
Passenger compartment filter
185
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
199
Steering lock
178
Air distribution
186
Adjusting the steering wheel
Changing air distribution
187
Opening, closing and aiming the
air vents
Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear
window and door mirrors
200
178
187
Regulating fan level for front seat
200
Table of air distribution options
188
Climate controls
191
Activating and deactivating
heated front seat*
193
Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat*
193
Activating and deactivating
heated rear seat*
194
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
194
Regulating temperature for front seat
201
Synchronising temperature
202
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
202
Parking climate*
203
Preconditioning*
203
Start and switch off preconditioning*
204
Preconditioning time setting*
205
5
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
6
Adding and editing time setting
for preconditioning*
205
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning*
206
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
207
Climate comfort when parking*
208
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
208
Symbols and messages for parking climate control*
209
Heater*
210
Parking heater*
211
Additional heater*
212
Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater*
212
Lock confirmation
214
Lock indication setting
215
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
242
Remote control key
215
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
243
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
217
Automatic locking when driving
244
Settings for remotely controlled
and inside unlocking
218
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
244
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
219
Programming maximum opening
for power operated tailgate*
247
Remote control key range
219
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
248
Replacing the battery in the
remote control key
220
Private locking
250
Ordering more remote control keys
223
Activating and deactivating private locking
250
Detachable key blade
224
Alarm*
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
251
225
Activating and deactivating alarms*
253
Immobiliser
227
Type approval for the remote control key system
228
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
237
Keyless locking and unlocking*
238
Settings for Keyless entry*
239
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
239
Antenna locations for the start
and lock systems
240
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
241
Reduced alarm level*
254
Double lock*
254
Temporarily* deactivating double
locks
255
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
258
Selecting and activating cruise control
274
Speed-dependent steering force
258
Deactivating cruise control
275
Warning from driver support in
the event of a collision risk
294
Electronic stability control
259
Standby mode for cruise control
275
Change of target with driver support
295
276
Set the stored speed for driver
support
Electronic Stability Control in
sport mode
260
Adaptive cruise control*
296
Activating or deactivating sport
mode for electronic stability control
261
Controls and display mode for
adaptive cruise control*
277
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
297
Selecting and activating adaptive
cruise control*
278
Automatic braking with driver support
298
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control
262
Drive mode for driver support
299
Stability system
263
300
Connected Safety
300
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
279
Overtaking Assistance
263
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
control*
280
Use Overtaking Assistance
Activating or deactivating
Connected Safety
264
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
281
Limitations of Connected Safety
265
Change between cruise control
and adaptive cruise control* in the
centre display
282
283
Speed limiter
266
Radar unit
301
Type approval for radar device
302
Camera unit
310
Limitations for camera and radar unit
311
Recommended maintenance for
camera and radar unit
315
Selecting and activating speed limiter
267
Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control*
Deactivating the speed limiter
268
Pilot Assist*
Temporary deactivation of speed
limiter
285
268
City Safety™
316
Controls and display view for Pilot
Assist*
287
Subfunctions for City Safety
317
288
Setting the warning distance for
City Safety
319
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
320
Limitations for speed limiter
269
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
Automatic speed limiter
269
Deactivate Pilot Assist*
Activating or deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
289
271
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*
290
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
272
Temporary disabling of steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*
291
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
272
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
291
Cruise control
273
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
293
City Safety in cross traffic
322
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
323
7
8
Automatic braking in the event of
an impeded evasive manoeuvre
with City Safety
324
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
324
Limitations of City Safety
325
Messages for City Safety
328
Rear Collision Warning*
329
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
329
BLIS*
330
Activating or deactivating BLIS
331
Activating or deactivating warnings from road sign information*
343
Limitations for steering assistance
at risk of collision
358
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
344
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision
359
Park Assist*
360
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides*
361
Activating or deactivating the
parking assistance system*
362
Driver Alert Control
345
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
346
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
346
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
347
Limitations of Parking assistance
363
Lane assistance
347
364
Activating or deactivating lane
assistance
349
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Park assist camera*
365
349
Park assist camera locations and
surveillance areas*
366
Park assist lines for park assist
camera*
368
Sensor fields for parking assistance system
370
Limitations of BLIS
332
Messages for BLIS
333
Cross Traffic Alert*
334
Selecting assistance option for
lane assistance
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*
335
Limitations of Lane assistance
350
351
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*
335
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*
337
Display mode for lane assistance
353
Road Sign Information*
338
Steering assistance at risk of collision
354
Activating or deactivating road
sign information*
339
355
Display mode for road sign information*
339
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance in the event of a collision risk
355
Road Sign Information and
Sensus Navigation*
342
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
356
Using Park Assist Pilot*
377
Warning for speed limitation and
speed camera from road sign
information*
342
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
357
Leaving parallel parking with Park
Assist Pilot*
380
Activate park assist camera
371
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
373
Park Assist Pilot*
375
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot*
376
STARTING AND DRIVING
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
380
Starting the car
386
Auto braking after a collision
399
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
383
Switching off the car
387
Gearbox
399
Ignition positions
388
Manual gearbox
400
Selecting ignition mode
389
Automatic gearbox
400
Alcohol lock*
390
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
401
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
390
403
Before starting the engine with
the alcohol lock*
391
Changing gear with steering
wheel paddles*
Gear selector inhibitor
405
Brake functions
391
Kick-down function
405
Foot brake
392
Gear shift indicator
406
Brake assistance
406
393
All-wheel drive*
Braking on wet roads
393
Drive modes*
407
Braking on gritted roads
393
Changing drive mode*
409
Brake system maintenance
394
Drive mode Eco
409
Parking brake
394
411
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
395
Activating and deactivating drive
mode Eco with the function button
Start/stop function
412
Automatic parking brake activation setting
396
Parking on a hill
396
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
397
Automatic braking when stationary
397
Driving with start/stop function
412
Deactivating the start/stop function
414
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
414
Level control* and shock absorption
416
Low speed control*
417
417
418
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
398
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function button
Help when starting on a hill
399
Hill descent control*
9
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control* with the function
button
Economical driving
Preparations for a long trip
420
421
Winter driving
422
Driving in water
422
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
Filling fuel
423
423
Handling of fuel
425
Petrol
425
Petrol particle filter
Diesel
10
419
Specifications for towbar*
440
Sound, media and Internet
458
Extendable and retractable towbar*
441
Audio settings
458
Driving with a trailer
443
Sound experience*
459
Trailer stability assist*
444
Apps
459
Checking trailer lamps
445
Downloading apps
460
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
446
Updating apps
461
Towing
447
Deleting apps
462
Fitting and removing the towing eye
449
Radio
462
Recovery
450
Start radio
463
451
Changing radio band and radio station
463
452
Searching for radio stations
464
454
Save radio channels in the Radio
Favourites app
465
Settings for radio
466
HomeLink®*
HomeLink®*
426
Programming
427
Using HomeLink®*
HomeLink®*
Empty tank and diesel engine
428
Type approval for
Diesel particulate filter
429
Compass*
455
Emission control with AdBlue®
430
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
455
Calibrating the compass*
455
454
RDS radio
467
Digital radio*
468
Link between FM and digital radio*
468
Media player
469
Handling AdBlue®
431
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
432
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
434
Media playback
469
Overheating in the engine and
drive system
436
Controlling and changing media
471
Overloading the starter battery
437
Using jump starting with another
battery
437
Towbar*
439
Searching media
472
Gracenote®
472
Video
473
Playing a video
473
Playing back DivX®
Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones
488
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
500
474
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
488
Data sharing for services
500
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
475
Managing phone calls
488
Media via USB port
475
Managing text messages
489
Connecting a device via USB port
475
Settings for text messages
490
Technical specifications for USB
devices
476
Managing the phone book
491
Compatible media formats
477
Apple® CarPlay®*
478
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
478
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
480
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
480
Android Auto*
481
Using Android Auto*
482
474
Settings for video
474
Media via Bluetooth®
Settings for phone
491
Settings for Bluetooth devices
492
Wireless phone charger*
492
Using the wireless telephone charger*
492
Internet-connected car*
493
Connect the car to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-enabled phone
494
Connect the car to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi)
495
Settings for Android Auto*
482
Tips for using Android Auto*
483
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
495
Phone
484
Settings for car modem*
496
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
485
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
497
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
486
No or poor Internet connection
498
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
487
Remove Wi-Fi network
498
Wi-Fi technologies and security
499
User terms and conditions and
data sharing
499
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
487
Storage space on hard disk
501
License agreement for audio and
media
502
11
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
514
Emergency puncture repair kit
534
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Dimension designation for tyre
535
Passenger compartment interior
542
538
Tunnel console
543
Using the cigarette lighter*
544
544
545
516
Using a puncture repair kit
Dimension designation for wheel rim
517
Tyres' rotation direction
517
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
518
Emptying the ashtray*
Checking tyre pressure
518
Electrical sockets
519
Using electrical sockets
545
Recommended tyre pressure
520
Using the glovebox
546
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
520
Sun visors
548
Saving a new tyre pressure in the
monitoring system*
522
Cargo area
548
Recommendations for loading
See tyre pressure status in the
centre display*
548
523
Roof load and loading on load carriers
549
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
524
Bag hooks
550
Load retaining eyelets
551
When changing wheels
525
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
551
Tool kit
525
Folding up the cargo area floor
551
Jack*
526
Release folding cargo area floor*
552
Wheel bolts
527
Fitting and removing the safety net*
553
Removing a wheel
527
Remove and store the parcel shelf
555
Fitting the wheels
529
First aid kit*
556
Spare wheel*
531
Warning triangle
557
Handling the spare wheel
532
Adjusting tyre pressure
12
Winter tyres
532
Snow chains
533
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
560
Symbols on the batteries
582
Rustproofing
607
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
560
Battery recycle
583
Car paintwork
608
Download Center
561
Fuses and central electrical units
583
Touching up minor paintwork damage
608
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
561
Replacing a fuse
584
Colour codes
609
Fuses in engine compartment
585
609
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
590
Replacing the wiper blade, rear
window
Cleaning the interior
597
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
610
Cleaning the centre display
597
Set the wiper blades in service
position
611
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
598
Filling washer fluid
612
Cleaning the seatbelts
599
Car status
562
Book service and repair
563
Sending car information to a workshop 564
Raise the car
565
Servicing the climate control system
567
Opening and closing the bonnet
567
Engine compartment overview
569
Engine oil
570
Checking and filling with engine oil
571
Topping up coolant
Bulb replacement
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
599
Cleaning leather upholstery*
600
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
600
572
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
601
601
573
Cleaning the exterior
Exterior lamp positions
574
Polishing and waxing
602
Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
574
Handwashing
603
Changing brake light bulb
576
Automatic car wash
604
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
577
High-pressure washing
605
Bulb specifications
577
Cleaning the wiper blades
606
Starter battery
578
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
606
Support battery
581
Cleaning wheel rims
607
13
SPECIFICATIONS
14
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Type designations
616
Dimensions
619
Weights
621
Towing capacity and towball load
622
Engine specifications
624
Engine oil — specifications
625
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
627
Coolant — specifications
628
Transmission fluid — specifications
628
Brake fluid — specifications
628
Fuel tank - volume
629
Tank capacity for AdBlue®
629
Air conditioning — specifications
629
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
631
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
635
Minimum permitted tyre load
index and speed rating for tyres
637
Approved tyre pressures
639
Alphabetical Index
641
OWNER'S INFORMATION
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Owner information
The car's centre display1
Owner's information is available in several
different product formats, both digital and
printed. The owner's manual is available in
the car's centre display, as a mobile app and
on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a
Quick Guide and a supplement to the
owner's manual available in the glovebox,
with specifications and fuse information,
amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
In the centre display, drag
down the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual
navigation with exterior and
interior images of the car. The
information is searchable and
is also divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and
select the car. Available in the
app are video tutorials and
options for visual navigation
with exterior and interior images of the car.
The content is searchable, and the various
sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF
format. On the Volvo Cars
support site there are also
video tutorials and further
information and help regarding your Volvo and
your car ownership. The page is available for
most markets.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information
on fuses and specifications,
as well as a summary of
important and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the
most commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may
also be available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo
dealer to order.
1
16
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that
applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is
maintained and handled in accordance
with Volvo's recommendations in the
owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the
printed information then it is always the
printed information that applies.
Owner's manual in centre display
digital2
A
version of the owner's manual is
available in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed
from the top view.
The information in the owner's manual can be
accessed directly via the owner's manual
homepage or its top menu.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Owner's manual
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not switch to a
language that is difficult to understand as
this may make it difficult to find your way
back through the screen structure.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
(p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
2 Applies
for most markets.
Top view with button for owner's manual.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the
top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
}}
17
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Contextual owner's manual
Related information
•
Navigate in the owner's manual in the
centre display (p. 18)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
•
Downloading apps (p. 460)
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display top view in the car.
The content is searchable, and the various
sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Top view with button for contextual owner's manual.
The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to
an article in the owner's manual that describes
the active function shown on the screen.
When the contextual owner's manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner's
manual in the top view.
Tapping on the contextual owner's manual
therefore opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown
on the screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual
– an article that is related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the
car. For downloaded third party apps,
for example, it is not possible to access appspecific articles.
18
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
–
To open the owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap
on Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The
options can be accessed from the owner's
manual homepage and from the top menu.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Opening the menu in the top menu
–
Press
in the upper list in the owner's
manual.
> A menu with different options for finding information is opened:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the
owner's manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcategories. The same article can
be found in several appropriate categories so that it can
be found more easily.
1.
Quick Guide
Press the symbol to access a
page with links to a selection
of articles that can be useful
to read in order to get to
know the more common
functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via
categories, but are collected here for faster
access. Tap on an article in order to read it in
its entirety.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with
hotspots that lead to articles
about those parts of the car.
3. Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
3. Tap on the title to open the article.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access
the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order
to read it in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing
at
the top right when an article is open. When an
article has been saved as a favourite the star is
filled in: .
To remove an article as a favourite, press the
star again in the current article.
Press Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2. Tap on a main category ( ).
> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles
( ) is shown.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
Video
1.
Press Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images are shown
with so-called hotspots in place. The
hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse
among the images.
Press the symbol to view
brief instruction videos for
various functions in the car.
}}
19
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version of the owner's manual is
available in the car as well as
other useful information.
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app3 from both the App Store and Google
Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and
tablets.
various sections are designed to facilitate navigation.
Using the search function in the top
menu
1.
Tap on
in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower
part of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being
entered.
3. Tap on the article or category to access it.
Related information
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior
and interior images where different parts of
the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in
question. The content is searchable, and the
3 For
20
certain mobile devices.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store
and Google Play.
Related information
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Volvo Cars support site
Support on the Internet
in it is possible to get an overview of service,
agreements and warranties,
amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model.
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site.
The support site is available for most markets.
Related information
More information on your car is available on
the Volvo Cars website and support site.
It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*,
the navigation system* and apps. Videos and
step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the
Internet via a mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation
there is the facility to download maps from the
support page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year
to download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to
customer support and your nearest Volvo
retailer.
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Reading the owner's manual
To help you get to know your new car, read
the Owner's Manual before you drive it for
the first time.
Reading the owner's manual is a way to
become familiar with new functions, get
advice on how to handle the car in different
situations and learn how to make use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's
manual.
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all possible functions, options and
accessories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is
not intended as an indication or guarantee that
all of these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology
used may not exactly match terminology used
in sales, marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications
may mean that information, descriptions and
illustrations in the owner's manual differ from
the equipment in the car. We reserve the right
to make modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if
problems should arise then the necessary
information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
}}
* Option/accessory.
21
OWNER'S INFORMATION
||
Options/accessories
In addition to standard equipment, the
owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories
(retrofitted extra equipment).
All, at the time of publication known, options
and accessories are marked with an asterisk:
*.
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for
the needs of different markets and national or
local laws and regulations.
NOTE
Risk of property damage
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a clear manner. The decals in the car have
the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
22
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
* Option/accessory.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
Information
ate from the car's appearance depending on
equipment level and market.
The owner's manual and the
environment
Related information
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed
owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified
forests or other controlled sources.
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
location in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car is available on
the respective decals for your car.
Related information
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Illustrations and video clips
Illustrations and video clips used in the
owner's manual are sometimes schematic and
are intended to provide an overall picture or
example of a certain function. They may devi-
23
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to
a wide range of services via a single username and password.
NOTE
The services available may vary over time
and depend on equipment level and market.
Examples of services:
•
Volvo On Call app* – check the car with
your phone. For example, you can check
fuel level, show the nearest petrol station
and lock the car remotely.
•
Send to Car – send addresses from map
services on the Web, directly to the car.
•
Book service and repair – register a workshop/dealer at volvocars.com and book
service directly from the car.
NOTE
If the username/password for a service
(e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is
also changed automatically for other services.
Volvo ID is created from the car,
volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app1.
1
26
When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several services will be made available. Several
Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and
several cars can even be connected to the
same Volvo ID.
Related information
•
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
(p. 26)
•
Book service and repair (p. 563)
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at
volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app2, the
Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to
enable use of the various Volvo ID services.
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app
1. Download the Volvo ID app from
Download Centre in the centre display's
app view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars
website
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3
using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
If you have Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call
app4
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo
On Call app to the phone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows:
1.
2. Select to create Volvo ID.
3. The web page for creating a Volvo ID
opens. Fill in the requested information.
NOTE
4. Tick the box to accept the terms and conditions.
5. Press the button that creates your Volvo
ID.
6. An e-mail message is sent to the address
given. Confirm that the address is correct.
> Now the Volvo ID is ready to use.
If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from Download Centre in the centre
display's app view.
To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to
your Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the
car. Volvo ID services can now be used.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 26)
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 460)
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
2 Only applies to certain markets.
3 Available on certain markets.
4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory.
27
YOUR VOLVO
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working
on the development of safer and more effi-
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core
values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life
cycle of the car and takes into account the
environmental impact it has, from design to
scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic
principle is that every new product developed
must have less impact on the environment
than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the
28
cient products and solutions in order to
reduce the negative impact on the environment.
air inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than
the air outside thanks to the climate control
system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's
manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach
to the operation's environmental issues, which
leads to continuous improvement with
reduced environmental impact. Holding the
ISO certificate also means that environmental
laws and regulations in force are complied
with. Volvo also requires that its partners must
also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of
Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing
fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions
and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their
respective classes. Lower fuel consumption
generally results in lower emission of the
greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
YOUR VOLVO
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and economical car can
contribute to reduced environmental impact
and also involve reduced costs for the owner
of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce
fuel consumption and thereby save money and
contribute to a better environment - here is
some advice:
•
Plan for an effective average speed.
Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx.
50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx.
30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.
•
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service
and maintenance of the car.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary
stops and uneven speed contribute to
increased fuel consumption.
•
Use preconditioning* before starting in
cold conditions - it improves starting
capacity and reduces wear in cold
weather. The engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which
decreases consumption and reduces
emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries
and oil, in an environmentally safe manner.
Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen
entering the passenger compartment via the
air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*
ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than
the air in the traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger
compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and
ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the
air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise
in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function
that allows the fan to start when the car is
unlocked with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order
to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the
details are hand-made, such as the seams of
the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The
interior is monitored in order not to emit
strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and
bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's
workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills
and discharges into the environment. The
workshop staff have the knowledge and the
tools required to guarantee good environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled
in an environmentally sound manner. Almost
all of the car can be recycled. The last owner
* Option/accessory.
}}
29
YOUR VOLVO
||
of the car is therefore requested to contact a
retailer for referral to a certified/approved
recycling facility.
Related information
•
•
•
30
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 631)
Economical driving (p. 420)
Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 204)
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 23)
•
Air quality (p. 183)
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
IntelliSafe – driver support and
safety
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems5, whose purpose is to make a car journey safer, to prevent injuries and to protect
passengers and other road users.
WARNING
The functions are supplementary aids they cannot handle all situations in all conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that
the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Support
With the aim of assisting the driver to drive
the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the following functions.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Active main beam
Tunnel detection
Pilot Assist
*Cross Traffic Alert
*Blind Spot Information
Park Assist*
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera*
Road Sign Information*
Electronic stability control
•
•
•
Roll Stability Control
Whiplash Protection System
Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners
Airbags
NOTE
Speed limiter*
Read the individual sections on each system in order to fully understand the functions and learn about important warnings.
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control*
Rear Collision Warning
Driver Alert Control
Related information
All-wheel drive6
•
•
•
Prevention
With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an
accident, IntelliSafe has the following functions.
Active main beam (p. 140)
Safety (p. 42)
Driving support systems (p. 258)
• City Safety
• Distance Warning*
• Lane assistance
• Collision Avoid. Assistance
Protection
With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers in certain situations in the event of an
accident, IntelliSafe has the following collaborative functions.
Park Assist Pilot*
5 Some of the systems
6 All Wheel Drive
are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model.
* Option/accessory.
31
YOUR VOLVO
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to use different
types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi
hotspot.
This is Sensus
32
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and
online connectivity with the digital world. An
intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
to receive relevant support, information and
entertainment when it is necessary, without
distracting the driver.
Information when it is needed, where
it is needed
The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is
shown in different locations based on how it
should be prioritised by the driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface
between driver and car. It is Sensus that
makes communication possible between you,
the car and the outside world.
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Driver display
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
played. The display is operated via the two
steering wheel keypads.
Centre display
Driver display7.
7
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
}}
33
YOUR VOLVO
||
Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore
minimal. The screen can even be operated
while wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the
climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is
shown in the centre display can be acted on
by the driver or someone else in the car when
the opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the
driver needing to take his/her
hands off the steering wheel.
The system can understand
natural speech. Use voice
recognition to, for example,
play back a song, call someone, increase the
temperature or read out a text message.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
34
Driver display (p. 75)
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 497)
* Option/accessory.
YOUR VOLVO
Software updates
Recording data
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best
experience of your car, Volvo continuously
develops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered.
You can update the software in your Volvo to
the latest version when your car is serviced at
an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update allows you to benefit from available improvements, including improvements
from earlier software updates.
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's
operation, functionality and incidents are
recorded in the car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to
register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times
when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes
an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in
order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short time, usually 30 seconds or less.
For more information about released updates
and answers to frequently asked questions,
please go to support.volvocars.com.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary
depending on market, model, model year
and options.
Related information
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of
traffic accidents or collision-like situations:
•
How the various systems in the car
worked
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32)
•
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us understand the
circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation
occurs. The EDR does not record any data
during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the
system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident
or near-miss situation. However, other parties,
such as the police, could use the recorded
data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected
after a traffic accident. Special equipment and
access to either the vehicle or the EDR is
required to be able to interpret the registered
data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped
with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the
car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults
affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver
support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto
brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to
diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred
in the vehicle. The registered information is
also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal
requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the
vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
}}
35
YOUR VOLVO
In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for
research and product development with the
aim of continuously improving the safety and
quality of Volvo cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To
comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other
authorities who may assert a legal right to
access such. Special technical equipment
which Volvo and workshops that have entered
into agreements with Volvo have access to is
required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the
information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely
stored and managed and that its management
complies with relevant legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo retailer.
36
Terms & Conditions for Services
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo offers services that help to enhance car
safety and comfort.
These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services.
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
integrity of everyone visiting our website.
This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of:
Before using the services, it is important for
you to read the support information for Terms
& Conditions for Services at
www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36)
•
The circumstances in which we gather
and process your personal data.
•
•
•
The types of personal data we gather.
The reason we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
For more information on the policy, search
support information at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 499)
•
•
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)
Recording data (p. 35)
YOUR VOLVO
Important information on
accessories and auxiliary
equipment
WARNING
•
•
Installation of accessories (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 38)
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is
only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo
service technicians. Certain accessories only
function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system.
• Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and
qualified Volvo service technician knows
where accessories may or may not be
safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek
the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo
service technician before installing any
accessories in or on your car.
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
•
Accessories that are not approved by
Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car.
•
Some of the car's performance or safety
systems can be negatively affected if you
install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone
without experience of the car to install
accessories.
•
Damage that is caused by accessories
installed in a non-approved or incorrect
way is not covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be
found in the service and warranty booklet.
The driver always bears the ultimate
responsibility that the car is used safely
and that laws and regulations in force are
followed.
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only
carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in
the car's computer system.
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for
the needs of different markets and national or
local laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of
uncertainty over what is standard or an
option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
Installation of accessories
It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information
and the service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual then the printed
information always has precedence.
Related information
}}
37
YOUR VOLVO
||
Volvo does not accept any liability for
deaths, personal injury or costs arising as
a result of the installation of non-original
accessories.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative
effect on the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners
only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only
carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in
the car's computer system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is
under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
38
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is
connected to the On-board Diagnostic
socket (OBDII). This socket should only be
used by trained and qualified Volvo service
technicians.
Related information
•
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
YOUR VOLVO
Showing the car's identification
number
Driver distraction
When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example,
you will need the car's identification number
(VIN8).
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Continue to System System
Information Vehicle Identification
Number.
> The car's identification number is
shown.
Another way of finding the VIN is to look on
the dashboard through the car's windscreen,
on the first page of the service and warranty
booklet or in the car's registration certificate.
8 Vehicle
Identification Number
VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models.
The driver is responsible for doing everything
possible to ensure the safety of themselves,
their passengers and other road users. Part of
this responsibility is avoiding distractions
such as carrying out an activity that is not
related to operating the car in a driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with
content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones
with handsfree, navigation systems and audio
systems with lots of functions. You may also
have other portable electronic devices for your
own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe
way they can enrich the driving experience. If
they are used in the wrong way they could distract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or
function in the car in such a way that it will
distract you from the task of driving safely.
Distractions can lead to serious accidents.
Apart from these general warnings, we offer
the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car:
}}
39
YOUR VOLVO
||
WARNING
•
Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile
phone while the car is moving.
•
If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change
the itinerary when the car is parked.
•
Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's
presets when the car is parked and
then use the programmed presets for
faster and simpler use of the radio.
•
Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving.
Related information
•
40
Sound, media and Internet (p. 458)
SAFETY
SAFETY
Safety
WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with several safety
systems that work together to protect the
vehicle's driver and passengers in the event
of an accident.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different
types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners.
Depending on the specific accident situation,
such as collisions at different angles, roll-over
or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide good protection.
If the warning symbol remains illuminated
or is switched on during driving and the
message SRS airbag Service urgent
Drive to workshop is shown in the driver
display, it means that part of one of the
safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted as
soon as possible.
WARNING
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol
is illuminated instead and the driver
display shows the same message.
Warning symbol in driver display
42
Seatbelt
Never modify or repair the car's various
safety systems yourself. Defective work in
one of the systems can cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
There are also mechanical safety systems
such as Whiplash Protection System. The car
is also constructed so that a large part of the
force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's
electrical system is set in ignition
position II. The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's
safety system is fault-free.
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant
drivers adjust their seating position.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Airbags (p. 49)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Safety mode (p. 56)
Child safety (p. 58)
The diagonal section should wrap over the
shoulder then be routed between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. It
must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
SAFETY
that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). The aim should be to
position the seat with as large a distance as
possible between abdomen and steering
wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests
and seat cushion, as well as a specially
designed head restraint in the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle
all have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat
backrests are lowered backward and the seat
cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of
the forces that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the seats must be replaced. Some
of the seats' protective properties may
have been lost even if they do not appear
damaged.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
}}
* Option/accessory.
43
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered
then any load must be secured to prevent it
from sliding up to the front seat backrest in
the event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear
seat, the corresponding front seat must be
moved forward so that it does not make
contact with the lowered backrest or child
seat.
Seating position
For good protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's
function is not obstructed.
WHIPS and child seats
Seatbelts
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by WHIPS.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide good protection. Do not
lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 329)
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt
to hooks or other interior fittings, as this
prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Set the correct seating position in the front
seat before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in
the centre of the seat with as little space as
possible between the head and the head
restraint.
44
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
•
•
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Putting on seatbelts
1.
Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure
it is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia
reel that is locked in the following situations:
•
•
•
•
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab
in the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt
into the buckle on the correct side. The
seatbelts and buckles would otherwise
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of serious injury.
if the belt is extended too quickly.
during braking and acceleration.
if the car leans heavily.
when driving in bends.
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
(p. 45)
}}
45
SAFETY
||
3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt
to hooks or other interior fittings, as this
prevents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down
over the arm).
Press together the seat mounting and
move the seatbelt up or down.
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly
not function as intended in the event of a
collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.
Taking off seatbelts
1.
Press the red button on the seatbelt
buckle and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it
in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
•
•
•
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over
the abdomen).
46
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)
SAFETY
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric* seatbelt tensioners that
can tension the seatbelts in critical situations
and collisions.
When the critical situation has come to an
end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt pretensioner are restored automatically, but they
can also be restored manually.
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 329)
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.
The seatbelts in the front seat and at the outer
seats in the rear are equipped with a standard
belt pretensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in
the event of a collision with sufficient force in
order to more effectively restrain the occupant.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
Electric seatbelt tensioner*
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust
the occupant to a better position, reducing the
risk of striking the car's interior and improving
the effect of safety systems, such as the car's
airbags.
•
•
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52)
IMPORTANT
Standard seatbelt tensioner
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support
systems City Safety and Rear Collision
Warning. In critical situations, such as panic
braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls
into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the
seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
•
Related information
•
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner*
(p. 48)
* Option/accessory.
47
SAFETY
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner*
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to
be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt
remains extended.
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
Door and seatbelt reminder
Seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to
wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an
open door, bonnet or lid.
Driver display graphics
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset.
WARNING
Visual reminder in the roof console.
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire seatbelt must be
replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective
properties may have been lost even if the
seatbelt does not appear damaged. The
seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows
signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt
must be type-approved and designed for
installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
48
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Seatbelts (p. 44)
A visual reminder is given in the roof console
and by means of the warning symbol in the
driver display.
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which
seats in the car are occupied by belted and
unbelted passengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet,
tailgate or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display's graphic when a
belt is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the
driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
•
Related information
•
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers.
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. The driver
display's graphics are shown when the
seatbelts are in use.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat
is unfastened during a journey by means
of a visual and acoustic reminder. The
reminder will cease once the seatbelt has
been put on again.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that none, one or
more airbags are deployed.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door
is not closed properly, the driver display's
graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a
safe place as soon as possible and close the
source of the warning.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter
battery. Do not attempt to start the car
since the airbags may deploy. Recovering
the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then
the driver display's information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then
the driver display's warning symbol
illuminates.
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that it is transported to an authorised
}}
49
SAFETY
||
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
•
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
Driver airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
equipped with steering wheel airbag and
knee airbag1 on the driver's side.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest.
WARNING
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
1
50
Safety (p. 42)
Driver airbags (p. 50)
Passenger airbag (p. 51)
Side airbags (p. 55)
Inflatable curtains (p. 55)
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Always contact a doctor.
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
and deflation of the airbag, occurs within
tenths of a second.
WARNING
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags
help to protect the head, neck, face and chest
of the driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the
occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs,
smoke escapes into the car. This is completely
normal. The entire process, including inflation
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Steering wheel airbag location
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
Knee airbag1 location
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
SAFETY
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the
top or front of the panel where the knee
airbag is stowed.
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle
is equipped with an airbag on the passenger
side in the front seat.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest.
Related information
•
•
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
Airbags (p. 49)
Passenger airbag (p. 51)
WARNING
Front passenger airbag in front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag
helps to protect the head, neck, face and
chest of the passenger as well as the knees
and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
the initial collision impact for the occupant.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The
entire process, including inflation and deflation
of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Passenger airbag location
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
}}
51
SAFETY
||
Label for passenger airbag
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to
activate/deactivate the passenger airbag,
the airbag will always be activated.
Activating and deactivating
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if
the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger
Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
The switch for the passenger airbag is located
on the passenger end of the instrument panel
and is accessible when the passenger door is
open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
Related information
•
•
•
Airbags (p. 49)
Driver airbags (p. 50)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52)
ON - The airbag is activated and all frontfacing passengers (children and adults)
can sit safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
52
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
Activating passenger airbag
If the car is not equipped with a switch to
activate/deactivate the passenger airbag,
the airbag will always be activated.
Pull the switch outward and turn from
OFF to ON.
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position
I or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the
roof console approx. 6 seconds after the
car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol
in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat when the airbag is
activated.
The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
}}
53
SAFETY
||
Deactivating passenger airbag
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.
Related information
•
•
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
to OFF.
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position
I or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the
roof console approx. 6 seconds after the
car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II.
54
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the passenger
seat when the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Child seats (p. 58)
SAFETY
Side airbags
WARNING
The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in
the event of a collision.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the side airbag
system could cause malfunction and result
in serious personal injury.
Inflatable curtains
The Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent
the driver and passengers from striking their
heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel,
since this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side
airbags.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front
seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact.
The airbag deflates when compressed by the
collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 49)
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car.
The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and
result in serious personal injury.
}}
55
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using
Volvo genuine parts that are approved for
fitting within these areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed
in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
56
Airbags (p. 49)
Safety mode
WARNING
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged
any of the car's vital functions, such as the
fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning
symbol as long as the display is not damaged
and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car
has reduced functionality.
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that engaging
an authorised Volvo workshop to check
and restore the car to normal status after
Safety mode See Owner's manual has
been shown.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See Owner's manual
message is shown in the driver display.
Leave the car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start
and move the car for a short distance, if in a
dangerous traffic situation for example.
Related information
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 57)
Recovery (p. 450)
SAFETY
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start
and move the car for a short distance, if in a
dangerous traffic situation for example.
3. Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal status.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
WARNING
2. Switch off the car.
Safety mode (p. 56)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Recovery (p. 450)
If the message Safety mode See
Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed
but a vehicle recovery service must then be
used instead. Even if the car appears to be
driveable, hidden damage may make the
car impossible to control once moving.
Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See Owner's manual
message is shown in the driver display.
Leave the car at once.
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
Starting the car after safety mode
1.
Related information
Moving the car after safety mode
1.
If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
57
SAFETY
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats
and attachment devices) which is designed for
fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child
safety equipment, you obtain good conditions
for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and
is simple to use.
The equipment that should be used is selected
taking account of the weight and size of the
child.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a
rear-facing child seat until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then in a front-facing child seat until the child
is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child
seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country
to country. Check what does apply.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Related information
•
•
•
Safety (p. 42)
Child seats (p. 58)
Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 243)
Child seats
Suitable child seats should always be used
when children are travelling in the car.
Children should sit comfortably and safely.
Make sure that the child seat is positioned,
mounted and used correctly.
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not
in use.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child
seats may cause wear and tear on the car's
fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick
guard accessory to protect the car's fittings.
58
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
Child safety (p. 58)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 60)
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52)
Upper mounting points for child
seats
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be
routed through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the mounting point. If this is not possible,
follow the recommendations from the child
seat manufacturer.
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats on the rear seat's outer
seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the upper mounting points.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
The location of the mounting points
NOTE
In cars with a parcel shelf, this must be
removed before child seats can be
attached to the mounting points.
Related information
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols
on the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
•
•
Child seats (p. 58)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 60)
•
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
* Option/accessory.
59
SAFETY
Lower mounting points for child
seats
switch to activate/deactivate the passenger
airbag*.
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting
points for child seats in the front seat* and
the rear seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing
child seats.
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX
mounting points for child seats in the rear
seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX2 is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the lower mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are
located on the rear section of the front seat's
floor rails.
Related information
•
•
Child seats (p. 58)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 60)
•
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
The mounting points in the front seat are
located on the sides of the passenger seat's
legroom.
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a
60
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2
on the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of
the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Related information
•
•
Child seats (p. 58)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
•
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
Child seat positioning
It is important to position the child seat in the
right place in the car. The choice of location
depends, amongst other things, on the type
of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and
adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear
seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a
child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then
rear-facing child seats can be fitted on the
front passenger seat.
2 Names
and symbols change depending on market.
}}
61
SAFETY
||
Label for passenger airbag
Child seat mounting
NOTE
It is important to remember a number of
things when a child seat is mounted and
used, which depend on where the child seat
is positioned.
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not
in use.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Related information
•
•
•
62
Child seats (p. 58)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
3 The
accessory range varies depending on market.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or
in springs, rails or beams under the seat.
Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Long-term installation and use of child
seats may cause wear and tear on the car's
fittings. Volvo recommends using the kick
guard accessory to protect the car's fittings.
Installation in the front seat
•
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
When fitting front-facing child seats,
check that the passenger airbag is activated.
•
Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved
or are semi-universal, and where the car is
included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 accessory.
SAFETY
•
•
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these3.
If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support
legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.
The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
•
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the
seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always
remember to remove the lower straps
when the child seat is not installed.
If the child seat is equipped with support
legs, always fit the support leg/support
legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.
Installation in the rear seat
•
Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved
or are semi-universal, and where the car is
included on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
•
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved
for i-Size4.
•
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint
before being tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.
3 The accessory range
4 Varies depending on
Related information
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
With the installation of an infant seat in the rear seat,
Volvo recommends a distance of at least 50 mm
(2 inches) from the front part of the infant seat to the
rearmost part of the seat in front.
varies depending on market.
market.
63
SAFETY
Overview table for location of child
seats
The table gives an overview of the types of
child seats suitable for the car's seats.
Seat positions in right-hand drive cars.
Seat positions in left-hand drive cars.
Seat positionB
A
B
C
i-Size child seats
Universally approved child seats secured using the car's seatbelt
Other child seat categoriesA
3, 5
2C, 3, 4, 5
2C, 3, 5
For more information, contact the child seat manufacturer.
According to the numbering above.
Activated airbag for front-facing child seats. Deactivated airbag for rear-facing child seats.
Related information
•
•
•
64
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
SAFETY
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only
rear-facing child seats)A
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)A
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UB, C
X
UC
UC
UB, C
X
UC
UC
LD
UFB, E
UE, LD
UE
LD
UFB, F
UF, LD
UF
}}
65
SAFETY
||
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only
rear-facing child seats)A
Group 3
22-36 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)A
UFB, F
X
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
UF
UF
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
B
C
D
E
F
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
Adjust the seat to a more elevated position.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
Related information
•
•
•
•
66
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
•
Seatbelts (p. 44)
SAFETY
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129.
The table gives a recommendation for which
i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
Type of child seat
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag,
only rear-facing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
X
X
i-UA, B
X
i-Size child seats
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
B
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age.
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).
Related information
•
•
•
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 60)
67
SAFETY
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and
for what size of child.
Weight
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
68
Size classA
Type of child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model
must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle
list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section
on installing a child seat before installing
one in the car.
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)B, C
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child
seats)B, C
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
ILB, D, XE
X
ILD
X
ILB, D, F, XE
X
ILD
X
SAFETY
Weight
Group 1
9-18 kg
Size classA
Type of child seat
A
Front-facing child seat
B
Front-facing child seat
B1
Front-facing child seat
C
Rear-facing child seat
D
Rear-facing child seat
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats)B, C
Front seat (with activated airbag, only
front-facing child
seats)B, C
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
X
ILB, F, G, XE
ILG, IUFG
X
ILB, F, XE
X
IL
X
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal
categories.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
There are no upper mounting points for child seats here.
The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats.
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the
front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be
included on the vehicle list for the child
seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about
which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
}}
69
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
•
•
70
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 62)
Overview table for location of child seats
(p. 64)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child
seats (p. 60)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Centre and tunnel console
Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing* of tailgate
Roof console
Centre display
Start button
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox
Driver display
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media, drive mode button*
Panorama roof*
Electrical socket, USB port, wireless
phone charger*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Gear selector
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
72
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver's door
Instruments and controls in righthand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Memory for settings for power front seat*,
door mirrors
Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety locks*
Bonnet opening
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox
Driver display
Lighting control (p. 136)
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Starting the car (p. 386)
Driver display (p. 75)
Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing* of tailgate
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console, ON CALL button*
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
}}
Gearbox (p. 399)
* Option/accessory.
73
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Centre and tunnel console
Driver's door
Centre display
Memory for settings for power front seat*,
door mirrors
Start button
Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety locks*
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting,
media, drive mode button*
Bonnet opening
Electrical socket, USB port, wireless
phone charger*
Gear selector
Related information
Parking brake
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic braking when stationary
74
Adjusting front seat
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Lighting control (p. 136)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Driver display (p. 75)
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Gearbox (p. 399)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display
The driver display shows information about
the car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators
and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's
equipment, settings and which functions are
active at that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a
door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The
driver display extinguishes after a while if it is
not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of
the following:
•
•
Depress the brake pedal.
Activate ignition position I.
•
Open one of the doors.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not
illuminate on activation/start or be fully or
partially illegible, the car must not be used.
You should visit a workshop immediately.
Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display
the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or
other safety systems may not be shown. In
which case, the driver cannot check the
status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
Location in the driver display:
On the left
In the middle
On the right
Speedometer
Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gaugeA
Trip meter
Outside temperature gauge
Gear shift indicator
OdometerB
Clock
Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information
Start/stop function status
–
Media player
Distance to empty tank
–
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
}}
* Option/accessory.
75
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
A
B
On the left
In the middle
On the right
–
Phone
App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
–
Voice recognition
–
–
CompassA
–
Depends on drive mode selected.
Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol
•
The dynamic symbol in its
basic form.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for
different types of message. An amber or red
marker around the symbol indicates the
degree of severity of a control or warning message.
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 83)
Trip computer (p. 78)
•
•
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
•
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 92)
Examples of indicator symbol.
With an animation, the basic shape can be
turned into a graphic showing where a problem is situated, or in order to clarify information.
Related information
•
•
76
Driver display settings (p. 77)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 85)
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Driver display settings
Settings via the centre display
Settings for the driver display's display
options can be made via the driver display's
application menu and via the centre display's
settings menu.
Selecting information type
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
Settings via the driver display's app
menu
2. Press My Car Displays
Display Information.
Driver
3. Select what should be shown in the background:
Show no information in background
•
• Show information for current
2. Tap on System System Languages
and Units System Language to select
language.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
These settings are personal and are saved
automatically to the active driver profile.
Related information
•
•
playing media
• Show navigation even if no route is
set
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 92)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Selecting theme
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
2. Tap on My Car
Themes.
The app menu is opened and controlled using
the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel.
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from:
•
•
•
•
trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
•
•
•
•
Displays
Display
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings
Selecting language
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
* Option/accessory.
77
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Fuel gauge
Trip computer
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
The car's trip computer records vales such as
e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average
speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous
and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in
the driver display.
Related information
78
Driver display (p. 75)
Filling fuel (p. 423)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 629)
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset
automatically if the car is not used for at least
four hours.
The following information is registered while
driving:
Mileage
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
•
•
•
Trip meter
•
•
•
•
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time
to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates
and changes to amber. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed
via system settings in the centre display.
Odometer
Examples of trip computer information in the driver
display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary
depending on car model.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
•
•
•
•
•
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Distance to empty tank
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that
the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second.
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the
remaining mileage with the fuel
available in the tank.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles)
and the remaining drivable fuel quantity.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
•
•
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 81)
Driver display (p. 75)
Changing system units (p. 120)
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated
values can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app.
Via the app menu, you can choose which
information is shown on the driver display.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it
easier to drive in countries where speed limit
signs are in a different unit than that shown in
the car's instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows
the corresponding speed in km/h and vice
versa.
Open and navigate in the app menu1 using the righthand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Related information
•
Show trip data in the driver display
(p. 79)
•
Resetting the trip meter (p. 80)
}}
79
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
1.
Open the app menu in the driver display
by pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message
first has to be confirmed by pressing the O
button (4) before the app menu can be
opened.)
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to
select which information to show in the
driver display:
•
•
•
•
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left
or right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next
four menu rows show measured values
for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in
the list with (3).
•
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk
switch.
Odometer
Distance to empty tank
Tourist (alternative speedometer)
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no
display of mileage
Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption
Select or deselect an option with the O
button (4). The change is made immediately.
Related information
•
•
–
Trip computer (p. 78)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 80)
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press
on the RESET button on the left-hand
stalk switch.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four
or more hours.
Related information
•
1
80
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Trip computer (p. 78)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Settings for trip statistics
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
1. Open the Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and
provide an overview that facilitates more fuelefficient driving.
Open the Driver
performance app in app
view in order to show the trip
statistics.
Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled
in from the right as driving progresses. The bar
on the far right shows the value for the current
distance.
2. Press Preferences to
Trip statistics from the trip computer2.
•
change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
•
reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for
more than 4 hours.
•
reset data for the current trip.
Related information
•
•
Settings for trip statistics (p. 81)
Trip computer (p. 78)
The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the
trip statistics were reset.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always
reset simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed
via system settings in the centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
2 The
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 81)
Trip computer (p. 78)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 80)
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
81
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Date and time
The clock is shown in both the driver display
and the centre display.
Clock location
zone is then adjusted automatically based on
the location of the car. For certain types of
navigation systems, the current location
(country) must also be set to obtain the right
time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time
and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow
down on the touch screen.
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature is shown in the
driver display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of
the car.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select the
Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for automatic setting of summer time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can
be selected manually.
Related information
•
•
In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at
the top right of the status bar.
Date and time settings
–
Select Settings System Date and
Time in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust the date and time by pressing the
up or down arrow on the touch screen.
Automatic time for cars with GPS
When the car is equipped with a navigation
system, Auto Time can be selected. The time
82
Driver display (p. 75)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may
display a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is in
the range –5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to
36 °F), a snowflake symbol lights up
that warns of potentially slippery
conditions.
Change the unit for the temperature gauge,
etc. via system settings in the centre display's
top view.
Related information
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Changing system units (p. 120)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a
function is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition has
occurred.
Symbol
Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended,
this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the
driver display. The information
symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there
is a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then
the system is not working. The
car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the
ABS function.
Symbol
Specification
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot
detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a
workshop for checking. Volvo
recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop is contacted.
Symbol
Specification
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used.
Position lamps
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off.
}}
83
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Specification
Specification
Symbol
Specification
Main beam On
Rain sensor on
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when
main beam is on and with main
beam flash.
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active
driving experience. The system
then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are
more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger
compartment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the
car.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating.
If the symbol illuminates with
constant glow then there is a
fault in the system.
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Front fog lamps on
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is
on but road lines are not
detected.
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Amber symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
84
Symbol
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Lane assistance and rain sensor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is
on but road lines are not
detected. Rain sensor is on.
AdBlue system (diesel)
The symbol illuminates when the
AdBlue level is low or in the
event of a fault in the AdBlue
system.
Related information
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 85)
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists.
Symbol
Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety or drivability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time.
The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates or
flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if
someone in a rear seat has taken
off their seatbelt.
Symbol
Specification
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, a
fault has been detected in one of
the car's safety systems. Read
the message in the driver display.
Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop is
contacted.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the
brake fluid level may be too low.
Visit the nearest authorised
workshop to have the brake fluid
level checked and rectified.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a
constant glow when the parking
brake is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display.
}}
85
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Specification
Specification
Low oil pressure
Collision risk
If this symbol illuminates while
driving when the engine's oil
pressure is too low. Stop the
engine immediately and check
the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates
and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during
driving if a fault has occurred in
the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.
86
Symbol
High engine temperature
The symbol switches on while
driving when the temperature of
the engine is too high. An explanatory text is shown on the driver
display at the same time.
Related information
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 83)
•
Driver display (p. 75)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following text is Volvo's agreement with the
manufacturer or developer.
Freetype Project License
3rd Party Software Disclaimers and License
Agreements Confidential ID 06-00004-004
39 / 75 Revision 06.00A, 2015-06-09
2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006
by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Introduction
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages; some of them may contain,
in addition to the FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on,
or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license
applies to all files found in such packages, and
which do not fall under their own explicit
license. The license affects thus the FreeType
font engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
encourage inclusion and use of free software
in commercial and freeware products alike. As
a consequence, its main points are that: o We
don't promise that this software works.
However, we will be interested in any kind of
bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use
this software for whatever you want, in parts
or full form, without having to pay us. (`royaltyfree' usage) o You may not pretend that you
wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts
of it, in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that you
have used the FreeType code. (`credits') We
specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products. We
disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType
Project and assume no liability related to The
FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked
us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer
to use in compliance with this license. We
thus encourage you to use the following text:
"Portions of this software are copyright ©
2013 The FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved."
Legal Terms
0. Definitions – Throughout this license, the
terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg)
as the `FreeType Project', be they named as
alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the
licensee, or person using the project, where
`using' is a generic term including compiling
the project's source code as well as linking it
to form a `program' or `executable'. This
program is referred to as `a program using the
FreeType engine'. This license applies to all
files distributed in the original FreeType
Project, including all source code, binaries and
documentation, unless otherwise stated in the
file in its original, unmodified form as
distributed in the original archive. If you are
unsure whether or not a particular file is
covered by this license, you must contact us
to verify this. The FreeType Project is
copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All
rights reserved except as specified below.
1. No Warranty – THE FREETYPE PROJECT
IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. '
2. Redistribution – This license grants a
worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and
irrevocable right and license to use, execute,
perform, compile, display, copy, create
derivative works of, distribute and sublicense
the FreeType Project (in both source and
object code forms) and derivative works
thereof for any purpose; and to authorize
others to exercise some or all of the rights
granted herein, subject to the following
conditions: o Redistribution of source code
must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT')
unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes
to the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation. The copyright
notices of the unaltered, original files must be
preserved in all copies of source files. o
Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that states that the software is
based in part of the work of the FreeType
Team, in the distribution documentation. We
}}
87
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
also encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType Project, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you must
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be
paid to us.
3. Advertising – Neither the FreeType authors
and contributors nor you shall use the name of
the other for commercial, advertising, or
promotional purposes without specific prior
written permission. We suggest, but do not
require, that you use one or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in
your documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are
not required to accept it. However, as the
FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only
this license, or another one contracted with
the authors, grants you the right to use,
distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using,
distributing, or modifying the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and
accept all the terms of this license.
4. Contacts – There are two mailing lists
related to FreeType: o [email protected].
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
88
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o [email protected]. Discusses bugs, as well
as engine internals, design issues, specific
licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be
found at http://www.freetype.org
HarfBuzz / UCDN License
• Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation
Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited
Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia
Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley
Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL
International
Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson
Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright © 2005 David Turner
Copyright ©
2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat,
Inc.
Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and
Werner Lemberg
For full copyright notices consult the individual
files in the package. Permission is hereby
granted, without written agreement and
without license or royalty fees, to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose, provided that
the above copyright notice and the following
two paragraphs appear in all copies of this
software. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY
PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS
DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE
PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS"
BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS
NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE
MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES,
ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Libunibreak License
This library is released under an open-source
licence, the zlib/libpng licence. Please check
the file LICENCE for details. Apart from using
the algorithm, part of the code is derived from
the data provided under http://
www.unicode.org/Public. And the Unicode
Terms of Use may apply: URL:http://
www.unicode.org/copyright.html
LICENSE:
•
Copyright (C) 2008-2012 Wu Yongwei
<wuyongwei at gmail dot com>
•
Copyright (C) 2012 Tom Hacohen <tom
dot hacohen at samsung dot com>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will
the author be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1.
The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use
this software in a product, an
acknowledgement in the product
documentation would be appreciated but
is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
Unicode Inc. License Agreement
EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE, INC. LICENSE
AGREEMENT - DATA FILES AND
SOFTWARE Unicode Data Files include all
data files under the directories http://
www.unicode.org/Public/, http://
www.unicode.org/reports/, and http://
www.unicode.org/cldr/data/ . Unicode
Software includes any source code published
in the Unicode Standard or under the
directories http://www.unicode.org/Public/,
http://www.unicode.org/reports/, and http://
www.unicode.org/cldr/data/. NOTICE TO
USER: Carefully read the following legal
agreement. BY DOWNLOADING,
INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE
USING UNICODE INC.'S DATA FILES ("DATA
FILES"), AND/OR SOFTWARE
("SOFTWARE"), YOU UNEQUIVOCALLY
ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY,
ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE,
DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY,
DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE. COPYRIGHT AND
PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright ©
1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://
www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission
is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files
or Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that (a) the above copyright
notice(s) and this permission notice appear
with all copies of the Data Files or Software,
(b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with
the Data File(s) or Software that the data or
software has been modified. THE DATA FILES
AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
}}
89
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of a copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in
these Data Files or Software without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
ZLIB Data Compression Library License
Agreement
(C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without
any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1.
90
The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use
this software in a product, an
acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but
is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler [email protected]
[email protected] If you use the zlib
library in a product, we would appreciate *not*
receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The
sources are provided for free but without
warranty of any kind. The library has been
entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler; it does not include third-party code. If
you redistribute modified sources, we would
appreciate that you include in the file
ChangeLog history information documenting
your changes. Please read the FAQ for more
information on the distribution of modified
source versions.
GLEW Licence (Modified BSD Licence)
The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library
•
Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits
<milan.ikits@ieee org>
•
Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Marcelo E.
Magallon <[email protected]>
•
Copyright (C) 2002, Lev Povalahev
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution. * The
name of the author may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Application menu in driver display
Application menu (app menu) in the driver
display provides quick access to commonly
used functions for certain apps.
Related information
•
App
Functions
Trip computer
Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the
driver display, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone
Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation
Guide to destination, etc.
Driver display (p. 75)
Related information
The figure is schematic.
The app menu in the driver display can be
used instead of the centre display and is controlled using the right-hand keypad on the
steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier
to switch between different apps or functions
within the apps without having to let go of the
steering wheel.
•
•
•
Driver display (p. 75)
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 92)
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
91
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
Opening/closing the app menu
–
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Press on open/close (1).
> The app menu opens/closes.
NOTE
It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message has
to be confirmed first before the app menu
can be opened.
The app menu closes automatically after a
period of inactivity or after certain options
have been selected.
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad. The figure is schematic.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1.
Navigate between the apps by pressing
on the left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down
(3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the
function by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
92
If the app menu is opened again, the functions
of the most recently selected app are shown
first.
Related information
•
•
Application menu in driver display (p. 91)
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Messages in the driver display
buttons for acknowledging the message or
accepting a request, for example.
The driver display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.
Examples of messages in the driver display. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car
model.
Examples of messages in the driver display3.
Example of message in the 8-inch driver display. The
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on
car model.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
Messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other
information is currently being displayed. After
a while, or when the message has been
acknowledged/action taken if required, the
message disappears from the driver display. If
a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can
be shown together with graphics, symbols or
3 With
}}
12-inch driver display.*
* Option/accessory.
93
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings.
Message
Stop
safelyA
Turn off
engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Book time for
maintenance
Regular maintenance
Time for maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown before the next
service date.
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown at the next service date.
Specification
Regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Maintenance
overdue
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service urgent
Drive to workshopA
Regular maintenance
94
Specification
Message
Temporarily
offA
A
B
Managing messages in the driver
display
Messages in the driver display are handled
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after
starting again.
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 94)
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 95)
•
Message in centre display (p. 128)
Examples of messages in the driver display4 and the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2).
> The message disappears from the
driver display.
For messages without buttons:
–
Examples of messages in the driver display5 and the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The figure is
schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain
one or more buttons for acknowledging the
message or accepting a request, for example.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1.
Navigate between the buttons by pressing
on the left or right (1).
4 With
5 With
8-inch driver display.
12-inch driver display.
Related information
•
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while.
> The message disappears from the
driver display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the Car Status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message
Car message stored in Car Status
application is shown in the centre display in
conjunction with this.
•
•
Handling a message saved from
the driver display
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 95)
Message in centre display (p. 128)
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that
need to be saved are added
in the Car Status app in the
centre display. The message
Car message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
}}
95
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
–
To book service for a saved message:
–
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
> The saved message is shown in the Car
Status app.
With Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair
work.
To read a saved message later:
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom tile of
the home view.
2. Select the Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the
left in the app shows information about
the message graphically.
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have
two buttons available to book service or read
the owner's manual.
To read the owner's manual for a saved message:
–
96
In maximised mode for the message,
press Owner's manual to read about the
message in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information
linked to the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started.
Related information
•
•
•
6 Market
In maximised mode for the message,
press Request appoint./Call to make
Appointment6 for help in booking service.
> With Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app
and creates a request to book service
and repair work.
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 94)
Message in centre display (p. 128)
dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled
from the centre display. Presented here is the
centre display and its options.
}}
97
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively7.
Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain
7
98
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
with setting options. Examples of these
include Camera.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Application view (app view) - apps that
have been downloaded (third-party apps)
and apps for embedded functions, such as
FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the
app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown
on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock
and indication about on-going background
activity are shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view. Settings, Owner's
manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation
Settings) and the contextual owner's
manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also
be accessed in the top view.
Phone - the phone function can be
reached from here. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
•
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Extra subview - recently used apps or car
functions that do not belong in any of the
other subviews. Tap on the subview to
expand it.
•
Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 119)
Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating
for example*. Tap on the symbol in the
centre of the climate row in order to open
the climate view with more setting
options.
•
•
•
•
Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display
(p. 119)
Changing system language (p. 120)
Changing system units (p. 120)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Message in centre display (p. 128)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 100)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Function view in centre display (p. 110)
Apps (p. 459)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
•
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 121)
Media - recently used apps associated
with media. Tap on the subview to expand
it.
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Media player (p. 469)
Phone (p. 484)
* Option/accessory.
99
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and
Procedure
100
moving apps can be performed by touching
the screen in different ways.
An infrared light curtain just above the surface
of the screen enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This
technology makes it possible to use the
screen even with gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the
driver and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen:
Execution
Result
Press once.
Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick succession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger
against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Procedure
Execution
Result
Drag
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to
move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly
Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart
Zooms in.
Drag together
Zooms out.
}}
101
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Returning to home view from another
view
1.
The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of
one of the following:
Briefly press the home button below the
centre display.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
•
drag the control to the desired temperature,
•
2. Briefly press again.
> All subviews of the home view are set
to their default mode.
tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
•
tap on the desired temperature on the
control.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that
describes access to the different views is
shown on the screen.
Related information
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display
when it is possible to scroll in the view.
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 103)
Using the controls in the centre
display
•
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 112)
•
Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen,
it is possible to scroll downward or upward in
the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.
Temperature control.
102
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Activating and deactivating centre
display
1.
The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the
screen.
Give a long press on the physical home
button below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be
shown. All functions connected to the
screen are still running.
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on
the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
The effect of using the home button that the
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen
are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is
dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the
screen. The dimming function can also be
used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's
door is opened.
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Changing the appearance in the centre
display (p. 119)
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate
view, application view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically
when the driver's door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview.
An app or car function selected from the app
or function view starts in the respective subview of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in
the Media tile.
The extra tile shows the last used app or car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about
each different app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's
various sub-views show information on the
current status of apps.
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
}}
* Option/accessory. 103
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that
describes access to the different views is
shown on the screen.
Status bar
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping
from the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
• Settings
• Owner's manual
• Profile
• The car's saved messages.
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the
clock and indication that background activity
is in progress are shown on the right.
•
Top view
Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the
top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is
running.
•
Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g.
Navigation Manual). Gain access directly
in the top view to articles in the digital
owner's manual that are related to the
content displayed on screen.
In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases:
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate
settings can be made directly there, such as
setting temperature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate settings.
Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous
view.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view,
on the home button or at the bottom of the
top view and drag upward. The underlying
view is then visible and available for use again.
NOTE
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar
at the top of the screen. Open the top view by
104
The top view is not available during starting/shutdown or when a message is
shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Application view
number of unread text messages for
Messages.
Function view
Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens
in the tile to which it belongs, e.g. Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping
from left to right8 across the screen, or by
pressing the home button.
Application view with the car's apps.
left8
Swipe from right to
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app
view) from the home view. Apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps
for embedded functions, such as FM radio,
are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the app view, such as the
8 Applies
to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
The function view with buttons for different car functions.
Swipe from left to right8 across the screen in
order to access the function view from the
home view. From here you can activate or
deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*,
Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
}}
* Option/accessory. 105
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Depending on the amount of functions, it is
also possible here to scroll downward in the
view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the
bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened
with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button.
Some functions (trigger functions) open in a
new window when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping
from right to left8 across the screen, or by
pressing the home button.
Related information
•
Managing subviews in centre display
(p. 107)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
•
Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 121)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Driver profiles (p. 124)
Climate controls (p. 191)
Apps (p. 459)
Function view in centre display (p. 110)
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
8 Applies
106
to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing subviews in centre
display
Home view consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. These views can be expanded.
}}
107
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
108
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Expanding a subview:
–
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Press anywhere on the subview. When a
tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home
view is temporarily forced away. The other
two tiles are minimised and only certain
information is shown. When the extra tile
is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
–
When a new subview is opened in full-screen
mode, no information from the other subviews
is shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. To go back
to the home view's standard view from full
screen mode – press twice on the home button.
Related information
•
•
Press on the symbol to go
back to the expanded mode,
or press the home button at
the bottom of the screen.
•
Managing the centre display (p. 100)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 103)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
The subview can be closed in three different ways.
•
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
•
Tap on another tile (this tile will then
open in expanded mode instead).
•
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a subview in full
screen mode
The extra tile9 and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even
more information and more setting options.
9 Does
Home button for the centre display.
not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile.
109
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view
from home view by swiping from left to right
across the screen10.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for
car functions; see below:
Type of button
Property
Affects car function
Function buttons
Have on/off positions.
Most buttons in function view
are function buttons.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Trigger buttons
Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may
be a window to change seat position.
Parking buttons
Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
10
110
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
• Camera
• Headrest Fold
• Park In
• Park Out
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green
on a function or parking button, the function is
activated. When a function is activated, extra
text with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds
and then the button is shown with the LED
indicator illuminated.
The function is deactivated when the LED
indicator is extinguished.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only
at certain speeds is shown, for example,
when the button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or
deactivate the function.
When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something
not working as intended.
Related information
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 100)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
111
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use
by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find
the apps you use more often.
The apps and buttons for car functions in the
app view and function view respectively can
be moved and organised as desired.
1. Swipe from right to left11 to access the
app view, or swipe from left to right11 to
access the function view.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space
in the view.
The maximum number of rows available for
use in order to position apps or buttons is 48.
To move an app or button outside the visible
view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New
rows are then added, where the app or button
can be located.
Related information
•
•
•
Apps (p. 459)
Managing the centre display (p. 100)
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down
in the view.
112
Overview of the symbols that can be shown
in the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress
and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited
space in the status bar.
Symbol
Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Roaming activated.
Function view in centre display (p. 110)
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal
mode for the view.
11
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
Signal strength in mobile phone
network.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no
device connected.
Information sent to and from
GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the
available connection.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Symbol
Specification
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Phone charging wirelessly.
•
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 475)
Wireless phone charger* (p. 492)
Phone (p. 484)
Date and time (p. 82)
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
•
Message in centre display (p. 128)
* Option/accessory. 113
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the
screen by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search
for articles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can
be made on the screen.
114
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in
which the keyboard is being used.
}}
115
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Row of suggested words or characters12.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among
the suggestions by pressing on the right
and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to
select it. Note that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not
available, the row will not be shown on the
keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter
it.
The button works in different ways,
depending on the context in which the
keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when
an email address is entered) or to create a
new row (for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible,
the button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again
to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another
press makes all letters capital letters. The
next press restores the keyboard to lowercase letters. In this mode, the first letter
after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter
in the text field is also a capital letter. In
text fields intended for names or
12
116
Applies to Asiatic languages.
addresses, each word automatically starts
with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address entry,
all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Variants of a letter or character
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which
in number mode is shown instead of
, to return to the letter keyboard, or
to open the keyboard with special
characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages
must first be added under Settings.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more
quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters
and characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the
keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms
the entered text. The appearance of the button
differs depending on context.
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible
variants of letters or characters. Press the
required variant. If no variant is selected, the
original letter/character is entered.
Related information
•
Changing keyboard language in centre
display (p. 117)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
•
•
Managing the centre display (p. 100)
Managing text messages (p. 489)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
Switching between different
languages in the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the button in the
keyboard is used to switch
between the different languages.
To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in
settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted
without affecting the system language.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System System Languages and
Units Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages from the
list.
> It is now possible to switch between
the selected languages directly from
the keyboard for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under Settings, the keyboard retains the
same language as the car's system language.
To change keyboard language with list:
1.
Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
To change the keyboard language without displaying the list:
–
•
•
Applies to certain system languages.
The centre display keyboard allows you to
enter characters, letters and words on the
screen by "drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing
with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand.
2. Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the
selected language and other word suggestions are given.
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next
language in the list without displaying
the list.
Related information
13
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre
display
Changing system language (p. 120)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or
word suggestions13 appear as they are
written on screen (1).
}}
117
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll
through the list.
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for handwritten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete
the next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular character input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible,
the button is not shown.
Change text input language.
14
118
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts
of a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word
above each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most
likely choice is found at the top of the
list.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
Deleting/changing characters/letters
written by hand
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
–
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
•
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
•
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
•
Swipe horizontally from right to left14
over the area for handwritten letters (1).
Delete multiple letters by swiping over
the area several times.
•
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre
display can be changed by selecting a theme.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Themes.
Displays
Display
3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
Change row by hand by drawing the above character
in the handwriting field15.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
As a supplement to these appearances, it is
possible to choose between Normal and
Bright. With Normal, the screen background
is dark and the text is light. This alternative is
the default for all themes. A light variant can
also be selected, in which the background is
light and the text is dark. This alternative can
be useful in e.g. strong daylight.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
The centre display can be used to change the
volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Sound
System Volumes.
3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen
touch sounds. Drag the control to the
desired volume.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Audio settings (p. 458)
Related information
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right16.
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
•
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 103)
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Related information
•
15
16
Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
119
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Changing system units
Changing system language
Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Language settings are defined in the centre
display menu Settings.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local
laws and regulations. Do not switch to a
language that is difficult to understand as
this may make it difficult to find your way
back through the screen structure.
2. Continue to System System
Languages and Units Units of
Measurement.
3. Select a unit standard:
• Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Other settings in the centre
display's top view
You can change settings and information for
many of the car's functions via the centre display.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab
at the top or by dragging/swiping from the
top downwards across the screen.
2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.
Celsius.
• Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
1.
Celsius.
• US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahrenheit.
> The units in the driver display and centre display are changed.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Changing system language (p. 120)
2. Continue to System System
Languages and Units.
3. Select System Language. Languages
that support voice recognition have a
voice recognition symbol.
> The language in the driver display and
centre display are changed.
Related information
•
•
•
120
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Changing system units (p. 120)
Top view with button for Settings.
3. Press on one of the categories and the
subcategories to navigate to the required
setting.
4. Change one or more settings. Different
types of setting are changed in different
ways.
> The changes are saved immediately.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Open contextual setup in the
centre display
2. Press Navigation Settings.
> A navigation settings page opens.
It is possible to use contextual setup for most
of the car's basic apps so that you can
change settings directly in the top view in the
centre display.
3. Change settings as desired and confirm
the selections.
Press Close or the physical home button
beneath the centre display to close setup
view.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all.
Third party apps
A subcategory in the settings menu with different
types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and
radio buttons).
Third party apps are not included in the car's
system from the beginning, but are the type
that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here
the settings are always made inside the app
and not from the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 123)
Top view with button for contextual setting.
Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing
a specific setting relating to the active function
shown on screen. The apps installed in the car
from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB,
are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's
embedded functions. The settings for these
apps can be changed directly via contextual
setting in the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Downloading apps (p. 460)
When contextual setup is available:
1.
Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.
121
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
Resetting settings in the centre
display
In the event of a change of ownership, user
data and system settings should be restored
to factory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the
event of a change of ownership. In the event
of a change of ownership it is also important
to change the owner of the Volvo On Call*
service.
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings
menu.
Related information
• Reset Personal Settings - clears per-
•
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
•
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 128)
4. Press OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all
profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Two types of reset
There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu:
• Factory reset - clears all data and files
and resets all settings to their default values.
sonal data and resets personal settings to
their default values.
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 123)
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset your settings.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the
car is stationary.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Continue to System
Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
122
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Table showing centre display
settings
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of
the car's functions are collected.
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media,
Communication, Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of
subcategories and setting options. The tables
below show the first level of subcategories.
The setting options for a function or area are
described in more detail in the corresponding
section of the owner's manual.
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other
settings are global, which means they are not
linked to a driver profile.
My Car
Subcategories
Displays
Subcategories
Subcategories
Locking
TV*
Parking Brake and Suspension
Video
Wipers
Sound
Communication
Subcategories
Subcategories
Phone
Tone
Text Messages
Balance
Android Auto*
System Volumes
Apple CarPlay*
Navigation
Bluetooth Devices
Subcategories
Wi-Fi
Map
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Route and Guidance
Car Modem Internet*
Traffic
Volvo On Call*
Media
Volvo Service Networks
IntelliSafe
Subcategories
Climate
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive
Mode*
AM/FM radio
The main category Climate has no subcategories.
Lights and Lighting
Gracenote®
Mirrors and Convenience
DAB*
}}
* Option/accessory. 123
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
System
Subcategories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and Data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control*
Factory reset
System Information
Related information
•
•
•
Overview of centre display (p. 97)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal
preferences and can be saved in one or more
driver profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved
in the active driver profile. Each key can be
linked to a driver profile. When the linked key
is used, the car is adapted to the settings of
that specific driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
Many of the settings defined in the car will be
saved automatically in the active driver profile
unless the profile is protected. In the car, the
settings defined are either personal or global.
Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media
system, language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings,
can be changed but are not saved to a specific
driver profile. Changes to global settings affect
all profiles.
files. They remain the same regardless of
which driver profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to
add additional languages to the keyboard,
these remain available for use even if driver
profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings
are not saved to a specific driver profile - the
settings are global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre
display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver
profile X - the brightness setting is a personal
setting.
Related information
•
•
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 125)
•
•
Protect driver profile (p. 126)
•
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 123)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 126)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 128)
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver pro-
124
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started,
the selected driver profile is shown at the top
of the screen. The driver profile last used is
the one that will be active next time the car is
unlocked. It is possible to change to another
driver profile after the car has been unlocked.
However, if the remote control key has been
linked to a driver profile then this is what is
selected when the car is started.
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Option 1:
1.
Tap on the name of the driver profile
shown in the top of the centre display
when the display has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is
shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3. Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
Option 2:
1.
Drag down the top view in the centre display.
3. Select the driver profile required.
Renaming a driver profile
4. Press Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Option 3:
2. Press System
1.
3. Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
3. Press System Driver Profiles.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is
shown.
4. Select the driver profile required.
> The driver profile is selected and the
system loads the settings for the new
driver profile.
4. Tap in the box Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible
to
to change the name. Tap on
close the keyboard.
5. Save the name change by pressing Back
or Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
•
•
A profile name cannot start with a space,
as the profile name will not then be saved.
Driver profiles (p. 124)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 126)
Driver Profiles.
Related information
•
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 125)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 114)
2. Press Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
125
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Protect driver profile
In some cases it is preferable not to save various settings defined in the car to the active
driver profile. In this case, it is possible to
protect the driver profile.
NOTE
Protecting a driver profile is only possible
when the car is stationary.
To protect a driver profile:
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System
Driver Profiles.
3. Select Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4. Select Protect Profile to protect the profile.
5. Save your profile protection option by
pressing Back/Close.
> When the profile is protected, settings
defined in the car will not be saved
automatically to the profile. Instead,
your changes must be saved manually
under Settings System Driver
Profiles Edit Profile by pressing
Save current settings to the profile.
When the profile is unprotected, on the
other hand, your settings will be saved
automatically to the profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 124)
Linking remote control key to
driver profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected
every time the car is used with that specific
remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it
is not linked to any specific driver profile.
When the car is started, the Guest profile will
automatically be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is
unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver
profile, a driver profile does not need to be
selected when that specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a
driver profile
NOTE
Connecting a remote control key to a driver
profile is only possible when the car is stationary.
First select the profile to be linked to the key,
if the profile to be linked is not already active.
126
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
The active profile can then be linked to the
key.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System
Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display
returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key.
5. Select Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver
profile to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are
multiple keys in the car, the message
More than one key is found, put the key
you want to connect on backup reader
will be displayed.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 124)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 125)
Remote control key (p. 215)
4. Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
The backup reader's location in the storage compartment.
> When the message Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
6. Press OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
127
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.
NOTE
Related information
Factory reset is only possible when the
car is stationary.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Factory reset
Personal Settings.
Reset
3. Select one of the options Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
•
•
Driver profiles (p. 124)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Example of a message in the centre display's top
view.
The centre display shows messages that are
of lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre
display's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has
been taken, the message disappears from the
status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it
is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can
be shown together with graphics, symbols or
a button for activating/deactivating a function
linked to the message.
128
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the
form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages
have higher priority than messages shown in
the status bar and require acknowledgement/
action before they disappear.
•
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 129)
•
Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 129)
•
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Managing messages in the centre
display
Messages in the centre display are handled in
centre display views.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by tapping on it, or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status bar.
Handling a message saved from
the centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
Example of a message in the centre display's top
view.
Some messages in the centre display have a
button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.
Message in centre display (p. 128)
Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 129)
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
Examples of saved messages and possible options in
the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top
view of the centre display.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
–
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status bar.
}}
129
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
Messages with an arrow to the right
can be maximised.
2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the
left in the app shows information about
the message graphically.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.
–
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
17
130
Message in centre display (p. 128)
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 129)
Messages in the driver display (p. 93)
Voice recognition
Voice control17 allows you to control functions in the car, e.g. climate system, radio or
a Bluetooth-connected phone with spoken
commands. In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the navigation system can also
be controlled with voice recognition.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
What is voice control?
Voice control is an aid that can facilitate the
use of different commands in your car. In principle, it works like a normal application in
which you enter information in a fixed
sequence in order to perform a task, but
instead of typing on a keyboard you use voice
commands. It may therefore be a good idea to
learn how, and in what order, a voice command should be spoken in order to achieve the
desired result.
The voice control system allows you to control
certain infotainment and climate functions
using voice commands. The system can
respond with speech and by showing information in the driver display.
Voice control system microphone
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to always have
the latest version installed.
Download updates from
support.volvocars.com.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Using voice recognition (p. 131)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 182)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Using voice recognition
Start voice control18
To give commands via the
voice control system, you
have a "dialogue" with the
system. Depress the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
to activate the system and initiate a dialogue
using voice commands. After you have
pressed the button, a beep tone can be heard
and the voice control symbol is shown in the
driver display.
This shows that the system has started to listen and you can start to say the commands.
As soon as you start to talk, the system is
trained to recognise and understand your
voice. This takes several seconds and is done
automatically, which means that you do not
need to start any voice training manually.
Remember the following:
18
Applies to certain markets.
•
•
Speak after the tone with a normal voice
at a normal tempo.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands during this time).
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed.
In general, the system works by listening for a
basic command which is followed by more
detailed commands that specify what you
want the system to do.
To change the system audio volume, turn the
rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It
is possible to use other buttons during voice
control. However, other sounds will be
silenced during dialogue with the system,
which means that it is not possible to execute
any functions linked with audio using the buttons.
Cancel voice control
Voice control can be cancelled in different
ways:
•
•
Tap briefly on
and say "Cancel".
Give a long press on the steering wheel
until you hear
button for voice control
two beeps. This stops voice recognition
even when the system is speaking.
Voice control is also cancelled if you do not
reply during a dialogue. The system will first
ask for a reply three times and if there is still
no response then voice control will be cancelled automatically.
}}
* Option/accessory. 131
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
. This canwheel button for voice control
cels the system voice and you can say the next
command.
Example of voice recognition control
1.
Press
.
2. Say "Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]", e.g. "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
> The system dials the selected contact
from the phonebook. If the contact has
several phone numbers (e.g. home,
mobile, work), the right category must
be referred to.
Commands for specific functions such as
phone and radio are described in specific sections.
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
•
•
Commands/phrases
The following commands can generally be
used, regardless of the situation:
•
"Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue.
•
•
"Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.19
19
132
"Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available
in the current situation, a prompt or an
example.
•
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number,
e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four,
three" (03122443).
House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. "two, two" or
"twenty-two" (22). For English and Dutch,
several groups can be said in sequence,
e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22).
For English, double or triple can be used,
e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers can be
given within the range 0-2300.
To change the speed or activate/deactivate
repetition mode:
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press System
select settings.
• Repeat Voice Command
• Speech Rate
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 182)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Frequencies can be spoken as "ninety
eight point eight" (98.8), "a hundred and
four point two" or "hundred four point
two" (104.2).
Speed and repetition mode
It is possible to adjust the speed if the system
is speaking too quickly.
Repetition mode can be enabled so that the
system repeats what you have said.
Note that this only stops the dialogue when the system is not speaking. To do that, give a long press on
Voice Control and
until two beep tones are heard.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition20
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control
commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the
voice recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone
book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category
can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile:
"Call Robin Smith Mobile".
Press
mands:
message. For this function to work, the
car must be connected to the Internet.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Using voice recognition (p. 131)
Voice control of radio and media22
Commands for radio and media player device
control are shown below.
Tap on
and say one of the following commands:
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 182)
"Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
•
"Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
•
"Play [song title]" - plays back the
selected song.
•
"Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
and say one of the following com-
•
"Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book.
•
"Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel*23.
•
"Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
•
"Play [radio station]" - starts playing
back the selected radio channel.
"Recent calls" - displays the call list.
•
"Tune to [frequency]" - starts the
selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active,
the FM band is started by default.
•
"Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
•
"Radio" - starts FM radio.
•
•
•
20
21
22
"Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
"Message to [contact]" – the user is
requested to say a brief message. The
message is then repeated aloud and the
user can choose to send21 or revise the
Applies to certain markets.
Only certain phones can send messages via the car. For information on which phones are compatible, see support.volvocars.com.
Applies to certain markets.
}}
* Option/accessory. 133
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
||
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
"Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
"Radio AM" - starts AM
radio.24
"DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
"TV" - starts playback from TV*23.
"USB" - starts playback from USB.
"iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"Bluetooth" - starts playback from a
Bluetooth-connected media source.
"Similar music" - plays back music similar to the music currently playing back
from USB devices.
Related information
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Using voice recognition (p. 131)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
•
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 182)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Settings for voice recognition25
Related information
Settings for the voice control system are
selected here.
•
•
•
Settings
System
Voice Control
Settings can be made within the following
areas:
•
• Repeat Voice Command
• Gender
• Speech Rate
•
•
•
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Using voice recognition (p. 131)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 182)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Audio settings (p. 458)
Changing system language (p. 120)
Audio settings
Select audio settings under:
Settings Sound
Voice Control
System Volumes
Language settings
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language
.
list Changing the language also affects menu,
message and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units System Language
23
24
25
134
Applies to certain markets.
Availability varies depending on model and/or market.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to
control both exterior and interior lighting. The
left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts
the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is
adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Exterior lighting
Position
Specification
Position
Daytime running lights.
Specification
Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position
lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog
lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are
activated.
Daytime running lights and position lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked.A
The Active main beam function
can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position
lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II, the following functions are available for the rotating ring's different positions:
136
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
position from another position to switch
moved to
on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Volvo recommends that
when the vehicle is driven.
mode is used
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
WARNING
The car's lighting system is not able to
determine when daylight is too weak or
sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all
situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in
accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using direction indicators (p. 141)
Using main beam (p. 140)
Dipped beam (p. 139)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 143)
Rear fog lamp (p. 144)
Active bending lights* (p. 142)
Brake lights (p. 144)
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and
activated via the centre display. This applies
to active main beam, home safe lighting and
approach light, for example.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
Emergency brake lights (p. 145)
2. Press My Car
Hazard warning flashers (p. 145)
3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior
Lighting and then select the function that
needs to be adjusted.
Lights and Lighting.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness.
•
Lighting control (p. 136)
Active main beam (p. 140)
Using home safe lighting (p. 146)
Approach light duration (p. 146)
Using direction indicators (p. 141)
Other settings in the centre display's top
view (p. 120)
Function view in centre display (p. 110)
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 146)
Position lamps (p. 138)
* Option/accessory. 137
LIGHTING
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road
users can see the car if it stops or is parked.
The position lamp is switched on with the
rotating ring on the stalk switch.
position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at
max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver
.
should turn to a position other than
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not
already switched on) to warn road users
approaching from behind. This takes place
irrespective of the position of the rotating ring
or the ignition position of the car's electrical
system.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the
position the position lamps are switched on (number
plate lighting is switched on at the same
time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II then the daytime running lights are
switched on instead of the front position
lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on
regardless of the ignition position of the car's
electrical system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
138
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating
,
ring on the stalk switch is in position
or
as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. In position
, the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
Related information
•
•
Lighting control (p. 136)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from
daytime running light to dipped beam in weak
daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped
beam also takes place if the front fog lamp*
and/or rear fog lamp are activated.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct
beam pattern for the traffic situation and in
accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating
position, dipped beam is
ring in the
activated automatically in weak daylight or
darkness or when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand
stalk switch must be in
mode for tunnel
detection to work.
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
vated when the car's electrical system is in
ignition position II.
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 136)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Dipped beam (p. 139)
Lighting control (p. 136)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Daytime running lights (p. 138)
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if:
•
•
•
the front fog lamps* are activated
the rear fog lamp is activated
the front and rear fog lamps are activated
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is always acti-
1
Daytime Running Lights
* Option/accessory. 139
LIGHTING
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand
stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as
it does not dazzle other road users.
main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards.
Deactivate by moving the stalk switch
backwards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles
in front, and then switches from main beam
to dipped beam.
Related information
•
•
Lighting control (p. 136)
Active main beam (p. 140)
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly
to main beam flash position. Main beam
comes on until the stalk switch is
released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the
steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring
2 or
is in position
. Activate
2 When
140
dipped beam is activated.
The symbol
represents active main beam.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can
also take streetlights into account. When the
camera sensor no longer detects any oncoming car or car in front, main beam is switched
on again after about a second.
LIGHTING
Activate active main beam
Active main beam is activated and deactivated
by turning the left-hand stalk switch to posi. The rotating ring then returns to
tion
position
. When active main beam is
illuminates with a
activated, the symbol
white glow in the driver display. When main
beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.
longer blocked, the message goes out and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the
optimum beam pattern when conditions
are favourable.
Limitations for active main beam
Related information
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
•
•
•
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy
rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no
The car's direction indicators are operated
with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the
stalk switch is moved.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
If active main beam is deactivated while main
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to
dipped beam.
If this symbol is shown in the driver
display, together with the message
Active High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching
between main and dipped beam must be persymbol extinformed manually. The
guishes when these message are shown.
Using direction indicators
Lighting control (p. 136)
Using main beam (p. 140)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicator lamps flash three times. If the
function is deactivated via the centre display, the lamps will flash once.
}}
141
LIGHTING
||
NOTE
This automatic flashing sequence can
be stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
•
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
•
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
additional illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED3 headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/
activated via the centre display's function
view.
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its
end position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 145)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
(p. 574)
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
•
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 143)
Active bending lights follow steering wheel
movements to provide additional illumination
in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started. In the event of a fault in the
function, the
symbol illuminates in the
driver display at the same time as the driver
display shows an explanatory text.
3 LED
142
(Light Emitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The fog lights are activated manually when
driving in fog and automatically when reversing in order to complement the reversing
light.
If the car is fitted with cornering lights*, the
fog lights come on automatically in dull daylight or darkness in order to light up the area
diagonally in front of the car.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically
when the car is switched off or when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the
position.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 136)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Rear fog lamp (p. 144)
Active bending lights* (p. 142)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
Cornering lights*
The front fog lamps can include the cornering
lights function, which temporarily illuminates
the area diagonally in front of the car in the
direction the steering wheel is turned on a
sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the
direction indicators.
Button for front fog lamps.
The rear fog lamps can only be switched on
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II and the rotating ring on the stalk
switch is in position
,
or
.
Press the button to activate and deactivate.
symbol illuminates in the driver disThe
play when the front fog lamps are switched
on.
The function is activated in weak daylight or
darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring
is in the
or
position and the speed
of the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h
(approx. 20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched
on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing.
The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated
and deactivated via the centre display.
* Option/accessory. 143
LIGHTING
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger
than the normal rear lights and should only be
used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow,
smoke or dust so that other road users have
an early warning of a vehicle ahead.
Press the button to switch the lights on/off.
symbol in the driver display illumiThe
nates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when:
•
the car is switched off or when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is set to the
position
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in posiand the front fog lamps are
tion
switched off.
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during braking.
The brake light is illuminated when the brake
pedal is depressed and when the car is braked
automatically by one of the driver support systems.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 145)
Brake functions (p. 391)
Changing brake light bulb (p. 576)
Driving support systems (p. 258)
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps
vary from country to country.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the
car, on the driver's side.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when:
144
•
ignition position II is active and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
or
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in posiand the front fog lamps are
tion
switched on.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Lighting control (p. 136)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 143)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 577)
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Emergency brake lights
Hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking.
Hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction
indicators being activated simultaneously.
The function can be used to give a warning in
the event of traffic hazards.
The function means that the brake light
flashes instead of - as in normal braking shining with a constant glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds.
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
•
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 145)
Using direction indicators (p. 141)
After the driver brakes to a low speed and
then releases the brake, the brake light returns
to normal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the
driver accelerates the car to a higher speed
again or switches off the car's hazard warning
flashers.
Related information
•
•
•
Brake lights (p. 144)
Foot brake (p. 392)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 145)
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully
that the emergency brake lights are activated
and the speed is low. The hazard warning
flashers start to flash after the emergency
brake lights have stopped flashing and are
then deactivated automatically when the car
drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed.
145
LIGHTING
Using home safe lighting
Approach light duration
Interior lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
Approach lighting is switched on when the
car is unlocked and is used to switch on the
car's lighting at a distance.
The function is activated when the remote
control key is used for unlocking. In daylight,
position lamps, interior roof lamps, floor lights
and cargo area lighting are activated. In weak
daylight or darkness, number plate lighting
and lighting in the outer handles are also activated* with their light source aimed towards
the ground.
The passenger compartment is equipped
with several types of lighting, e.g. general
interior lighting, adjustable decor illumination
and lock lighting.
1.
Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
> A symbol in the driver display is illuminated to indicate that the function is
activated and outer lighting is switched
on: Position lamps, headlamp beams,
number plate lighting and lighting in
outer handles*.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
•
Approach light duration (p. 146)
The lighting stays on for approx. 2 minutes if
no doors are opened. If a door is opened
within the activation time, the time for the
interior lighting and lighting in the outer handles* will be extended.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually at least
5 minutes from when:
•
the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0
•
the car has been unlocked, but it has not
yet been started.
Front roof lighting
The function can be activated and deactivated
via the centre display.
Related information
•
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
•
•
Using home safe lighting (p. 146)
Remote control key (p. 215)
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
146
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The passenger compartment lighting goes off
when:
Reading lamp, right-hand side
•
•
•
•
Reading lighting
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness
is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the
button in the roof console.
The car is locked
The car is started
A side door is closed
A side door has remained open for approx.
2 minutes.
Rear roof lighting*
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on
and off according to the following.
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button
pressed in.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on when:
•
•
•
Sun visor mirror lighting*
The car is unlocked
The car is switched off
A side door is opened.
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units,
one on each side of the roof.
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is
switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting is switched on or off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 147
LIGHTING
||
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or
off when the tailgate is opened or closed.
Decor lighting
The ambient light is switched on when you
open the doors and is switched off when the
car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and
also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel
in the instrument panel.
Ambience lights*
The car is equipped with LEDs that make it
possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is
running. The ambience light can be adapted in
the centre display and also precisely adjusted
using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in the storage compartments in
the doors is switched on when you open the
doors and is switched off when the car is
locked. The brightness can be precisely
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in the tunnel console's front
cup holder
The lighting in the front cup holders is
switched on when the car is unlocked and is
switched off when the car is locked. The
148
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 148)
Lighting control (p. 136)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a
thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via
the centre display.
The thumbwheel on the
instrument panel, to the left
of the steering wheel, is used
to adjust the brightness of
the display light, control light,
ambient light and ambience
light*
Adjusting ambient decor illumination
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
•
Under Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
•
Under Ambient Light Level, select
from Reduced and Full.
Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs
that make it possible to change the colour of
the light. These lights are switched on when
the car is running.
* Option/accessory.
LIGHTING
Changing the brightness of the lights
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
•
Ignition positions (p. 388)
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting.
3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity,
select from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood
Lighting.
3. Choose between By Temperature and
By Colour in order to change the colour of
the light.
With the By Temperature option, the
light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature.
With the By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to
adjust further.
Related information
•
•
Interior lighting (p. 146)
Adjusting light functions via the centre
display (p. 137)
149
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains several different windows,
glass panes and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated.
The windscreen has laminated glass, and laminated glass is available as an option for certain
other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced, which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 199)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
All power windows and sun blinds* have
pinch protection which is deployed if they are
blocked by any object while opening or closing.
In the event of blocking, the movement stops
and then reverses automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked
position (or to full ventilation position).
The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.
It is possible to force pinch protection when
closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is
formed, by continuing to press the control in
one and the same direction.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the
glass is laminated1
If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a
reset sequence can be tested.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
152
WARNING
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
Panorama roof* (p. 158)
Power windows (p. 153)
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 155)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 198)
Related information
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 153)
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 154)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 159)
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Reset sequence for pinch
protection
If a problem occurs with the electrical functions for the electric windows, a reset
sequence can be tested.
Power windows
WARNING
Each door has a control panel for the electrically-driven power windows. The driver's
door has controls for operating all windows
and also to activate the child safety locks.
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
If a problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof, contact a workshop2.
Reset the power window
1. Start with the window in closed position.
2. Then operate the controls in the manual
position 3 times upwards to closed position.
> The system is initialised automatically.
Related information
•
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
•
Operating power windows (p. 154)
2 An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate
the controls in the rear doors to prevent
doors or windows from being opened
from the inside.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Related information
•
•
•
Operating power windows (p. 154)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 153)
* Option/accessory. 153
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Operating power windows
WARNING
Using the driver's door control panel, all
power windows can be operated - using the
control panels in the other doors operates the
power window in the individual door.
The power windows are equipped with pinch
protection. If any fault arises with the pinch
protection, a reset sequence can be tested.
Check that children or other passengers
are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key
or keyless opening* with a door handle.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
•
•
•
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and
release it. The window runs automatically
to its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used,
the ignition position must be I or II. The power
windows can be operated for a few minutes
after the car has been switched off and after
the ignition has been switched off - although
not after a door has been opened. It is only
possible to operate one control at a time.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
154
NOTE
Operating without auto. Move one of the
controls gently up or down. The power
windows move up or down as long as the
control is held in position.
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx.
112 mph), but they can be closed.
The driver always bears responsibility for
following traffic regulations in force.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows
at low temperatures.
Related information
•
•
Power windows (p. 153)
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 153)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Rearview and door mirrors
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors can be
used to give the driver better visibility to the
rear.
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver.
Use dimming when disturbed by light from
behind.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by
angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror is equipped with HomeLink*, automatic
dimming* and compass*.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed
with a control in the mirror's lower edge.
Door mirrors
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further
away than they actually are.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
There are also a number of automatic settings
that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
HomeLink®*
(p. 451)
Compass* (p. 455)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 155)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 156)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 199)
Control for manual dimming.
1.
Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
}}
* Option/accessory. 155
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active
while driving, apart from when gearbox
reverse position is selected.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror
must also be equipped with automatic dimming.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no
immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the change takes place gradually.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior
rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
To change dimming sensitivity:
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward
facing - that work together to identify and
eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing
sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
156
Angling the door mirrors
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of
the driver. There are a number of automatic
settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.
Using controls for door mirrors
Related information
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 155)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 156)
Controls for door mirrors.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with
the joystick in the driver's door control panel.
Ignition position must be at least I.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
Folding in rearview mirrors
electrically*
Angling during parking3
A door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking, for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces.
–
1.
Note that the button may need to be pressed
twice, depending on whether it was already
preselected. The button flashes when the door
mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is
disengaged, the door mirror automatically
starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and
then reaches its original position after approx.
8 seconds.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the
fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending* to work correctly.
1.
Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2. Fold them out again by pressing the L
and R buttons simultaneously.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
3 Only
Automatic angling during parking3
With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is
selected. The folded position is preset and
cannot be adjusted.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
You can make the door mirror return to its
original position by pressing the L or R button
twice.
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key, the door mirrors can be
automatically retracted/extended. However, if
the mirrors have been folded in manually then
they have to be folded out manually as well.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate.
Related information
•
•
•
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 155)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
(p. 155)
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 199)
3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
* Option/accessory. 157
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Panorama roof*
The panorama roof is divided into two glass
sections. The front section can be opened
vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear
section is fixed roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and
a sun blind made of perforated fabric and
located under the glass roof to provide extra
protection from factors such as strong sunlight.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to
scratch surfaces or damage strips.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Wind deflector
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
•
•
•
158
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 159)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 161)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Operating the panorama roof*
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both
are equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
Children, other passengers or objects may
be trapped by the moving parts.
•
Always operate the windows with caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
•
Remember to always switch off the
power supply to the power windows
by setting the car's electrical system in
ignition position 0, and then take the
remote control key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
•
Remove ice and snow before opening
the panoramic roof. Take care not to
scratch surfaces or damage strips.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.
It can also be operated using a remote control
key or keyless opening* with the door handle.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers
are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key
or keyless opening* with a door handle.
}}
* Option/accessory. 159
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
IMPORTANT
Open and close ventilation position
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
Fully open and close the panoramic
roof using the roof control
The movement of the roof is stopped if the
control is released during manual operation, or
when the glass reaches the comfort position4
or the maximum opening or closing position.
The movement of both panoramic roof and
sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is
operated again in the opposite direction to the
current direction of movement.
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
equipped with pinch protection. If any fault
arises with the pinch protection, a reset
sequence can be tested.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can
be opened. When the procedure is
reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully
closed before the sun blind can be fully
closed.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward
once.
Close by pressing the control downward
once.
When the ventilation position is selected the
front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If
the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation
position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position.
NOTE
It may not be possible to operate windows
at low temperatures.
4 Comfort
160
position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual
opening.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum
position - press the control backwards a
third time to the position for manual opening.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/
downward to the manual closing position
instead.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic
opening and release.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum
position - press the control backwards a
third time to the position for automatic
opening and release.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/
downward to the automatic closing position
instead.
Automatic closing of the
panoramic roof's* sun blind
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be
opened or closed simultaneously:
With this function, the sun blind is closed
automatically 15 minutes after the car has
been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This
is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's
upholstery from sun-fading.
The function is deactivated when the car is
supplied from the factory and can be activated
or deactivated in the centre display.
–
To open - press the control rearward to
the automatic operation position twice
and release.
–
To close - press the control forward/
downward to the automatic operation
position twice and release.
Related information
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 158)
1.
2. Press My Car
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 161)
•
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed using the remote control
key or keyless opening* with a door handle.
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
Related information
•
•
•
Panorama roof* (p. 158)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 159)
Pinch protection for windows and sun
blinds (p. 152)
}}
* Option/accessory. 161
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Using windscreen wipers
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
Together with the washer fluid, the wipers
aim to improve visibility as well as headlamp
pattern.
The washer nozzles are heated* automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
from freezing.
The windscreen wipers are designed to clean
the windscreen. Different settings for the
windscreen wipers are set using the righthand stalk switch.
Information indicating that the washer fluid
needs topping up appears in the driver display
when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer
fluid remaining.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
•
•
162
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Right-hand stalk switch.
The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor
sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
* Option/accessory.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Intermittent wiping
Move the lever up to switch the wipers
to intermittent wiping. Set the number
of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel
when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the
wipers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
Using the rain sensor
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel
on the right-hand stalk switch.
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
Before activating the wipers - ensure that
the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that
any snow or ice on the windscreen and
rear window is scraped away.
Right-hand stalk switch.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain
is shown in the driver
sensor symbol
display.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or in ignition position I or II while
the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
}}
163
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
||
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
.
sensor button
Related information
•
Move the lever down to make the wipers
move.
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
•
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upward.
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
•
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or moving the stalk
switch up to another wiper program.
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
Deactivating the rain sensor
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically
when wiper blades are set in service position.
The rain sensor is reactivated when service
mode has been deactivated.
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen.
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can
be activated in such a way that the rain sensor
button does not need to be depressed each
time the car is started:
1.
2. Press My Car
164
Wipers.
3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is
in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the
driver display extinguishes.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
Windscreen and headlamp washers are
designed to clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers
are started using the right-hand stalk switch.
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when
it is frozen or the washer reservoir is
empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
–
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to start the windscreen
and headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch
has been released.
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with
the
symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise
cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it. The headlamps are only washed if
main or dipped beam is switched on.
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
}}
* Option/accessory. 165
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
The rear windscreen washer and wiper are
designed to clean the rear window. Washing/
wiping is started and settings are changed by
means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
Activating the rear window wiper and
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper motor is equipped
with overheating protection which means
that it is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a
cooling-down period.
Select
for intermittent wiping with
the rear window wiper.
–
Select
for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window
washing and wiping.
Related information
166
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
•
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
•
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are switched on initiates rear window
wiping. The function stops when reverse gear
is disengaged.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press My Car
Wipers.
3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing.
If the rear windscreen wiper is already operating at a constant speed then no change takes
place when reverse gear is engaged.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
167
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting
options in order to enhance comfort.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance
to the steering wheel and pedals. Check
that the seat is locked after the position
has been adjusted.
170
Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 172)
Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 173)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 174)
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or an accident.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat
cushion* by pumping up/down1.
1
•
You can manually adjust the height of the
head restraints by pressing in the button.
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing
the button upward/downward/forward/
back.
Raise/lower the seat by means of pumping the lever up/down.
Related information
•
•
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Only applies to the driver's seat.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Power* front seat
The car's front seats have a range of setting
options in order to enhance comfort. The
power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front
edge of the seat cushion can be raised/
lowered and the backrest inclination can be
changed. The lumbar support* can be
adjusted upwards/downwards/forwards/
backwards. Seat cushion length is adjusted
manually*.
Seat setup can take place when the engine is
running and within a certain time after unlocking the door without the engine running.
Adjustment can also be performed within a
certain time after the engine has been
switched off.
IMPORTANT
The power seats have overload protection
that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, remove the object
and then move the seat again.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 172)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 173)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 174)
Adjusting the power* front seat
Set to desired sitting position using the control on the front seat's seating section. Activate the lumbar support* by pressing the
four-way control.
Activate and use the lumber support control by pressing the four-way control up/
down/forwards/back.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge
by adjusting the control up/down.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by
adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
||
The backrests of the front seats cannot be
lowered fully forward.
Using a stored position for seat
and door mirrors
If the positions for the power* seat and the
door mirrors have been stored, they can be
activated by using the memory buttons.
Using a stored setting
Closed front door
– Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or
2 ( ) depressed until seat and door mirrors stop in the positions that are stored in
the selected memory button.
If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat and door mirrors will be stopped.
WARNING
You can manually adjust the height of the
head restraints by pressing in the button.
•
Because the driver's seat can be
adjusted with the ignition off, children
should never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel.
•
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Related information
•
•
•
172
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 172)
•
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 173)
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 174)
A stored setting can be used with the front
door either open or closed:
Open front door
– Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( )
or 2 ( ) with a short press. Power seat
and door mirrors move and then stop at
the positions stored in the selected memory button.
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 173)
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 174)
Adjusting* the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
•
Angling the door mirrors (p. 156)
For increased comfort, you can adjust the
length of the seat cushion.
•
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 174)
Control for seat cushion adjustment.
1.
on the front of the seat
Grip the handle
and pull upwards.
2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.
3. Release the handle and make sure that the
seat cushion has reached the correct position.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 172)
* Option/accessory. 173
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the lumbar support* in
the front seat
Adjusting the lumbar support
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be folded forward
individually.
The lumbar support is adjusted using a control on the side of the seat cushion.
WARNING
1.
Four-way button, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
The four-way lumbar support is adjusted using
the four-way button (the round one) which is
located on the side of the seat's seating section. The lumbar support can be adjusted forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards.
of the four-way
2. Press the front section
button to increase lumbar support.
of the four-way
3. Press the rear section
button to decrease lumbar support.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
174
Press the four-way button up /down
to move the lumbar support upwards/
downwards.
Manual front seat (p. 170)
Power* front seat (p. 171)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
Using a stored position for seat and door
mirrors (p. 172)
•
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the
seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries.
•
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
•
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
•
For cars with automatic gearbox, set
the gear selector in P to prevent it from
being moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion
in the front seat (p. 173)
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
IMPORTANT
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
Ensure that there are no occupants or objects
in the rear seat.
Lower the centre seat's head restraint
manually.
The through-load hatch* in the rear seat
must be closed before lowering.
Lowering the backrest
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car
must be stationary and at least one rear door
open.
WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it
is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
Pull the handles located on the car's left
and right-hand backrests forwards to fold
down the left and right-hand part of the
rear seat respectively.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be fully folded forward.
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock
and needs to be lowered manually to the
horizontal position.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually:
1.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats.
Move the backrest up/back.
2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3. Raise the head restraints manually.
Related information
•
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear
seat (p. 176)
•
•
Private locking (p. 250)
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 250)
* Option/accessory. 175
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down
the outer seat head restraints* to improve
rearward visibility.
Adjust the head restraint for the
centre seat
To lower the head restraint, the button (see
illustration) must be depressed while the
restraint is carefully moved down.
Press the Headrest Fold
button to activate/deactivate
lowering.
WARNING
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height
so that, if possible, the whole of the back of
the head is covered. Slide it up manually as
required.
The centre seat head restraint must be in
its lowest position when the centre seat is
not used. When the centre seat is used, the
head restraint must be correctly adjusted
to the height of the passenger so that it
covers the whole of the back of the head if
possible.
Fold down the rear seat's outer head
restraints via the centre display*
The outer head restraints can be retracted via
the centre display's function view. You can
lower the head restraints in ignition position 0.
176
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are passengers in any of the outer
rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.
* Option/accessory.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Related information
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 174)
Steering wheel controls and horn
Horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
The horn is located in the centre of the steering
wheel.
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems2.
Related information
•
•
Steering lock (p. 178)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing
in an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition and menu,
message and phone handling.
2 Speed
Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist.
* Option/accessory. 177
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Steering lock
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to
steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A
mechanical noise can be perceived when the
steering lock is locked or unlocked.
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then
the steering lock will be activated automatically after a while.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car
is unlocked from outside. If the car is not
locked, the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as long as the remote control key is in
the passenger compartment and the car is
started.
Related information
•
•
178
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 177)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
1.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must
never be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force
is regulated according to the car's speed in
order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
Push the lever forwards to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you move the lever back.
Related information
•
•
•
Steering lock (p. 178)
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 177)
Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 171)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
Climate
Climate zones
The car is equipped with manual or electronic* climate control. The climate control
system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies
the air in the passenger compartment.
All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical
buttons in the centre console.
The number of climate zones that the car is
divided into governs the options for setting
different temperatures for different parts of
the passenger compartment.
2-zone climate*
1-zone climate
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the
rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
180
Climate zones (p. 180)
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
Climate control - sensors (p. 181)
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the
passenger compartment can be set separately
for the left and right-hand sides.
Perceived temperature (p. 181)
Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 182)
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Heater* (p. 210)
Air quality (p. 183)
Climate zones with 1-zone climate.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 180)
With 1-zone climate, the temperature in the
passenger compartment is set jointly for the
left and right-hand sides.
Air distribution (p. 186)
Climate controls (p. 191)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of
sensors to help control the climate in the car.
Sensor location
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the
instrument panel.
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the
interior rearview mirror.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is
also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the
climate control system air intake.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 180)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 184)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based
on the perceived temperature, not on actual
temperature.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically
perceived temperature as affected by factors
such as the ambient temperature, air speed,
humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around
the car at the time.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Related information
•
Climate (p. 180)
Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror.
Temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment - by the physical buttons in
the centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
* Option/accessory. 181
CLIMATE
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition1
•
"Turn on auto" - activates automatic regulation* of the climate control.
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature,
activate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Press
and say one of the following commands:
•
"Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
•
"Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation.
•
"Turn on defroster "/"Turn off
defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors.
•
"Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
•
"Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
•
•
"Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
"Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step.
•
"Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*.
•
"Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature* for all climate zones in the
car with the temperature set for the driver's side.
•
"Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
•
•
"Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
"Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/
deactivates the heated steering wheel*.
•
"Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" closes the desired air flow.
•
•
"Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" changes the air flow to Max/Off.
"Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
•
"Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step.
•
"Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
1
182
•
"Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 180)
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Using voice recognition (p. 131)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger
compartment and the air cleaning system
ensure that the air quality in the passenger
compartment is high.
•
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 184)
Clean Zone*
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 184)
The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been
met for good air quality in the passenger
compartment.
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable,
even for people with contact allergies and for
asthma sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order
to reduce the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and
easy to remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the car is equipped with an air cleaning
system that helps to maintain high air quality
in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
•
Climate (p. 180)
Clean Zone* (p. 183)
The indicator is visible in the climate view
in the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that need to be met:
•
•
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 183
CLIMATE
||
•
•
•
That the air quality system Interior Air
Quality System* is activated.
That the ventilation fan is activated.
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the
conditions for good air quality have been
met.
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Interior Air Quality System*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the
passenger compartment even clearer from
allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully
automatic air quality system that separates
gases and particles to reduce the levels of
odours and contaminants in the passenger
compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such
as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and
ground-level ozone.
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 183)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 184)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 184)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key. The fan fills
the passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened. The amount of time the
fan runs is reduced gradually due to
reduced need up until the car is 4 years
old.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed
and air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger
compartment.
The fully automatic air quality system
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
•
•
•
•
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
Air quality (p. 183)
Clean Zone* (p. 183)
In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and
rear window should be used.
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 184)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
Related information
•
•
•
184
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 185)
Air quality (p. 183)
Clean Zone* (p. 183)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
•
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 184)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 185)
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/
deactivate the air quality sensor.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the
recommended replacement intervals. If the car
is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter
more often.
NOTE
Related information
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 184)
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Air quality (p. 183)
Clean Zone* (p. 183)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 184)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 184)
* Option/accessory. 185
CLIMATE
Air distribution
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 188)
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate control2 running
the air distribution takes place automatically. If
necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable,
which means that you can open/close the vent
to aim the air flow.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger
compartment.
With 1-zone climate - four on the instrument panel.
Addition with 2-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console.
NOTE
At low ambient temperatures, no air is distributed from the adjustable air vents on
the rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
•
•
2 Not
186
Climate (p. 180)
Changing air distribution (p. 187)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 187)
available with manual climate control.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Changing air distribution
Opening, closing and aiming the
air vents
The air distribution can be changed manually
if required.
1.
Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side
windows then misting can be eliminated.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards
then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster
vents
Opening and closing the air vents
–
Air distribution - air vents in instrument
panel and centre console
Turn the rotary knob in the middle of the
air vent to open/close the air flow from the
vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the
marking on the knob is in vertical position.
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
2. Press one or more of the air distribution
buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
Aiming the air vents
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Air distribution (p. 186)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 187)
–
Move the lever in the middle of the air vent
horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow
from the vent.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 186)
Changing air distribution (p. 187)
Table of air distribution options (p. 188)
Table of air distribution options (p. 188)
187
CLIMATE
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually
if required. The following options are available
for setting.
Air distribution
Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate
control.
With manual climate control it is not possible to deselect all air distribution buttons.
188
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air
flows from other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other
air vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
CLIMATE
Air distribution
Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument
panel. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some
air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents
at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
}}
189
CLIMATE
||
Related information
•
•
•
190
Air distribution (p. 186)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 187)
Changing air distribution (p. 187)
CLIMATE
Climate controls
Depending on equipment level, the climate
view can be divided into several tabs. Change
between the tabs by swiping left/right or by
pressing the respective heading.
The climate control system's functions are
controlled from physical buttons in the centre
console, the centre display and the climate
controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Climate row with 2-zone climate. Climate row with
1-zone climate has some differences regarding the
location of the controls.
Temperature controls for driver and passenger side3.
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door
mirrors.
Climate row in centre display
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
3 With
4 With
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as
heated steering wheel*4.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated climate settings.
Climate view in centre display
Open climate view by pressing the
symbol in the middle of the climate
row.
1-zone climate, the control is to the right of the centre button. With manual climate control, the set temperature is not shown, simply a scale.
1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row.
}}
* Option/accessory. 191
CLIMATE
||
Controls for air distribution.
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions,
other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.
Fan control.
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 198)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 199)
•
•
•
Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 200)
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate5.
Parking climate*
The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab.
Climate controls at rear of tunnel
console*
Synchronising temperature (p. 202)
Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 202)
If the car is equipped with heated rear seats*
there are physical buttons at the rear of the
tunnel console for controlling this function.
Related information
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
•
•
Climate (p. 180)
•
Activating and deactivating heated rear
seat* (p. 194)
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 194)
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 193)
Activating auto climate control (p. 195)
Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 196)
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 197)
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
5 Not
192
available with manual climate control.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
1.
Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row
in the centre display in order to open the
controls for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel (for the
driver's side), the button for heated seats
is immediately available in the climate
row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
seats in order to change between the four
levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat* (p. 193)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated front
seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic
start activated, heating will start in the event
of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
> An "A" is shown at each button for
heated front seats in the climate row
when automatic starting has been activated.
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select
level after the function has been activated.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 193)
* Option/accessory. 193
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase
in temperature due to a lack of sensation or
who otherwise have problems operating
the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the rear seat
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is
cold.
1.
Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for
seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated
seats or ventilated seats, the button for
heated steering wheel is immediately
available in the climate row.
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel
console.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels: Off, High,
Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change
between the four levels: Off, High,
Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button
shows the set level.
Related information
•
•
194
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel* (p. 195)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated steering
wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/
deactivated when the engine is started. With
automatic start activated, heating will start in
the event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic
start of heated steering wheel.
> An "A" is shown at the button for
heated steering wheel in the climate
row when automatic starting has been
activated.
4. Select Low, Medium or High to select
level after the function has been activated.
Activating auto climate control6
NOTE
With auto climate control activated, multiple
climate functions are controlled automatically.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Give a short or long press on AUTO
Climate.
•
Temperature and fan speed can be
changed without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system.
The automatically-regulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed manually or when
maximum defroster is activated.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically.
Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and
fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level 3.
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates.
•
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the heated
steering wheel* (p. 194)
6 Not
available with manual climate control.
* Option/accessory. 195
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the
passenger compartment.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for air recirculation (p. 196)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the
passenger compartment.
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When
the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
2. Press Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too
long then there is a risk of misting on the
insides of the windows.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated.
196
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 196)
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by
two quick presses of the button.
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist
and ice from windows.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of
the climate and air recirculation, activates air
conditioning and changes the fan level to 5
and the temperature to HI.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre display
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous
settings.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre console
There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster
can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display.
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
–
Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
–
1.
Activated heated windscreen
2. Press Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Related information
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
* Option/accessory. 197
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre display
NOTE
If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped
the engine then the engine will be restarted.
A heated windscreen is used to quickly
remove mist and ice from the window.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Related information
•
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen* (p. 199)
2. Press Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
•
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
•
198
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated
windscreen*
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
A heated windscreen is used to quickly
remove mist and ice from the window.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when
there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off
automatically when the windscreen/window is
sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is
gone.
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
1.
Activating and deactivating heated
rear window and door mirrors from
centre console
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated rear window and
door mirrors.
2. Press Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen.
Related information
•
•
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating heated
rear window and door mirrors from
centre display
Activating and deactivating the heated
windscreen* (p. 198)
Climate controls (p. 191)
Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window and
door mirrors (p. 200)
Physical button in the centre console.
–
Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors
are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
* Option/accessory. 199
CLIMATE
Activating and deactivating
automatic starting of the heated
rear window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated rear window and door mirrors should
be activated/deactivated when the engine is
started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating
switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Regulating fan level for front seat7
1.
7 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
8 Only with electronic climate control.
9 Only with electronic climate control.
200
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means
that the fan speed may change even
though the fan level is the same.9
•
3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear window and door mirrors (p. 199)
NOTE
Related information
2. Press Climate.
•
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged, which results
in a risk of misting on the insides of the
windows.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
IMPORTANT
The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled8 fan speeds for the front
seat.
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or
Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons
for the selected level illuminate.
Climate controls (p. 191)
CLIMATE
Regulating temperature for front
seat10
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
The temperature can be set to the desired
number of degrees11 for the front seat's climate zones.
Temperature control13, 11.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
•
Temperature buttons in the climate
1.
row12, 11.
Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate
row to open the controls.
drag the control to the desired temperature, or
press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature11.
•
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature
than the actual desired temperature.
10
11
12
13
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
With manual climate control, the set degrees are not shown, simply a scale.
With 1-zone climate, the temperature button is to the right of the centre button.
With 1-zone climate, the control is horizontal instead of vertical.
201
CLIMATE
Synchronising temperature14
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side.
by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's.
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
Related information
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls
starting and switching off as required.
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls.
1.
Press the driver's side temperature button
in the centre display's climate row in order
to open the controls.
2. Press Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car
is synchronised with the temperature
set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent
to the temperature button.
2. Press AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* so that the air conditioning should
work as well as possible.
The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
further press on Synchronise temperature or
14
202
Not available with 1-zone climate.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 191)
Parking climate*
Preconditioning*
Parking climate control is a generic term for
various functions that improve the passenger
compartment climate when the car is parked,
e.g. preconditioning.
Functions belonging to the parking
climate control are controlled from
the Parking climate in climate view
in the centre display. Open climate
view by pressing the symbol in the middle of
the climate row.
Preconditioning is a climate function which, if
possible, attempts to reach comfort temperature in the passenger compartment before
departure.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set
via the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different cases:
•
In a cold climate, the parking heater*
warms up the passenger compartment to
a comfortable temperature.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Climate (p. 180)
Preconditioning* (p. 203)
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 208)
Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 209)
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
Related information
•
•
•
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Start and switch off preconditioning*
(p. 204)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
* Option/accessory. 203
CLIMATE
Start and switch off
preconditioning*
Preconditioning heats* or ventilates the passenger compartment, if possible, prior to
driving. The function can use direct start from
the centre display or a mobile phone.
Start and switch off from car
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Press Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extinguished.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the
passenger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is
equipped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow under the front
part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)15 via the Volvo
On Call* app.
Related information
•
•
•
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Preconditioning* (p. 203)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats* the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature or ventilates the passenger compartment by blowing
in air from outside.
The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function
15
204
Certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Preconditioning time setting*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
•
•
A time on a single date
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up
to 8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
A time on one or more days of the week,
with or without repetition.
Related information
•
•
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning* (p. 206)
•
Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207)
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if
there already are 8 settings entered for the
timer. Delete a time setting in order to be
able to add a new one.
4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single
date.
Preconditioning* (p. 203)
•
3. Press Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or
more days of the week.
With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition
by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
The button to add a time setting in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
5. With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the
arrows.
With Days: Select the days of the week
for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
}}
* Option/accessory. 205
CLIMATE
||
7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time
setting.
> The time setting is added to the list and
is activated.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is
equipped with a heater*:
•
•
•
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow under the front
part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Editing a time setting
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning*
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on
need.
Related information
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
206
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting"
above.
•
•
1.
3. Press the time setting that is to be
changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
Preconditioning* (p. 203)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning* (p. 206)
Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207)
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the
climate view.
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the
setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is
equipped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow under the front
part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
Removing time setting for
preconditioning*
A time setting for preconditioning that is no
longer required can be deleted.
•
•
•
•
Preconditioning* (p. 203)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205)
Activating and deactivating time setting
for preconditioning* (p. 206)
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
Preconditioning* (p. 203)
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205)
3. Press Edit list.
Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205)
4. Press the delete icon to the right in the
list.
> The icon changes to the text Delete.
Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207)
•
•
•
•
1.
Related information
Related information
5. Press Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the
list.
* Option/accessory. 207
CLIMATE
Climate comfort when parking*
The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is
parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be
switched off but the driver or passenger(s)
wants to remain in the car and maintain the
level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start.
The function utilises several systems in different cases:
•
•
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold
climate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature.
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily.
Use of the function is intended to maintain
climate comfort when driver or passengers
remain inside the car.
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily.
Use of the function is intended to maintain
climate comfort when driver or passengers
remain inside the car.
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after
driving. The function can use direct start from
the centre display.
1.
Open climate view in the centre display by
pressing the symbol in the middle of the
climate row.
Related information
•
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 208)
2. Select the Parking climate tab.
3. Press Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual
heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside
temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
Related information
•
•
208
Parking climate* (p. 203)
Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking* (p. 208)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in
the driver display.
Symbol
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
Message
Specification
Parking climate
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.
Service required
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Parking climate
Limited Charge level too low
A
Messages relating to parking climate control
can also be displayed in a device which has
the Volvo On Call* app.
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a
workshopA to check the function.
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking
heater*. Fill the vehicle's fuel tank.
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to
start the parking heater*. Start the car.
The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the starter battery is low. Start the car.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 203)
* Option/accessory. 209
CLIMATE
Heater*
The heater has two subfunctions that help to
heat the passenger compartment or engine in
different situations.
The heater has two subfunctions:
•
Parking heater - heats the passenger compartment, if necessary, when the parking
climate control's preconditioning is activated.
•
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary,
during driving.
NOTE
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Make sure that there is enough charge in
the battery if the heater needs to be used.
Check in the driver display that
the heater is switched off. This
symbol is lit when it is working as
a parking heater.
Fuel and refuelling
Related information
•
•
•
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted inside the
engine compartment.
Climate (p. 180)
Parking heater* (p. 211)
Additional heater* (p. 212)
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from under the front part of the car
and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be
heard from the rear section of the car. This
is perfectly normal.
Battery and charging
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery. If the charge level of the starter battery is
too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.
210
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
If the car is parked on a steep incline, this may
limit the supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the
driver display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE
Parking heater*
The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the
car's preconditioning is activated.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside
the engine compartment.
When this symbol illuminates in the
driver display, the parking heater
may be active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from under the front part of the car
and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be
heard from the rear section of the car. This
is perfectly normal.
NOTE
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is
equipped with a heater*:
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be
used.
Make sure that there is enough charge in
the starter battery if the parking heater
needs to be used.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge
the battery and impair starting.
If the heater is used on a regular basis,
then the car should be driven for the same
amount of time that the heater is used in
order to ensure that the car's battery is
recharged with the same amount of energy
as consumed by the parking heater.
In unventilated spaces indoors.
Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater
starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long
grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For
example, deep snow under the front
part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a
long time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts
of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds
coming from the parking heater, switch off
the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse.
Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted for
repair.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
Depending on factors such as fuel availability,
battery level, passenger compartment temperature and ambient temperature, the heater
has different running times, but never longer
than 30 minutes.
•
Related information
•
•
Heater* (p. 210)
Additional heater* (p. 212)
* Option/accessory.
211
CLIMATE
Additional heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted
inside the engine compartment.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from under the front part of the car
and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be
heard from the rear section of the car. This
is perfectly normal.
•
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater* (p. 212)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of auxiliary heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.
It is possible to set whether automatic start
for the additional heater should be activated/
deactivated.
1.
Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press Climate.
3. Select Additional Heater to activate/
deactivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while
the car is being driven.
Volvo recommends that the automatic
start for the additional heater should be
switched off for short driving distances.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
Related information
NOTE
•
Additional heater* (p. 212)
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be
used.
Related information
•
•
212
Heater* (p. 210)
Parking heater* (p. 211)
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock confirmation
The car indicates with hazard warning flashers when the car is locked or unlocked.
Lock and alarm indicator on the
instrument panel
Indication in lock buttons
The lock and alarm indicator shows the status
of the locking system:
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
Front door
Exterior indication
Locking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors1.
Unlocking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending
the door mirrors1.
All doors, the tailgate and the bonnet must be
closed for the car to indicate that it is locked.
If locking takes place with just the driver door
closed2, locking will take place but the lock
indication with hazard warning flashers will
only take place when all doors, the tailgate
and the bonnet have been closed.
1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
2 Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless
214
•
•
A long flash indicates locking.
•
Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm*
indicate that the alarm has been triggered.
Short flashes indicate that the car is
locked.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors
are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will
extinguish in both doors.
locking/unlocking*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Rear door*
Lock indication setting
Remote control key
It is possible to select various options for how
the car confirms locking and unlocking in the
settings menu in the centre display.
To change the locking response setting:
The remote control key locks and unlocks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote
control key needs to be inside the car for it to
be started.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Locking.
3. Press Visible Locking Feedback to
select when the car is to give a visible
response:
• Lock
• Unlock
• Both
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door
in question is locked. If any door is unlocked,
its lamp will extinguish while the others will
continue to illuminate.
Other indication
The home safe lighting and approach light
functions can also be activated when locking
and unlocking.
Related information
•
•
•
Lock indication setting (p. 215)
Approach light duration (p. 146)
Using home safe lighting (p. 146)
Or switch off the function by selecting
Off .
To change the setting for retractable rearview
mirrors* when locking:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Convenience.
Mirrors and
3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Lock confirmation (p. 214)
Remote control key3 or key tag (Key Tag)*.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as
standard. You simply need to have the key in
the front part of the passenger compartment.
For cars equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be anywhere in the car to start the car. In this case, a
slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is
also supplied.
The remote control keys can be linked to different driver profiles to save personal preferences in the car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 215
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Remote control key buttons
automatically when the button is held
depressed. The tailgate is also closed with
a long press – acoustic warning signals
sound.
Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the
button for at least 3 seconds or press it
twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The
function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function
switches off automatically after 3 minutes.
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking – Pressing the button locks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*.
Press and hold to close all of the windows
and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking – Pressing the button unlocks
the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and
also deactivates the alarm.
A longer press opens all windows simultaneously. This total airing function can be
used, for example, to quickly air the car in
hot weather.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and panoramic roof* are
de-energised by always taking the remote
control key with you when you leave the
car.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
•
A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the
car is locked and the alarm is armed
using another valid key. The "Double
lock" function is also deactivated. The
key left behind is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
Button-less key (Key Tag)*
The key tag provided with the keyless locking
and unlocking function works in the same way
as the standard remote control key as regards
keyless starting and locking and unlocking.
The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10
metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has
no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced.
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be
disrupted by electromagnetic fields and
screening.
Tailgate – Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power
operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened
3 The
216
figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close
to metal objects or electronic apparatus,
e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or
chargers - preferably no closer than
10-15 cm (4-6 inches).
•
•
•
Detachable key blade (p. 224)
Immobiliser (p. 227)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 126)
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
Locking with the remote control key
If there is still interference - use the remote
control key's detachable key blade to unlock
and then place the key in the backup reader in
the storage compartment to disarm the car
and allow the car to be started.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned
in the backup reader in the storage compartment, make sure that there are no car
keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus
nearby (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to
one another in the storage compartment
may cause interference with each other.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 386)
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
Remote control key range (p. 219)
Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 220)
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
–
Press the remote control key
lock the car.
button to
For the lock sequence to be activated, the
driver door must be closed4. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate are open, these are
locked and alarmed* only when they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate
are closed and locked.
}}
* Option/accessory. 217
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
•
A remote control key or key tag left in
the car will be deactivated when the
car is locked and the alarm is armed
using another valid key. The "Double
lock" function is also deactivated. The
key left behind is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
Unlocking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key
unlock the car.
Settings for remotely controlled
and inside unlocking
When the remote control key does not
work
It is possible to select different sequences for
remotely controlled unlocking.
To change setting:
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and
making another unlock attempt.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the
driver's door with the detachable key blade.
1.
button to
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 218)
•
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key (p. 219)
•
•
Remote control key (p. 215)
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 225)
Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 220)
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Locking
Interior Unlock.
Remote and
3. Select option:
• All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously.
•
Related information
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the
remote control key in the cargo area when
the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked5.
–
automatically. This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally.
Single Door - unlocks the driver's
door. Unlocking all of the doors
requires two presses on the remote
control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 241)
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked
4 If
5 If
218
the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed.
the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
2. With the power operated tailgate option* Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
button
remote control key's
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the side doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by
pressing a button on the remote control key.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the remote
control key (p. 217)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 244)
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work
properly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car.
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g.
locking/unlocking that are activated by pressor
have a range that extends
ing on
approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
For keyless* use
1.
butPress the remote control key's
ton.
> The tailgate is unlocked but remains
closed.
The side doors are still locked and the
alarm is armed*. The lock and alarm
indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show that the entire
car is not locked.
Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle to
open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not
opened within 2 minutes then it is
relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the
button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a
semicircular area with a radius of approx.
1.5 metres (5 feet) on both long sides and
approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate.
}}
* Option/accessory. 219
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
with the key blade.
Replacing the battery in the
remote control key
The battery in the remote control key needs
to be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not
apply to Key Tag). The service life of the
battery varies depending on how often the
vehicle/key is used.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
•
Remote control key (p. 215)
Antenna locations for the start and lock
systems (p. 240)
The battery in the button-less key6 (Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be
ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed
over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The
key must be deleted from the car since it is
still possible to use it to start the car via
back-up start.
•
the information symbol illuminates and the
message Car key battery low is shown in
the driver display
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within
20 metres (65 feet) of the car.
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
6 Supplied
220
Always try moving closer to the car and
making another unlock attempt.
The battery for the remote control key should
be replaced if
Related information
•
•
NOTE
with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening the key and changing the
battery
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom
edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the
front side's shell a few millimetres
upwards.
Turn the key, move the button to the
side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the
battery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by
pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
}}
221
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory
or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards.
Then carefully prize loose the battery as
illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their
contact surfaces with your fingers as this
may impair their function.
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's
battery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two
plastic catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation
CR2032, 3 V.
222
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the
CLOSE text.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Ordering more remote control keys
Reposition the rear side's shell and
press it down until a clicking sound can be
heard.
Turn the remote control key over and
refit the front side's shell by pressing it
down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is properly positioned and securely
attached.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 225)
•
•
Starting the car (p. 386)
The car is supplied with two remote control
keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car
is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered.
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and
used for one single car. If additional keys are
ordered, additional driver profiles are added one per new remote control key. This also
applies for the key tag.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The
remaining remote control keys must be taken
to the workshop. The code of the missing key
must be erased from the system as a theft
prevention measure.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked via driver profiles in the
centre display's top view, select Settings
System Driver Profiles.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 215)
Remote control key (p. 215)
* Option/accessory. 223
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade
Detaching the key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of
functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade
•
the left-hand7 front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key
•
•
all doors are emergency-locked
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated and deactivated.
The button-less key8 does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable
key blade from the normal remote control key.
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom
edge by the key ring to the right. Guide
the front side's shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can
be lifted off the key.
Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the
shell is securely attached.
7 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
8 Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.
224
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 225)
•
Remote control key (p. 215)
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
5. Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Amongst other things, the detachable key
blade can be used to unlock the car from the
outside - e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged.
Locking will be performed in the same way,
but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees
instead of clockwise in step (3).
Unlocking
Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side9 to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the
lock cylinder and release the handle so
that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again.
9 This
applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
}}
225
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Switch off the alarm and start the car*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the
remote control key's detachable key blade e.g.
in the event of a loss of power or if the key's
battery has become discharged.
Remove the detachable key blade from
the remote control key. Insert the key
blade in the hole for lock reset and press
the key in until it bottoms, approx. 12 mm
(0.5 inches).
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and
instead have a lock switch on the end of each
door which must be depressed using the key
blade - they are then mechanically locked/
blocked to prevent them being opened from
outside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the
inner door handle must be opened.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
–
The doors can also be unlocked with the
unlock button on the remote control key or
with the central locking button on the driver's
door.
NOTE
The backup reader's location in the storage compartment.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1.
Place the remote control key on the key
symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel
console's storage compartment.
2. Press the start button.
> The alarm signal stops sounding and
the alarm is switched off.
226
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with
the child safety locks.
•
A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety
locks cannot be opened from either the
outside or the inside. A rear door that is
locked in this way can only be
unlocked with the remote control key
or central locking button.
Related information
•
•
Starting the car (p. 386)
Detachable key blade (p. 224)
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
•
Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 253)
•
Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 220)
•
Remote control key (p. 215)
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised
person from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol
Message
Specification
Car key not
found
Error reading the
remote control
key during starting - place the
key on the key
symbol in the
storage compartment and try
again.
See
Owner's
manual
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 215)
Ordering more remote control keys
(p. 223)
* Option/accessory. 227
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
For detailed information on type approval, go
to www.volvocars.com.
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that
this CV1-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and
other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
228
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia
P1614120100
Argentina
CNC ID: C-14771
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Brazil
MT-3245/2015
Indonesia
Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia
RDBV/25A/1118/S(18-4228), RDBV/26A/1118/S(18-4229)
Mexico
IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates
ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
}}
229
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
Namibia
TA-2016-02
South Africa
TA-2014-1868
Remote control key
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551
Velbert, Germany
Jordan
230
TRC/LPD/2015/104
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Morocco
Type approval
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2)
este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la
que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
TA-2015-102
}}
231
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Oman
Serbia
232
Type approval
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-432
The United Arab
Emirates
Key Tag
Country/Area
Type approval
Europe
Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551
Velbert, Germany
Jordan
TRC/LPD/2015/107
}}
233
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Morocco
Type approval
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico
IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1)
es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2)
este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la
que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia
234
TA-2015-103
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Country/Area
Type approval
Oman
Serbia
}}
235
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Country/Area
Type approval
South Africa
TA-2015-414
The United Arab
Emirates
Related information
•
236
Remote control key (p. 215)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
With the keyless locking and unlocking function, carrying the remote control key in a
pocket or bag will suffice. The car is locked or
unlocked via a touch-sensitive surface on the
door handle.
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping
the handle while touching the lock surface
risks giving double commands. This means
that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 239)
Tailgate handle
The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure
plate that is only used for unlocking.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated
in connection with car washing if the
remote control key is in range.
* Option/accessory. 237
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless locking and unlocking*
Keyless locking
Keyless unlocking
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the door handle's touch-sensitive surface to lock or unlock the car.
All side doors must be closed to be able to
lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand,
can be open when locking the car with a side
door handle.
–
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range for locking and unlocking
to work.
–
Touch the marked surface towards the
rear on the outside of a door handle after
the door has been closed. Or press the
button on the underside of the tailgate before it closes.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts to flash to indicate the car
is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against
the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of
the door handle and hold it there until all of the
side windows and the panoramic roof have
been closed.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated
in connection with car washing if the
remote control key is in range.
238
Locking when the tailgate is open
If the car has been locked and the tailgate is
still open, make sure that the remote control
key is not left in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed.
NOTE
Grasp a door handle or gently press the
rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel stops flashing to indicate that the
car is unlocked.
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate can only be
used for unlocking.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car
from being left unlocked unintentionally.
If the key is detected inside the car, the
tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Related information
•
•
•
Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 239)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 239)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
Settings for Keyless entry*
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
To change setting:
With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the touch-sensitive surface on
the tailgate handle to unlock the tailgate.
1.
NOTE
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Tap on My Car
Unlock.
Locking
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range behind the car for unlocking to work.
Keyless
3. Select option:
• All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously.
• Single Door - unlocks selected door.
Related information
•
•
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open:
1.
Press gently on the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle.
> The lock is released.
}}
* Option/accessory. 239
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to open
the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the
rubber panel.
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to
the keyless system's antennas with their
pacemaker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless
system.
An antenna for the keyless starting system
and antennas for the keyless locking system*
are built into the car.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
•
Remote control key range (p. 219)
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear
bumper, see separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Related information
•
•
•
•
240
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 238)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
Antenna locations:
In the storage compartment in the tunnel
console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door10
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door10
In the cargo area10
Remote control key range (p. 219)
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 248)
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
Alternative unlocking method
Locking using a button in the front
door
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors.
–
Central locking
Locking using a button in the rear
door*
Press the
button - both front doors
must be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side
door11.
–
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in
the front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front
door
–
10
11
12
Press the
button to unlock all side
doors and the tailgate.
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
Provided that the child safety lock is not activated.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the
remote control key, either all doors will
be unlocked or only the selected door
will be unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock in the centre display's
top view.
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons lock their respective rear door.
Unlocking the rear door
–
Pull the opening handle.
> The rear door is unlocked and opened12.
}}
* Option/accessory. 241
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Related information
•
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 218)
•
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of
the car (p. 242)
•
Activating and deactivating child safety
locks (p. 243)
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
The tailgate can be unlocked from inside by
pressing the button on the instrument panel.
–
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 241)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 244)
Brief press on the
button on the
instrument panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and
opened from the outside by grasping
the rubberised pressure plate.
With the power operated tailgate option*:
–
242
Long press on the
button on the
instrument panel.
> The tailgate is opened.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
NOTE
The child safety locks prevent the rear doors
being opened from inside.
The child safety locks may be either manual or
electric*.
Activating and deactivating manual
child safety locks
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Activating and deactivating electric*
child safety locks
The electric child safety locks can be activated
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be
performed up to 2 minutes after switching off
the car, provided that no door is opened.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear
•
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
–
Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
When the car is switched off, the current setting is stored – if the child safety locks are
activated when the car is switched off, the
function will continue to be activated next
time the car is started.
Manual child safety locks. Not to be confused with
manual door locks.
–
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1.
Start the car or choose an ignition position
higher than 0.
}}
* Option/accessory. 243
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Rear child
lock Activated
Child safety
locks are activated.
Rear child
lock Deactivated
Child safety
locks are deactivated.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 241)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 224)
Automatic locking when driving
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Locking.
Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate
Function where the tailgate can be opened
and closed at the touch of a button.
Opening
Choose one of the following options to open
the power operated tailgate:
3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving
to deactivate or activate this function.
Related information
•
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 241)
–
244
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the
tailgate starts to open.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
–
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
remains unlocked.
–
Closing
Choose one of the following options to close13
the power operated tailgate:
NOTE
–
13
•
The button is active 24 hours after the
hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it
must be closed manually.
•
If the flap has been open for more than
30 minutes, it will close at a slow
speed.
Light press on the tailgate handle.
A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
}}
* Option/accessory. 245
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
–
Long press on the
button on the
remote control key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
–
Long press on the
button on the
instrument panel.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
–
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound – the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Closing and locking
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be
damaged and stop working correctly.
Cancel opening or closing
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock13 the tailgate and doors (all doors
must be closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically – the
tailgate and doors are locked, and the
alarm* is armed.
–
NOTE
13
246
detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.
•
One of the car's remote control keys
must be within range for locking and
unlocking to work.
•
When using keyless* locking or closing,
three signals will sound if the key is not
Cancel opening or closing in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
Press the button on the instrument panel.
Press the remote control key's button.
Press the closing button on the underside
of the tailgate.
•
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
•
Using a foot movement*.
The tailgate's movement is interrupted and
stops. The tailgate can then be operated manually.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate.
A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Pinch protection
Pre-tensioned springs
If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then
the pinch protection is activated.
•
•
Programming maximum opening
for power operated tailgate*
Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low
roof height.
To adjust max. opening:
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds.
1.
During closing - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal
sounds and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position.
WARNING
Watch out for the risk of crushing when
opening and closing.
Open the tailgate - stop it in the open
position.
NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening
position lower than half-open tailgate.
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated
tailgate.
WARNING
Check that there is nobody near the tailgate before starting to open or close it as a
crush injury may have severe consequences.
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for
the power operated tailgate. They are pretensioned with high pressure and can
cause injury if opened.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Related information
•
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate* (p. 247)
•
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 248)
•
Remote control key range (p. 219)
button on the underside of
2. Press the
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to
indicate that the set position has been
saved.
To reset max. opening:
–
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position – press and hold the
button on the tailgate for at least
3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its maximum position when opened.
}}
* Option/accessory. 247
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
•
If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched
off to avoid overload. It can be used
again after about 2 minutes.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 244)
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
A function which allows the tailgate to open
and close by moving a foot under the rear
bumper makes life easier when your hands
are full.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate
with a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of
the tailgate is also available when the car is
equipped with power operated tailgate*.
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions:
•
Opening and closing with foot movement
•
Only unlocking with foot movement
(lift up the tailgate manually to open it)
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car, approx. 1 metre
(3 feet), for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked
car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in
a car wash.
Note that the function for opening and
closing with foot movement requires
power operated tailgate*.
248
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Opening and closing with foot
movement
Cancelling opening or closing with foot
movement
– Make one slow forward kicking motion
when opening or closing is in progress in
order to stop the movement of the tailgate.
•
Remote control key range (p. 219)
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or
closing of the tailgate.
If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate.
NOTE
Kicking motion within the detector's activation area.
–
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar.
For this reason, make sure you keep it
clean.
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper.
Then take a step back. The bumper must
not be touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the
tailgate is opened/closed.
If several kicking motions take place without
an approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible
until after a certain delay.
Do not leave your foot positioned under the
car during the kicking motion. This could
cause activation to fail.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range.
Related information
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
•
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 244)
* Option/accessory. 249
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Private locking
The tailgate can be locked with the private
locking function which prevents it from being
opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.
The private locking function
button is located in the centre display function view.
Depending on the current
status of the lock, Private
Locking Unlocked or
Private Locking Locked is
shown.
Activating and deactivating private
locking
Private locking is activated with a function
button in the centre display and an optional
PIN code.
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 250)
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
NOTE
Private locking has two codes:
•
A security code is created the first time
the function is used.
•
A new PIN code is selected every time the
function is activated.
Enter the security code before using
for the first time
A security code needs to be selected during
the first time the function is used. It can then
be used to deactivate private locking if the
selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost.
The security code acts as a PUK code for all
subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
250
1.
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to
be activated.
Related information
•
To create a security code:
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the preferred security code and
press Confirm.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activation.
Activate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
2. Enter the code to be used in order to
unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
locking takes place by means of a
green indicator being shown by the
button in the function view.
Deactivate private locking
1.
Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code that was used for locking
and tap on Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation
of unlocking takes place by means of
the green indicator by the button in the
function view extinguishing.
Forgotten PIN code
If the PIN code has been forgotten or the
wrong PIN code has been entered more than
three times, the security code can be used to
deactivate private locking.
14
Applies to certain markets.
If the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the
Volvo On Call app, private locking will be
deactivated automatically.
Alarm*
The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid
remote control key or manipulates the starter
battery or alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
Forgotten security code
If the security code has also been forgotten,
contact an authorised Volvo dealer for help
with deactivating private locking.
•
Related information
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened14
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
•
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
•
Private locking (p. 250)
the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
•
Hazard warning flashers flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched
off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times14.
}}
* Option/accessory. 251
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Alarm indicator
ment - air currents are also registered. For this
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left
with a window or the panoramic roof* open or
if the passenger compartment heater is used.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any
such attempts may affect the terms of the
insurance.
To avoid this:
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
•
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second
– alarm is armed.
After the alarm has been disarmed, the
LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of
30 seconds or until ignition position I has
been activated - the alarm has been triggered.
Movement and tilt sensors*
Movement and tilt sensors react to movements inside the car, if the window is broken
or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow
the vehicle away.
•
Close the window and panoramic roof
when leaving the car.
•
If the passenger compartment or parking
heater is to be used – direct the airflow
from the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to
temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt
sensors.
Related information
•
•
•
Activating and deactivating alarms*
(p. 253)
Reduced alarm level* (p. 254)
Double lock* (p. 254)
Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors
when the car is being transported on a ferry or
train as these movements may affect the car
and trigger the alarm.
In the event of an alarm system fault
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the
event of movement in the passenger compart-
252
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Activating and deactivating
alarms*
1.
The alarm is armed when the car is locked.
Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
2.
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows
•
press the remote control key's lock button
.
•
touch the marked surface on the outside
of the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate15.
If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*,
the
button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm
the car alarm.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once
every two seconds when the car is locked and the
alarm is armed.
Deactivate the alarm
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows
•
press the remote control key's unlock button .
•
grip one of the door handles or press gently on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate15.
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if
the remote control key's battery is dead.
15
Applies to cars with keyless locking and unlocking*.
Place the remote control key on the key
symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel
console's storage compartment.
3. Press the start button.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Switching off a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key's unlock button or set the car in ignition position I by
pressing the start button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 253
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the
car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within two
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Reduced alarm level*
Double lock*
A reduced alarm level means that the movement and tilt sensors are temporarily
switched off.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the
alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry.
Double lock means that all opening handles
are released mechanically when locking from
the outside, which makes it impossible to
open the doors from the inside.
Double lock is activated when locking with a
remote control key or with keyless locking*,
and takes place with a delay of approx.
10 seconds after the doors have locked. If a
door is opened within the delay time then the
sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display
function view to switch off
the movement and tilt sensors when subsequently locking the car.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without
being locked.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car
Locking.
3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to
deactivate the function temporarily.
Related information
•
254
Alarm* (p. 251)
At the same time, the double lock function is
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
the reduced alarm level must be reactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with a remote
control key, keyless unlocking* or the Volvo
On Call* app when double lock is activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with
the detachable key blade. If the car is
unlocked with the detachable key blade, the
alarm will be triggered.
NOTE
Related information
•
•
Alarm* (p. 251)
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
The alarm is triggered if anyone
attempts to open the doors from
inside.
Double lock* (p. 254)
* Option/accessory.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the function in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Related information
•
Temporarily* deactivating double locks
(p. 255)
•
Alarm* (p. 251)
Temporarily* deactivating double
locks
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the double lock function should be deactivated, to allow unlocking from the inside.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the function in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again,
the double lock function must be deactivated
again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
•
Double lock* (p. 254)
Alarm* (p. 251)
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to
deactivate the double lock
function temporarily.
This also means that the alarm's movement
and tilt detectors* are switched off.
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the
centre display and double locks are temporarily deactivated in the subsequent locking of
the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets
are deactivated immediately, but when double
locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be
active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
* Option/accessory. 255
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in
different situations, either actively or passively.
For example, the systems can help the driver
to:
•
•
maintain a set speed
maintain a certain time interval to the vehicle ahead
•
prevent a collision by giving a warning to
the driver and braking the car
•
help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard
while others are options – which alternative
applies is market dependent.
Related information
258
•
IntelliSafe – driver support and safety
(p. 31)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 258)
Stability system (p. 263)
Electronic stability control (p. 259)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Speed-dependent steering force
Radar unit (p. 301)
Speed related power steering causes the
steering wheel force to increase with the
speed of the car so as to be able to give the
driver enhanced sensitivity.
On motorways the steering is firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires less effort.
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Camera unit (p. 310)
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 329)
BLIS* (p. 330)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 334)
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Driver Alert Control (p. 345)
Lane assistance (p. 347)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
NOTE
In rare situations the power
steering may become too hot and
then needs to be temporarily
cooled – during this time the
power steering operates with reduced
power and turning the steering wheel may
then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
Then the message Power steering
Assistance temporarily reduced and this
symbol are shown in the driver display.
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions and steering assistance system are
not available.
Connected Safety (p. 263)
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 269)
Cruise control (p. 273)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
If the temperature increases too much, the
servo may be forced to switch off completely. In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure
Stop safely message, combined with a
symbol.
Change the steering force level*
Steering wheel resistance can be adjusted
when using INDIVIDUAL drive mode.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select My Car Drive Modes
Steering Force.
Steering wheel resistance selection can only
be accessed if the car is stationary or is moving at low speed and in a straight line.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Electronic stability control
Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
The driver display shows this
symbol when the system is
engaged.
Braking from the system may
be heard as a pulsing sound,
and the car may accelerate
more slowly than expected when applying the
throttle.
The system consists of the following subfunctions:
•
•
•
•
Stability function2
Spin control and traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Stability function2
The function checks the driving and brake
force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
1 Electronic Stability Control
2 Also known as Active Yaw Control.
}}
* Option/accessory. 259
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Spin control and traction control
system
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional
traction shall be transferred from the drive
wheels that are not spinning.
The function can also prevent the driving
wheels from spinning against the road surface
during acceleration.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 261)
•
Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 262)
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 444)
Engine Drag Control
Engine Drag Control (EDC3) can prevent involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down
or engine braking when driving in low gear on
slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Trailer stability
assist*4
Trailer stability assist (TSA5) stabilises a car
towing a trailer in situations where they begin
snaking.
NOTE
Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC
Sport Mode is activated.
3 Engine Drag Control
4 Trailer stability assist is included
5 Trailer Stability Assist
6 Electronic Stability Control
260
Electronic Stability Control in sport
mode
The stability system (ESC6) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However,
the driver can select ESC Sport Mode,
which allows for a more active driving experience.
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction
selected, intervention from the system is
reduced and the car is allowed to skid more
and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the function can be considered as deactivated, despite
the function continuing to help the driver in
many cases.
NOTE
With ESC Sport Mode selected, Trailer
Stability Assist (TSA7) is deactivated.
ESC Sport Mode also provides more traction
even if the car has become bogged down or is
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or
deep snow.
when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
Electronic stability control (p. 259)
Activating or deactivating sport mode for
electronic stability control (p. 261)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 444)
Activating or deactivating sport
mode for electronic stability
control
The stability system (ESC8) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However,
the driver can select sport mode, which
allows for a more active driving experience.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control in sport mode
(p. 260)
•
Electronic stability control (p. 259)
The driver display indicates activated
ESC Sport Mode by displaying this
symbol with a constant glow until
the function is deactivated or the
engine is switched off. The next time the
engine is started, the system is back in its normal mode again.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions
is activated:
7 Trailer Stability Assist
8 Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory. 261
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
shown on the driver display. Here are some
examples.
A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (ESC9) can be
Symbol
Message
Specification
Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
The system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is activated. NOTE: The system is not deactivated in this mode – it is partly
reduced.
ESC
The system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is
reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
Temporarily off
ESC
The system is disengaged. Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Service required
A text message can be cleared by briefly
button, located in the centre
pressing the
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
9 Electronic
262
Stability Control
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (p. 259)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Stability system
(RSC10)
The stability system
reduces the risk
of overturning, for example during a sudden
evasive manoeuvre or if the car skids.
The system registers if and how much the
car's lateral inclination changes. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car
overturning. If the car is at risk, its electronic
stability control system engages, the engine
torque is reduced and one or more wheels are
braked until the car has regained its stability.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the system improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (p. 259)
Connected Safety11
Connected Safety communicates information
between your own car and other vehicles via
the Internet12. The function is intended to
make a driver aware that there may be a
potentially dangerous traffic situation further
ahead on the same road.
The Connected Safety function can inform the
driver whether another vehicle further ahead
on the same road has activated its hazard
warning flashers or detected slippery driving
conditions. Information about slippery driving
conditions is also given if your own car detects
slippery surfaces.
Connected Safety can help the driver with the
following:
•
•
Alarm on hazard warning flashers
Alarm on slippery driving conditions
If slippery driving conditions are detected by
your own car - in addition to you the driver drivers in other vehicles will also be informed
about this via the Internet.
NOTE
Connected Safety communication
between vehicles only works for the vehicles equipped with the function and have it
activated.
Alarm on hazard warning flashers
If your own car's hazard warning flashers are
activated, information about this can be sent
to vehicles approaching your own car's position.
When your own car is
approaching a vehicle with
flashing hazard warning
flashers, this symbol is
shown on the instrument
panel.
When your own car is close to a vehicle with
flashing hazard warning flashers, the symbol
doubles in size.
Alarm on slippery driving conditions
If your own car detects a deterioration in friction between tyres and road surface, the information is sent to the vehicles approaching the
position of your own car.
10
11
12
Roll Stability Control
Not available on all markets.
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
}}
263
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
If an ice alert is triggered, this
symbol is displayed on the
instrument panel when a
vehicle approaches the slippery road section, both in
your own car and in other
vehicles that have received
the information via Connected Safety.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
When the approaching vehicle is close to the
slippery section of road, the symbol doubles in
size on the vehicle's instrument panel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
13
264
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating Connected
Safety (p. 264)
Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 265)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Activating or deactivating
Connected Safety
For Connected Safety to be able to share
information on road conditions with other
vehicles, the function needs to be activated.
The function can be deactivated if you do not
want to share information.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
When activated, several windows are shown
with terms and conditions that must be
accepted by the driver to enable connection to
the Internet13. For example, a situation where
the driver must accept data being sent from
the car using his/her mobile phone.
If there is no Internet connection, your own car
will still inform you, the driver, that slippery
driving conditions have been detected by your
own car. For Connected Safety to work optimally, your own car needs to be connected to
the Internet.
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
•
Connected Safety (p. 263)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 499)
Limitations of Connected Safety (p. 265)
Limitations of Connected Safety
retailer for Volvo has information on current areas.
Information about vehicles with activated
hazard warning flashers or which have
detected slippery driving conditions is not
always communicated between all vehicles
within the same area.
This can be because for example:
•
•
Poor or no contact with the Internet.
•
Vehicles that have detected slippery surfaces, or have activated their hazard warning flashers, do not have the function activated.
Vehicles on slippery surfaces make
manoeuvres that are too weak for friction
between tyres and road surface to be
detectable, e.g. steering wheel movement,
acceleration or braking.
•
Vehicles that have detected slippery surfaces, or have activated their hazard warning flashers, are not equipped with the
function.
•
There may be no warning due to missing
or defective global positioning/satellite
navigation.
•
Detection of slippery surfaces or activation
of hazard warning flashers has taken place
on a minor road which is missing in Volvo
Cars database.
•
Connected Safety is not available in all
markets and does not cover all areas - a
WARNING
•
In certain situations, the function may
give incorrect warnings for slippery
driving conditions.
•
The function cannot always detect
other vehicles with activated hazard
warning flashers or detect all sections
of road with slippery surfaces.
Related information
•
•
Connected Safety (p. 263)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
* Option/accessory. 265
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed limiter
A speed limiter (SL14) can be likened to a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates
the speed using the accelerator pedal but is
prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed
limiter.
: From active mode – deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby
mode
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
Buttons and symbols for the function.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed
: Increases the stored maximum
speed
: From standby mode – activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
14
266
Speed Limiter
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 258)
•
•
•
Limitations for speed limiter (p. 269)
•
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 268)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 267)
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 268)
Selecting and activating speed
limiter
•
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 296)
•
Automatic speed limiter (p. 269)
The speed limiter function (SL15) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to
regulate the speed.
2. When speed limiter is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – the speed limiter
is started and the current speed is
stored as maximum speed.
Related information
•
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 268)
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 268)
The speed limiter cannot be activated until
after the engine has been started. The lowest
maximum speed that can be stored is
30 km/h (20 mph).
1.
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol
(4).
for the speed limiter
> The symbol is grey – the speed limiter
is in standby mode.
15
Speed Limiter
267
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating the speed limiter
The speed limiter
and switched off.
(SL16)
can be deactivated
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Temporary deactivation of speed
limiter
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 267)
The speed limiter (SL17) can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation of speed limiter
(p. 268)
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
Related information
•
•
•
The speed limiter can also be temporarily
deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter first having
to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to
quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1.
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
the speed limiter is set in standby mode
and the driver can exceed the set speed
limit.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off
– which deletes the stored maximum
speed.
16
17
268
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when
the desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still
activated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when
the temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then engine-braked automatically to below the last stored maximum
speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Selecting and activating speed limiter
(p. 267)
Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 268)
Limitations for speed limiter
(SL18)
Speed limiter
has certain general limitations.
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s (SL19) braking effect may be inadequate
and hence the stored maximum speed may be
exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by
the message Speed limit exceeded in the
driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
•
18
19
20
21
22
Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Automatic Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL20) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road
signs.
The Speed Limiter function (SL21) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information*
(RSI22) function to automatically adapt the
car's maximum speed.
WARNING
Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information* (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in such
cases the driver must intervene him/herself
and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 269
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
•
•
270
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which
speed limiter function is active:
Symbol
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
SL
ASL
✓
✓
Colour of
sign symbol
Meaning
Greenish yellow
ASL is active
Grey
A
Orange
✓
Sign symbol after "70" = ASL is
activated.
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby
mode.
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the
centre of the speedometer) can be
shown in three colours with the following meanings:
ASL has been set in
standby mode
ASL is in temporary
standby mode - e.g. due to
a traffic sign not being
read
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating the automatic
speed limiter (p. 271)
•
Changing the tolerance for the automatic
speed limiter (p. 272)
•
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 272)
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
NOTE
•
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL23)
can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL24).
Activating the automatic speed limiter
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
1.
> GREEN button indication – the function is activated and the driver display
shows a sign symbol in the centre of
the speedometer.
.
2. Press the steering wheel button
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, Road Sign Information* is
shown in the driver display even if
RSI25 is not activated.
•
To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate
both automatic speed limiter and RSI.
•
When the Automatic Speed Limiter
function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI.
RSI must also be activated in order to
receive warnings.
Related information
Speed limiter (p. 266)
•
•
•
Automatic speed limiter (p. 269)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 272)
Deactivating the automatic speed
limiter
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
–
Tap on the button in the function view.
> GREY button indication – ASL is
switched off and SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will
no longer follow the signed speed limit but
only the stored maximum speed.
23
24
25
Automatic Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information – RSI
* Option/accessory. 271
DRIVER SUPPORT
Changing the tolerance for the
automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function
(ASL26) can be set for different tolerance levels. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way
as the speed setting is in the speed limiter.
If, for example, the car follows a signed speed
limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can
instead choose to allow the car to maintain
75 km/h (47 mph).
–
Press the steering wheel button
(1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of
the speedometer (2) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected
tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as
signs passed are showing 70 km/h
(43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign with
a lower or higher speed is passed - then the
car follows the new signed speed limit instead
and the tolerance is deleted from the memory.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Limitations for automatic speed
limiter
Automatic speed limitation (ASL27) takes
place using speed information from the Road
Sign Information function* (RSI28) – not from
the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If road sign information cannot interpret and
provide speed information to the driver support systems, the automatic speed limiter sets
in standby mode and changes to normal
speed limiter. In such cases the driver must
intervene and brake to a suitable speed.
The automatic speed limiter will be reactivated
when road sign information can once again
interpret and provide speed information.
Related information
Related information
•
•
Buttons and symbols for the function.
26
27
28
272
•
Automatic speed limiter (p. 269)
Limitations for automatic speed limiter
(p. 272)
•
•
•
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 269)
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Automatic Speed Limiter
Automatic Speed Limiter
Road Sign Information – RSI
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control
The cruise control (CC29) helps the driver
maintain an even speed, which can result in
more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Overview
: Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* (ACC30), it is possible to switch
between cruise control and adaptive cruise
control.
Buttons and symbols for the function.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode – activates
cruise control and stores current speed
: From active mode – deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
29
30
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with
less frequent application of the foot brake. On
a downhill gradient it may sometimes be
desirable to start moving a little faster and
}}
* Option/accessory. 273
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this
case the driver can temporarily disable foot
brake application by Cruise Control.
To do so, proceed as follows:
–
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses
engine braking only.
Selecting and activating cruise
control
The cruise control function (CC31) must first
be selected and activated in order to be able
to regulate the speed.
Reactivating cruise control to the last
stored speed
Related information
•
•
2. When cruise control is selected – press
the steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – cruise control is
started and the current speed is stored
as maximum speed. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
–
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 274)
•
•
•
Deactivating cruise control (p. 275)
•
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 282)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 275)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 296)
In order to start the cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must
be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher.
1.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol
(4).
for cruise control
> The symbol is grey – cruise control is in
standby mode.
Related information
•
•
•
31
274
When cruise control is selected – press
to activate.
the steering wheel button
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
Cruise control (p. 273)
Deactivating cruise control (p. 275)
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 275)
Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control
switched off.
(CC32)
can be deactivated and
Related information
•
•
Cruise control (p. 273)
•
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 274)
•
Standby mode for cruise control (p. 275)
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 282)
Standby mode for cruise control
Cruise control (CC33) can be deactivated and
set in standby mode. This can take place due
to driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
In this case, cruise control does not regulate
speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is deactivated and set in
standby mode if any of the following occurs:
•
•
•
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
cruise control is set in standby mode.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for cruise control (4) are switched
off – which deletes the stored maximum speed.
32
33
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
•
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The clutch pedal is held depressed for
longer than 1 minute.
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
}}
* Option/accessory. 275
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Automatic standby mode
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
brake temperature is too high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/herself.
Adaptive cruise control*34
(ACC35)
The adaptive cruise control
helps the
driver to maintain an even speed combined
with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control can provide a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
Related information
•
•
Cruise control (p. 273)
•
Deactivating cruise control (p. 275)
The driver selects the desired speed and a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in
front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle.
276
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Selecting and activating cruise control
(p. 274)
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to
the vehicle ahead.
34
35
When the road is clear again the car returns to
the selected speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control regulates the speed
with acceleration and braking. It is normal for
the brakes to emit a low sound when they are
being used to adjust the speed.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must brake
himself/herself. This applies in cases of large
speed differences or if the vehicle in front
brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the
radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or
not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot
see any vehicle in front then the car will
instead maintain the speed set and stored by
the driver. This also takes place if the speed of
the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the
stored speed.
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 281)
Controls and display mode for
adaptive cruise control*36
•
Symbols and messages for adaptive
cruise control* (p. 283)
•
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 294)
A summary of how adaptive cruise control
(ACC37) is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display.
•
•
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 297)
•
Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 298)
•
Change of target with driver support
(p. 295)
•
Overtaking Assistance (p. 300)
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 296)
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
36
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Controls and display mode for adaptive
cruise control* (p. 277)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 278)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
: From standby mode - activates and
stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes to standby mode
: Activates the function from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
}}
* Option/accessory. 277
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Increases the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Related information
•
•
Target vehicle indicator: the function has
detected and is following a target vehicle
at the preset time interval
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 281)
Selecting and activating adaptive
cruise control*38
Adaptive cruise control (ACC39) must first be
selected and then activated to enable it to
control speed and distance.
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Driver display
To start the function requires the following:
Indication of speeds.
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of
Stored speed.
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
37
38
39
278
Adaptive Cruise Control
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
1.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶
(3) to scroll to the adaptive cruise control
(4).
symbol
> The symbol is grey – the adaptive
cruise control is in standby mode.
2. When speed limiter is selected – press the
(1) to activate.
steering wheel button
> The symbol is white – the speed limiter
is started and the current speed is
stored as maximum speed.
Reactivating adaptive cruise control to
the last stored speed
–
When the adaptive cruise control is
selected – press the steering wheel button
to activate.
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Additional indicators in the driver
display
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two
vehicles.
Deactivating adaptive cruise
control*40
The adaptive cruise control (ACC41) can be
deactivated and switched off.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored speed, and the lower
speed is that of the vehicle
ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 279)
•
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 282)
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 281)
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
the adaptive cruise control is set in
standby mode. The indicator for time
interval and symbol for target vehicle, if
activated, are also switched off.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for adaptive cruise control (4) are
switched off – which deletes the stored
maximum speed.
}}
* Option/accessory. 279
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
•
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may
be warned of the short distance by the
Distance Warning* function instead.
Standby mode for adaptive cruise
control*42
Adaptive cruise control (ACC43) can be deactivated and set to standby mode. This can
take place due to driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
Adaptive cruise control does not then regulate
the speed or distance to the vehicle in front.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 278)
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 282)
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 281)
The adaptive cruise control is deactivated and
set in standby mode if any of the following
occurs:
•
•
•
•
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
WARNING
•
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
•
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too
close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may
be warned of the short distance by the
Distance Warning* function instead.
Automatic standby mode
Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other
systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC44.
If any of these other systems stops working,
adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
40
41
42
43
44
280
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.
•
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
•
•
the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and
ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle
ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object,
such as a speed bump.
the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the driver opens the door.
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Limitations for adaptive cruise
control*45
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 278)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC46) may have
limitations in certain situations.
•
Deactivating adaptive cruise control*
(p. 279)
Steep roads and/or heavy load
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 281)
Related information
•
•
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the
vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill
slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and
ready to brake.
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Miscellaneous
Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
engine speed is too low/high.
one or more wheels lose traction.
brake temperature is high.
the parking brake is applied.
the camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/
radio waves are blocked).
}}
* Option/accessory. 281
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system does
not detect a vehicle ahead.
•
The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
•
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a
lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
Change between cruise control
and adaptive cruise control*47 in
the centre display
•
GREEN button indication – adaptive
cruise control is deactivated and normal
cruise control is set in standby mode.
•
GREY button indication – normal cruise
control is deactivated and adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode.
Cruise control
(CC)
45
46
47
48
282
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Cruise control (p. 273)
A symbol in the driver display shows which
cruise control is active:
Related information
•
•
•
•
When the normal cruise control (CC48) is
selected in the driver display, it is possible to
change to adaptive cruise control (ACC49) in
the centre display's function view.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
A
A
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby
mode
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Cruise Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
adaptive cruise control*50
A number of symbols and messages regarding the Adaptive cruise control (ACC51) can
be shown in the driver display.
In the following illustrative example, the road
sign information* (RSI52) function informs the
driver that the maximum permitted speed is
130 km/h (80 mph).
The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same
speed.
49
50
51
52
Adaptive Cruise Control
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Road Sign Information
}}
* Option/accessory. 283
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
The symbol is WHITE.
The car is maintaining the stored speed.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive Cruise Contr.
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The symbol is GREY.
Windscreen sensor
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
284
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Pilot Assist*53
Pilot Assist can help the driver to drive the
car between the lane's side markings using
steering assistance as well as to maintain an
even speed, combined with a preselected
time interval to the vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended
for use on motorways and similar major roads
where it can contribute to more comfortable
driving and a more relaxed driving experience.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to
the vehicle ahead and detects side markings.
The driver selects the desired speed and a
time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist
scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and
the lane's side markings on the road surface
using the camera and radar unit. The preset
time interval is maintained with automatic
speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and
the lane markings. The driver can at any time
ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to
change lane or avoid an obstruction on the
road.
WARNING
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without
prior warning.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit
does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot
Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again - although the speed and distance control functions remain active. The
steering wheel vibrates slightly when deactivated temporarily in order to alert the driver to
the change.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
53
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 285
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to
emit a low sound when they are being used to
adjust the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden
braking the driver must brake himself/herself.
This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due
286
to the limitations of the camera and radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the
driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle
in front then the car will instead maintain the
speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Round bends and when the road splits
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who
should therefore not wait for the steering
assistance from Pilot Assist but should always
be prepared to increase his/her own steering
input, especially in bends.
•
When the car approaches an exit or if the
lane splits, the driver should steer towards
the desired lane in order to specify the
desired direction to Pilot Assist.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to
position the car in between the lane markings
and therefore it is recommended to let the car
find a good placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver
checks that the car is positioned safely in the
lane, and always has the ability to adjust the
position by making his/her own steering corrections.
•
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in
an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch
to adaptive cruise control*.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel.
If Pilot Assist detects that the
driver is not holding the
steering wheel, the driver is
prompted after a pause to
actively steer the car, via a
symbol and a text message.
If the driver's hands still cannot be detected
on the steering wheel after a few seconds, the
prompt to actively steer the car is repeated,
supplemented by an acoustic warning signal.
If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands
on the steering wheel after a further few seconds, the warning signal becomes intensive
and the steering function is deactivated. Pilot
Assist must then be restarted using the steer.
ing wheel button
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 288)
•
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 291)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 293)
•
Set the stored speed for driver support
(p. 296)
•
•
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 297)
Controls and display view for Pilot Assist*
(p. 287)
A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled
using the left-hand keypad on the steering
wheel and how the function is shown in the
display.
Controls
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 294)
•
Automatic braking with driver support
(p. 298)
Overtaking Assistance (p. 300)
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles
ahead
Reduces the time interval to vehicles
ahead
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
Function symbol
Change of target with driver support
(p. 295)
•
•
Controls and display view for Pilot
Assist*54
Symbols for target car
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
Buttons and symbols for the function.
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control*
to Pilot Assist
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
54
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 287
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Driver display
Selecting and activating Pilot
Assist*55
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed
must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
Pilot Assist must first be selected and then
activated to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance.
1.
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol
for Pilot Assist
(4).
> The symbol is grey – Pilot Assist is in
standby mode.
2. When Pilot Assist is selected – press the
steering wheel button
(2) to activate.
> The symbol is white – Pilot Assist is
started and the current speed is stored
as maximum speed.
Indication of speeds.
Reactivating Pilot Assist to last stored
speed
Stored speed
–
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car
Related information
•
55
288
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required
that:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of
the car, or the current speed must be at
least 15 km/h (9 mph).
When Pilot Assist is selected – press the
to activate.
steering wheel button
> The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour
from GREY to WHITE — the car will
now follow the most recently stored
speed again.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Deactivate Pilot Assist*56
NOTE
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched
off.
Additional indicators in the driver
display
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance
symbol shows a vehicle (1)
above the steering wheel
symbol.
Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active
when the steering wheel symbol (2) has
changed from GREY to GREEN.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored speed, and the lower
speed is that of the vehicle
ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
•
•
56
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 289)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 291)
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode
and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the
short distance by the distance warning* function instead.
Related information
•
•
1.
(2).
Press the steering wheel button
> The symbol and indicators turn grey –
Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. The
indicator for time interval and symbol
for target vehicle, if activated, are also
switched off.
2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator for Pilot Assist (4) are switched off
– which deletes the stored maximum
speed.
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Selecting and activating adaptive cruise
control* (p. 278)
•
Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* in the centre display
(p. 282)
•
Limitations for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 281)
•
Temporary disabling of steering assistance
with Pilot Assist* (p. 291)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
* Option/accessory. 289
DRIVER SUPPORT
Standby mode for Pilot Assist*57
WARNING
Pilot Assist can be deactivated and set in
standby mode. This can take place due to
driver intervention or automatically.
Standby mode means that the function is
selected in the driver display but not activated.
In this case, Pilot Assist does not regulate the
speed or distance to the vehicle in front, or
provide steering assistance.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is deactivated and set in standby
mode if any of the following occurs:
•
•
•
The foot brake is used.
The gear selector is moved to N position.
The direction indicators are used for
longer than 1 minute.
•
The driver maintains a speed higher than
the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
•
The clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with
manual gearbox.
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display.
•
Automatic standby mode may occur if, for
example:
•
•
•
the driver opens the door.
•
•
•
•
•
the parking brake is applied.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an
object, such as a speed bump.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems,
e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC58. If any of
these other systems stops working, Pilot
Assist is deactivated automatically.
57
58
290
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
brake temperature is high.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and
the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 288)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 289)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 291)
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
engine speed is too low/high.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
one or more wheels lose traction.
the camera and radar unit is covered by
e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/
radio waves are blocked).
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Electronic Stability Control
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Temporary disabling of steering
assistance with Pilot Assist*59
Pilot Assist steering assistance can be temporarily disabled and resumed without prior
warning.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case,
steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be
detected.
Limitations of Pilot Assist*60
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations
in certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can
help the driver in many situations. But the
driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and
a correct position in the lane.
If Pilot Assist is unable to interpret the lane
clearly, e.g. if the camera or radar unit is
unable to see the side markings for the lane,
Pilot Assist temporarily disables steering
assistance – speed and distance regulation
functions remain active. Steering assistance is
resumed when the lane can be interpreted
again. In these situations, slight vibration in
the steering wheel may alert the driver to the
fact that steering assistance has been deactivated temporarily.
Related information
•
•
•
•
59
60
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the
use of Pilot Assist is not recommended.
Examples of such situations may be that:
•
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
•
lane division is unclear, for example,
when the lanes divide or merge or at
exits or in the event of multiple sets of
markings.
•
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges
or strong shadows.
•
•
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Selecting and activating Pilot Assist*
(p. 288)
Deactivate Pilot Assist* (p. 289)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 291)
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
}}
* Option/accessory. 291
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc.
•
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
•
•
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic
environments, e.g. potholes, stationary
obstacles or objects which completely
or partially block the route.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
The recommended steering input is
force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and
keep the car within the lane.
•
292
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly
as lane markings, with a subsequent
risk of contact between the car and
such obstacles. The driver must ensure
him/herself that the car is at a suitable
distance from such obstacles.
In cars equipped with Sensus
Navigation*, the function has the
option of using information from map
data, which may result in varied performance.
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering for speed related steering
force is working with reduced power –
e.g. during cooling due to overheating.
WARNING
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of the
lane. All other use involves increased risk of
contact with surrounding obstacles that
cannot be detected by the function.
WARNING
•
•
•
This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible
and must intervene if the system does
not detect a vehicle ahead.
The function does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the function in demanding
situations, such as in city traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a
lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road
surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes in which case, be extra attentive and ready to
brake.
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Miscellaneous
Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 258)
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*61
A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver
display.
In the following illustrative example, the road
sign information (RSI62) function informs the
driver that the maximum permitted speed is
130 km/h (80 mph).
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and at the same time is following a vehicle
ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance
since the lane's side markings cannot be
detected.
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance
since the lane's side markings cannot be
detected.
61
62
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
Road Sign Information
}}
* Option/accessory. 293
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the
lane markings can be detected.
Related information
•
•
Warning from driver support in the
event of a collision risk
The driver support systems of adaptive cruise
control* and Pilot Assist* can warn the driver
if the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly
becomes too short.
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 291)
The previous illustration shows that Pilot
Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph)
and at the same time is following a vehicle
ahead which is keeping the same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
Audio and symbol for collision warning.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a
risk of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera
and radar unit
Adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist use
approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than the driver support is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
294
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
acoustic warning are activated to alert the
driver that immediate intervention is required.
WARNING
The driver support systems only warn of
vehicles which their radar unit has detected
– hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay. Never
wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when
the situation requires.
Change of target with driver
support
The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist*, in combination with
automatic transmission, have a change of target function at certain speeds.
Change of target
•
Related information
•
•
•
WARNING
When the driver supports are following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target
is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the driver supports will
ignore the stationary vehicle and instead
accelerate to the stored speed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The driver supports are disengaged and set in
standby mode:
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h
((3 mph)) and the driver supports are
uncertain whether the target object is a
stationary vehicle or another object, such
as a speed bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h
((3 mph)) and the vehicle ahead turns off
so that the driver supports no longer have
a vehicle to follow.
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When the driver supports are following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and changes target vehicle – from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle – the
driver supports will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
* Option/accessory. 295
DRIVER SUPPORT
Set the stored speed for driver
support
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
It is possible to set stored speed for the
speed limiter, cruise control, adaptive cruise
control* and Pilot Assist* functions.
If the driver increases the car's speed using
the accelerator pedal before pressing the
steering wheel button
(1), the speed
stored will be the car's speed when the button
is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on
the accelerator pedal at the moment when the
button is depressed.
The lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h
(20 mph) – the maximum speed is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the setting - the car returns to the last
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
: Increases the stored speed.
: Reduces stored speed.
Stored speed.
–
Change a set speed with short presses on
(1) or
the steering wheel buttons
(2) or by pressing and holding them.
•
•
296
Short presses: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button
when the speed indicator (3) has
moved to the desired speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Cruise control (p. 273)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Automatic gearbox
The driver support functions can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed is
30 km/h (20 mph) – even though it is capable
of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a
speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot
be selected/stored.
Manual gearbox
the driver support functions can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Set time interval to vehicle ahead
NOTE
It is possible to set the time interval to the
vehicle ahead to be maintained by the adaptive cruise control*, Pilot Assist* and Distance
Warning* functions.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents
about 3 seconds.
When the symbol in the driver display
shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no
vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
NOTE
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display
shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot
Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset
time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown,
there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the
vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At
low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
•
The higher the speed the longer the
calculated distance in metres for a
given time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted
by local traffic regulations.
•
If the driver supports do not seem to
respond with a speed increase when
activated, it may be because the time
window to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the set time window.
Control for time interval.
WARNING
Decrease time interval
–
Increase time interval
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
Distance indicator
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action in an
unexpected traffic situation.
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2)
to increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the
current time interval.
}}
* Option/accessory. 297
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Automatic braking with driver
support
WARNING
The driver supports of adaptive cruise control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake
function in slow traffic and while stationary.
•
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before
the vehicle in front starts moving again then
the driver support function is set in standby
mode with automatic braking.
–
The function is reactivated in one of the
following ways:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button
Driver supports only warn of obstacles
which their radar unit has detected –
hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay.
.
Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
NOTE
The driver supports can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 10 minutes –
then the parking brake is applied and the
function is disengaged.
Before the driver supports can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The function resumes following the
vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within approx. 6 seconds.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
298
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases
on coming to a standstill and the function is
set in standby mode. This means that the
brakes are released and the car may start to
roll - the driver must therefore intervene and
brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the function in the standby
mode.
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R
position
Related information
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Brake functions (p. 391)
Drive mode for driver support
The driver can select different driving styles
for how driver support should maintain the
preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
Select one of the following options:
• Eco – The driver support focuses on good
fuel economy, which means longer time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
• Comfort – The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible.
• Dynamic* – The driver support focuses on
following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain
cases may mean heavier acceleration and
braking.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is
applied in order to keep the car stationary.
Related information
This takes place if the function is holding the
car stationary with the foot brake and:
•
•
•
•
the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
•
the function has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 10 minutes
•
•
the brakes have overheated
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Set time interval to vehicle ahead (p. 297)
the driver switches the engine off manually.
* Option/accessory. 299
DRIVER SUPPORT
Overtaking Assistance
WARNING
Overtaking Assistance can help the driver
when overtaking other vehicles. The function
can be used with adaptive cruise control* or
Pilot Assist*.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
How overtaking assistance works
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is
following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating
the direction indicator63, the systems help by
accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle
ahead before the driver's vehicle reaches the
overtaking lane.
•
The function then delays reducing speed in
order to avoid premature braking when the
driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s
vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is
used to indicate a change of lane or exit to
another road – the car will then accelerate
briefly.
63
300
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Use Overtaking Assistance
Overtaking assistance can be used with
adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist*. There
are a number of criteria if Overtaking Assistance is to be used.
The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is
at least 70 km/h (43 mph)
•
the stored speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
–
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left-hand direction indicator in a
left-hand drive car right in a right-hand
drive car.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Use Overtaking Assistance (p. 300)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance
System, the driver should be aware that
there may be undesired acceleration if the
conditions suddenly change.
Radar unit
Related information
The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing
other vehicles.
•
•
Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if:
•
the car is approaching an exit for turnof that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before
the driver's car has crossed over into
the overtaking lane.
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down.
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a
county with left-hand traffic (or vice
versa).
Situations of this type are avoided by temporarily setting adaptive cruise control or Pilot
Assist to standby mode.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Overtaking Assistance (p. 300)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
•
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 315)
•
Type approval for radar device (p. 302)
Radar unit location.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
Standby mode for adaptive cruise control*
(p. 280)
Standby mode for Pilot Assist* (p. 290)
* Option/accessory. 301
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radar device
Here you can find type approval for the car's
radar units for adaptive cruise control*
(ACC64), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*65.
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
✓
Botswana
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
Brazil
EAN: (01)07897843840855
✓
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode
causar interferência em sistemas devidamente autorizados.
03563-17-05364
64
65
302
Adaptive Cruise Control
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following
link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
✓
Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
Europe
Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co., declares that RS4 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
✓
The Declaration of conformity may be consulted at Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker
Straße 75/ 59552 Lippstadt, Germany and on the website www.hella.com/vcc.
Frequency Band: 24050-24250 MHz
Maximum Output Power: 20 dBm EIRP
The United
Arab Emirates
(UAE)
Ghana
Registered No: ER37536/15
✓
Dealer No: DA37380/15
✓
✓
Registered No: ER53878/17
Dealer No: DA44932/15
NCA Approved: 1R3-1M-7E1-0B7
}}
303
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
37295/POSTEL/2014
✓
4927
Certificate number: 50459/SDPPI/2017
Indonesia
Country of origin Germany
✓
Certificate number: 53578/SDPPI/2017
Country of origin China
PLG ID: 6051
✓
Jamaica
✓
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
✓
✓
Malaysia
This product contains a Type Approved Module by Jamaica: SMA – “RS4”.
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
CID F 15000578
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Morocco
✓
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
304
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
✓
Symbol
Type approval
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
Radar de corto alcance
RS4
Hella KGaA Hueck & Co
Mexico
✓
IFETEL: RLVHERS17-0286
La operación de este equipo esta sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que
este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo
debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no
deseada.
Moldova
✓
✓
Nigeria
✓
Oman
✓
Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian
Communications Commission.
}}
305
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
✓
Serbia
И011 14
✓
✓
Singapore
И011 17
DA 105753
✓
✓
306
Type approval
✓
Russia
South Africa
Symbol
DA 103238
TA-2014/1824
✓
TA-2016/3407
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
Certification No.
✓
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
South Korea
MSIP-CMM-HLA-RS4
✓
✓
이 기기는 무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판 매자 또는 사용 자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바 라
며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용 하는 것을 적으 로 합니다
CCAB15LP0560T3
CCAB17LP0470T5
Taiwan
✓
警語 經型式認證合格之低 率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率
大 率或變更原設計之特性及 能 低 率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法
通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應立即停用 ,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 前項合法通信,指依
電信法規定作業之無線電通信 低 率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻
射性電機設備之干擾
}}
307
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
ACC
& PA
BLIS
Symbol
Type approval
є, щ
Delphi
(
✓
ь
)
ь
є
RACAM/SRR2
КМ № 679
24
Delphi
: Delphi.
(П
П
2009 .)
: 24,05 – 24,25
П
Ukraine
✓
ь
: 20 Б (
.) EIRP
HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA
є, щ
є
2014/53/Є . П
www.hella.com/vcc
RS4
ь
: 24,05 – 24,25
П
308
Vietnam
✓
Zambia
✓
ь
: 20 Б (
.) EIRP
:
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval for radio equipment
Market
Symbol
Europe
Type approval
Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU.
R 204-750001
Japan
This device is granted pursuant to the Japanese Radio Law and the Japanese Telecommunications Business Law. This
device should not be modified (otherwise the granted designation number will become invalid).
For detailed information on type approval, go
to support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Radar unit (p. 301)
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 276)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
BLIS* (p. 330)
* Option/accessory. 309
DRIVER SUPPORT
Camera unit
Related information
The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 315)
Location of the camera unit.
The camera unit is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
310
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance*
Steering assistance at risk of collision
City Safety
Driver Alert Control*
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
Park Assist*
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for camera and radar
unit
The camera and radar unit has certain limitations – which in turn also limit those functions that use the unit. A driver should be
aware about the following examples of limitations.
Camera and radar
Blocked unit
The camera unit is placed inside the upper
section of the windscreen together with the
car's radar unit.
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
inside or outside of the windscreen, in front of
or around the camera and radar unit – this
may interfere with camera and radar-based
functions. This may result functions being
reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses.
If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that
the camera and radar unit cannot detect other
vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the car, and that the car's
camera-based and radar-based functions may
be disrupted.
The marked area must be cleaned regularly and kept
free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown,
along with the appropriate action:
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is
dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the
camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
}}
311
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cause
Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the
camera and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light
No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and
radar unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when
the temperature has fallen sufficiently.
The following is also applicable so as not to
risk incorrect function for the driver supports
that use the radar unit:
•
Damaged windscreen
NOTE
If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems
that use the camera and radar unit. This
may result functions being reduced, being
switched off completely or giving incorrect
function responses.
66
312
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If a scratch, crack or stone chip appears
on the windscreen in front of any of the
"windows" for the camera and radar unit
and covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
more, a workshop66 must be contacted so
that the windscreen can be replaced.
•
Volvo recommends not repairing cracks,
scratches or stone chips in the area in
front of the camera and radar unit – the
entire windscreen should be replaced
instead.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact a
workshop66 to verify that the correct
windscreen has been ordered and will be
fitted.
•
The same type of windscreen wipers or
windscreen wipers approved by Volvo
must be fitted when the windscreen is
replaced.
•
When replacing the windscreen, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated by
a workshop66 to ensure the functionality
of all the camera and radar-based systems
in the car.
Radar
Vehicle speed
The radar unit's ability to detect a vehicle
ahead is greatly reduced if the speed of the
vehicle ahead is very different to the speed of
your own car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
vehicle that drives in between your car and
the vehicle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
Low trailers
dust storms and snow flurries. Under such
conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or
temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
can also significantly reduce camera function
when it is used to scan the carriageway to
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and
other vehicles.
Low trailer in radar shadow.
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar
unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the
driver should therefore be particularly careful
when driving behind low trailers when the
adaptive cruise control* or Pilot Assist* is activated.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a
Camera
Impaired vision
The cameras have limitations similar to the
human eye, i.e. may "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy
}}
* Option/accessory. 313
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Park assist camera*
Blind sectors
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black
and contains this symbol
then it means that the camera is out of order.
brightness and quality. Poor light conditions
can result in reduced image quality.
Rear parking camera
WARNING
The following illustration
shows an example.
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward
are switched off and will not warn of any
obstacles.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields
of vision.
In the park assist camera's 360° view* obstacles/objects may "vanish" in the gaps
between the individual cameras.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if
it only looks like a relatively small part of
the image is obscured, a relatively large
sector could be hidden from view. An
obstacle could thereby go undetected until
the car is very close to it.
NOTE
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera:
•
•
•
open door
open tailgate
Related information
•
•
•
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly in
314
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
•
Camera unit (p. 310)
Radar unit (p. 301)
Recommended maintenance for camera
and radar unit (p. 315)
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Recommended maintenance for
camera and radar unit
Related information
•
•
•
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, they must be kept clear of
dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly
with water and car shampoo.
•
NOTE
Camera unit (p. 310)
Radar unit (p. 301)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may cause incorrect warning signals,
reduced or no function.
Location of rear radar units. Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of
the car.
Location of the parking sensors.
•
To ensure best possible functionality, the
surfaces in front of the sensors must be
kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
•
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful
not to scratch the lenses.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory. 315
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™
Safety67
City
can use lights, sound and a
brake pulse warning to alert the driver to
pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that appear suddenly.
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent
risk of collision if the driver does not react in
time by braking and/or swerving.
WARNING
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking
procedure, normally stopping the car just
behind the vehicle in front.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late
as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention. Automatic braking takes place
only after or at the same time as the collision
warning.
Location of the radar unit.
City Safety can help to prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined
with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
67
316
The function is not available in all markets.
The driver or passengers are not normally
aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a
situation where a collision is immediately
imminent.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Subfunctions for City Safety (p. 317)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 319)
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 320)
•
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 324)
•
Automatic braking in the event of an impeded evasive manoeuvre with City Safety
(p. 324)
•
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 322)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Messages for City Safety (p. 328)
Subfunctions for City Safety
City
can help the driver to avoid a
collision with a vehicle, a cyclist, a pedestrian
or a larger animal in front by reducing the
car's speed with the auto-brake function.
If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety autobrake function cannot prevent a collision but
mitigates the consequences of it.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce
the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed
by up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed
by up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed
by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact
at higher speeds and is most effective at
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less
effective at lower speed.
68
The function is not available in all markets.
Subfunctions for City Safety
Safety68
Function overview.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a
risk of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision
Distance measurement with the camera
and radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the following order:
1.
Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
The following text explains what happens during the three steps:
}}
317
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the
same direction as the car and are ahead. City
Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or
large animals that are crossing the road in
front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle/vehicles
the driver's attention is alerted by means of a
visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning.
There is no brake pulse warning at lower
speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking
is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started
to take evasive action and the risk of collision
is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective
318
of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking
then takes place with full brake force in order
to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake
force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
The seatbelt tensioner can be activated in connection with the engagement of the automatic
brake function.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake
may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision
with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the
driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is
reduced to match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has
stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
WARNING
City Safety must not be used by the driver
to change his/her driving style - the driver
must not rely on City Safety alone and
allow it to do the braking.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 316)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 322)
City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles
(p. 324)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Setting the warning distance for
City Safety
City Safety69 is always activated but the
driver can select the warning distance for the
function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when
the engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off.
When warnings are perceived as being too
frequent or disturbing, the warning distance
can be reduced, which reduces the total number of warnings and instead leads to City
Safety giving a warning at a later stage.
The Late warning distance should therefore
only be used in exceptional cases, as in
dynamic driving.
WARNING
•
No automatic system can guarantee
100% correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by
driving at people, animals or vehicles this may cause severe damage and
injury and risk lives.
•
City Safety warns the driver when
there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the driver’s reaction time.
•
Even if the warning distance has been
set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead
suddenly brake heavily.
•
With the warning distance set at Early,
the warnings will come more in
advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the
warning distance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City
Safety more effective.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed.
To select warning distance:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance.
If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected.
69
The function is not available in all markets.
}}
319
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for
Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if
the warning distance for collision warning
in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 329)
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
Cyclists
City Safety70 can help the driver to detect
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detect most vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the
driver's own car. This function can also detect
oncoming vehicles and cross traffic in certain
cases.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect
a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and
rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist
— with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body
and bicycle outline, requiring the ability to
identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders,
legs, upper and lower body plus a normal
human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle
are not visible to the function's camera then
the system cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
70
320
The function is not available in all markets.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all
situations and, for example, cannot see:
•
•
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists if the background contrast of
the cyclist is poor – warning and brake
interventions may then be late or not
occur at all.
•
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
Pedestrians
Examples of what the system regards as pedestrians
with clear body outlines.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a pedestrian must
receive the clearest possible information about
the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of
movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian
may either be detected late or not at all, which
may mean that warnings and braking are late
or omitted.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in
all situations and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people
in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm
(32 in.).
•
pedestrians if the background contrast
of the pedestrians is poor - warning
and brake interventions may then be
late or not occur at all.
•
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
}}
321
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Large animals
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals
in all situations and, for example, cannot
see:
Examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear
body outline.
Good performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk
and horse) must receive the clearest possible
information about the body outline, requiring
the ability to identify the animal directly from
the side in combination with what is a normal
pattern of movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to
the function's camera then the system cannot
detect the animal.
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps.
71
322
The function is not available in all markets.
•
•
partially obscured large animals.
•
•
large animals that run or move quickly.
•
small animals such as dogs and cats,
for example.
City Safety71 can help the driver when turning
and crossing the path of another oncoming
vehicle at an intersection.
larger animals seen from the front or
from behind.
large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning
and brake interventions may then be
late or not occur at all.
The driver is always responsible that the
vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety
distance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
•
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Sector in which City Safety can detect
oncoming crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle
on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle
must first enter the sector in which City Safety
can analyse the situation.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The following further criteria must also be fulfilled:
•
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
your car must turn to the left in markets
with right-hand traffic (or to the right in
left-hand traffic)
•
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due
to oncoming cross traffic.
Related information
•
•
•
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on.
Related information
•
•
NOTE
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 322)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Examples are:
•
stability control ESC intervenes in the
event of slippery driving conditions
•
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too
late
•
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by
something
•
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
•
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
323
DRIVER SUPPORT
Automatic braking in the event of
an impeded evasive manoeuvre
with City Safety
City Safety72 has the facility to assist the
driver by automatically braking the car earlier
when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
only steering away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or
stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/
herself has the opportunity to avoid a collision
via a steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an
evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist
the driver by automatically starting to brake at
an earlier stage.
City Safety brakes for oncoming
vehicles
City Safety can assist the driver to use emergency braking for an oncoming vehicle in
your car's lane.
If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane
and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can
reduce the car's speed with a view to reducing
the violence of the impact.
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
Your car
Oncoming vehicles
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
72
324
The function is not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
For this function to work, the following criteria
must be met:
•
your car must be travelling at more than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
•
the road section must be straight
•
your car must be positioned straight in its
own lane
•
the oncoming vehicle must be within your
car's lane markings
•
the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on
•
this function can only handle "front to
front" collisions
•
this function can only detect vehicles with
four wheels.
your car's lane must have clear lane markings
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions due to
an impending collision with an oncoming
vehicle always come very late.
Related information
•
•
73
74
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 325)
The function is not available in all markets.
Electronic Stability Control
Limitations of City Safety
Safety73
The City
function may have limitations in certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance
is extended, which may reduce the capacity of
City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability
control ESC74 are designed to give the best
possible braking force with maintained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen
may be difficult to notice in the event of strong
sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are
being worn or if the driver is not looking
straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight,
the visual warning signal in the windscreen
may be temporarily disengaged.
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and
vehicles in some situations cannot be
detected, or they are detected later than
anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be
detected late or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed,
City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road
lines ahead of the car. This means that the
functionality of City Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take
care to keep the area of windscreen in front of
the camera and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of driver support components
must only be performed at a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
325
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds
- below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system
therefore does not intervene in situations
where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead
very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety does not intervene or
postpone warning/intervention in situations
where the driver is steering and accelerating in
a decisive manner, even if a collision is
unavoidable.
Miscellaneous
WARNING
WARNING
•
Warnings and brake interventions
could be implemented late or not at all
if a traffic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar
unit cannot detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly.
•
For vehicles to be detected at night,
their headlamps and rear lamp cluster
must be switched on and shining
clearly.
•
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds
up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15
km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at
vehicle speeds above 70 km/h
(43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds.
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles and large animals could be
Driver supports only warn of obstacles
which their radar unit has detected –
hence a warning may not be given, or it
may be given with a certain delay.
•
Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires.
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention
in order to minimise unnecessary warnings.
326
DRIVER SUPPORT
disengaged due to darkness or poor
visibility.
•
•
•
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
Do not place, stick or mount anything
on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera
and radar unit — this can interfere with
camera-dependent functions.
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give
incorrect function response.
WARNING
•
The City Safety auto-brake function
can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake
performance the driver should always
depress the brake pedal – even when
the car auto-brakes.
•
The warning is only activated if there is
a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for a collision
warning.
•
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
•
City Safety does not activates any
auto-brake functions in the event of
heavy acceleration.
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
•
Settings
My Car
IntelliSafe
Related information
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If
City Safety does not appear in the centre display's Settings menu, the car is not equipped
with this function.
327
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display. Here are
some examples.
Message
Specification
City Safety
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be
illuminated in connection with a text message being shown.
Automatic intervention
City Safety
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Reduced functionality Service
required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
328
City Safety™ (p. 316)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Rear Collision Warning*75
WARNING
Warning76
The Rear Collision
(RCW) function
can help the driver to avoid being hit by a
vehicle approaching from behind.
Drivers in vehicles behind can be warned
about an imminent collision by the function
flashing intensively with the direction indicators.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the
function detects that the car is in danger of
being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners
may tension the front seatbelts. The Whiplash
Protection System is also activated in the
event of a collision.
•
Rear collision warning.
The function is not available in all markets.
Rear collision warning.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
In certain cases the Rear Collision Warning
(RCW) may have difficulty helping the driver
in the event of a collision risk.
This can, for example, be if:
•
the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
•
the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
•
a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system - the
function is then deactivated automatically.
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due
to local traffic regulations - in such cases,
this part of the function is deactivated.
Related information
•
•
75
76
77
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
Immediately before a collision from behind,
this function may also activate the foot brake
in order to reduce the forward acceleration of
the car during the collision. However, the foot
brake is only activated if the car is stationary.
The foot brake releases immediately if the
accelerator pedal is depressed.
This function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
•
Limitations of Rear Collision
Warning*77
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning*
(p. 329)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
}}
* Option/accessory. 329
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for
Rear Collision Warning* is deactivated if
the warning distance for collision warning
in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late".
BLIS*
The BLIS78 function is intended to help the
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and
to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several
lanes in the same direction.
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
NOTE
Principle of BLIS
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The system is designed to react when:
Related information
•
•
•
78
330
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 329)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety (p. 319)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Location of BLIS lamp.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning
of:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left
and right lanes closest to the car.
•
•
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching
your car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the
indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If
the driver activates the direction indicator on
the same side as the warning, the indicator
lamp will change over from a constant glow to
flashing with a more intense light.
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS is active when the driver's vehicle is travelling at a speed above 10 km/h (6 mph).
WARNING
If passing vehicles drive more than 15 km/h
(9 mph) faster than the driver's vehicle, BLIS
will not react.
NOTE
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
79
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating BLIS
The BLIS79 function can be activated or deactivated.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine,
the function is confirmed by the door mirror
indicator lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
•
•
BLIS* (p. 330)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 332)
Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 331)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 332)
Messages for BLIS (p. 333)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 331
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of BLIS
WARNING
The BLIS80 function may have limitations in
certain situations.
•
•
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left
and right-hand sides of the car81.
•
•
BLIS* (p. 330)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Examples of limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate
alerts.
•
The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is
connected to the car's electrical system.
•
For good performance of BLIS, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier
or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
80
81
332
Blind Spot Information
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS82 can
be shown in the driver display. Here are some
examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLIS and CTAB have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Cross Traffic Alert*
A text message can be cleared by briefly
button, located in the centre
pressing the
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
82
BLIS* (p. 330)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 334)
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 333
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cross Traffic Alert*83
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver support
that supplements BLIS84 and is designed to
help the driver detect traffic crossing behind
the car when it is reversing.
The auto-brake subfunction can help the
driver to stop the car in the event of a risk of
collision with an unobserved vehicle.
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or
if reverse gear has been selected.
If CTA senses that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
•
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in
the left-hand or right-hand speaker
according to the direction from which the
object approaches.
•
an illuminated icon in the Park Assist
System graphic on the screen.
•
an icon on the Park assist camera top
view.
Examples of areas where CTA can assist the driver to
detect obstacles during reversing.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking
space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
83
84
334
Illuminated icon for CTA in the Park Assist
System graphic on the screen.
If the driver does not observe the warning
from CTA and a collision is unavoidable, the
auto-brake function takes effect to stop the
car, after which the driver display shows an
explanatory text message on why the car was
braked.
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Blind Spot Information
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic
Alert* (p. 335)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 337)
BLIS* (p. 330)
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Activating or deactivating Cross
Traffic Alert*85
The driver can select to switch off the warning in the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function –
the auto brake subfunction cannot be
switched off, however, and continues to be
active.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – warning signal
and indication on display for the function
is deactivated.
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert*86
The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with
auto-brake may have limited functionality in
certain situations. Brake intervention is active
at speeds below 15 km/h.
WARNING
The auto-brake subfunction can only
detect and brake for other vehicles that are
moving – not for stationary obstacles, a
cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
CTA has a certain limitation – the CTA sensors
cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or
obstructions, for example.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
The function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
Related information
•
•
85
86
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 334)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335)
}}
* Option/accessory. 335
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
object changes and the blind sector rapidly
decreases.
Examples of further limitations
• The auto-brake subfunction only detects
moving vehicles and therefore cannot
"see" and brake for stationary obstacles, a
cyclist or a pedestrian, for example.
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may reduce the functions and deactivate
alerts.
•
CTA is automatically deactivated if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
to the car's electrical system.
•
For good performance of CTA, there
should be no bicycle rack, luggage carrier
or similar mounted on the car's towbar.
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely
“blind” on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
•
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 334)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the
angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/
336
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert*87
A number of messages regarding Cross
Traffic Alert (CTA) can be shown in the driver
display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Blind spot sensor
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Service required
Blind spot system off
BLISB and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
Trailer attached
A
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind Spot Information System
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
•
87
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 334)
BLIS* (p. 330)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 335)
Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing.
* Option/accessory. 337
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information*
(RSI88)
The Road Sign Information function
can help the driver to observe speed-related
road signs and certain prohibition signs.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
WARNING
•
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Examples of readable signs89.
RSI can provide information about such things
as current speed, when a motorway or road is
starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited
or when the direction of travel is one-way.
If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be
shown on the driver display.
88
89
338
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating road sign information* (p. 339)
•
Display mode for road sign information*
(p. 339)
•
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation* (p. 342)
•
Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information*
(p. 342)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 344)
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating road
sign information*
NOTE
The Road Sign Information function (RSI90) is
optional – the driver can choose to activate or
deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Road Sign Information is activated automatically each time the engine is started.
•
If the automatic speed limiter function
is activated, road sign information is
shown in the driver display even if the
Road Sign Information function is not
activated.
•
To remove road sign information from
the driver display, you must deactivate
both the automatic speed limiter and
Road Sign Information.
•
When the automatic speed limiter
function is activated but Road Sign
Information is deactivated, no warnings are given from Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information must
also be activated in order to receive
warnings.
Related information
•
•
•
90
91
92
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Automatic speed limiter (p. 269)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 344)
RSI: Road Sign Information.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
Display mode for road sign
information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI91)
shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation.
Example92 of detected speed information.
When the function detects a road sign with an
imposed speed limit, the driver display shows
the sign as a symbol combined with a coloured indication on the speedometer.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed-related information is also obtained
from map data, which means that the driver
display can show or change information on
the speed limit without having passed a
speed-related sign.
}}
* Option/accessory. 339
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
An additional92 sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be
shown together with the
speed limit symbol.
– indirect speed limit signs are only displayed
if map data has no information on the speed
limit for the road section in question.
Example of direct speed limit
sign92.
Example of indirect speed limit sign92:
End of all restrictions.
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign
at the roadside, the symbol
for this sign92 flashes on and
off on the driver display as a
warning.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes until the next speed-related
sign is passed.
End of motorway.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
information from map data is used to determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning
when driving towards a road marked with a
no-entry sign if the Road Sign Audio
Warning function is activated.
Speed limit or end of motorway
When the function detects an "indirect speed
limit sign" stating the end of the current speed
limit – e.g. at the end of a motorway – a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign
in the driver's display.
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*,
speed limit signs are shown in the driver display when map data contains information on
the speed limit for the road section in question, even if no direct sign has been passed. If
there is no information in map data, the sign
goes off after approx. 3 minutes after the last
passing of a speed limit sign.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
direct speed limit signs are normally displayed
92
340
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs92.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed
for the same road - an additional sign then
indicates the circumstances under which the
different speeds apply. The road section may
be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain
and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical
system and you pass a speed sign with the
additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed
will appear on the driver display.
92
93
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this
fact by means of a symbol for
an additional sign below the
speed symbol. The additional
symbol in the driver display will show either
“DIST” or “TIME”.
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 344)
A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's
speed symbol92 means that
the function has detected an
additional sign with supplementary information for the
current speed limit.
Sign for "School" and "Children at
play"
If a warning sign92 for
"School" or "Children at play"
is included in the satellite
navigator's map data93, the
driver display shows a sign of
this type.
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*.
* Option/accessory. 341
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation*
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual
carriageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no
new sign has been detected.
Warning for speed limitation and
speed camera from road sign
information*
A speed warning is always given if the speed
limit is exceeded in connection with speed
camera information.
Road sign information (RSI94) includes subfunctions that can warn the driver if a speed
limit has been exceeded or in connection with
speed cameras.
Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when
the applicable speed limit or a preselected
"top speed" is exceeded – this warning is
repeated once after approx. 30 seconds
within the same speed limit area unless the
driver reduces the speed.
Another warning is available only when the
driver has reduced the speed by at least
5 km/h (3 mph) and then exceeds the speed
limit again, or when the car reaches a new/
different speed limit area.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for
speed-related information.
NOTE
Examples of information on speed camera and speed
limit in the driver display.
Speed Limit Warning
Related information
•
94
95
342
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
The speed warning is given
by the driver display symbol95
showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this
speed is exceeded.
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed
the required speed, the Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds
the speed indicated by the Road Sign
Information function in the driver display.
Road Sign Information
Road signs are customised for each market – the one shown here is just an example.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Warning for speed camera
A car equipped with road
sign information and Sensus
Navigation can provide information on an upcoming
speed camera in the driver
display.96
If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with
the Speed Limit Warning function activated,
a speed warning is given when the car
approaches a speed camera, provided that the
navigation map for the area in question contains information on speed cameras.
NOTE
An option is available to receive an acoustic warning for speed cameras independently of the car's speed and exceeded
speed limit, and even if the Road Sign
Audio Warning function is deactivated.
Related information
•
•
•
96
97
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Activating or deactivating warnings from
road sign information* (p. 343)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 344)
Activating or deactivating
warnings from road sign
information*
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by
pressing the up/down arrows on the
screen.
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for
Road Sign Information (RSI97) is optional –
the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this subfunction.
Note that the function does
not give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment
when the driver display
shows the speed camera
symbol.
Activating speed warning
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed
limit selector appears.
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
higher speed than the signed speed.
Select limit for speed warning as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed
limit selector appears.
Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas.
Road Sign Information
Activating acoustic warning in
connection with speed warning.
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function
activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Activate Speed camera warning
If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation* and
map data contains information on speed cam-
}}
* Option/accessory. 343
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
eras, the driver can opt to receive an audible
warning when approaching a speed camera.
Limitations of Road Sign
Information*
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
The Road Sign Information (RSI98) function
may have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the function are
as follows:
1.
Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio
Warning to activate/switch off the audible speed camera warning.
Related information
•
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Warning for speed limitation and speed
camera from road sign information*
(p. 342)
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 344)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types
of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show
incorrect speed information.
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
NOTE
Rotated or damaged signs
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt
maps99
Digital road
are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information100.
Related information
•
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 338)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.
98 Road Sign Information
99 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*.
100Map data with speed information does not
344
exist for all areas.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control
WARNING
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to help make the driver aware that
he or she is starting to drive less consistently,
e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts
to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long
as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should
be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is
often not aware of his/her own condition.
The car is being driven erratically in the lane.
If driving behaviour becomes
noticeably inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal
and the text message Time
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
•
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive
under the influence of alcohol or other
stimulants.
to take a break.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*
and has the function Rest Stop Guidance
activated, suggestions for an appropriate
place for a break are also displayed.
DAC reads the position of the car in the lane.
A camera detects the edge markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the alignment of the road with the driver’s steering
wheel movements.
The warning is repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
}}
* Option/accessory. 345
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
•
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
346
Activating or deactivating Driver
Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can
be activated or deactivated.
1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning from Driver
Alert Control
3. Select or deselect Alertness Warning to
activate or deactivate the function.
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*,
the driver can activate a guide that can automatically suggest an appropriate rest area
when Driver Alert Control (DAC) issues a
warning.
It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop
Guidance function should be activated or
deactivated.
Related information
1.
2. Select My Car
Alert Control.
•
•
IntelliSafe
Driver
Driver Alert Control (p. 345)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 347)
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Select My Car
Alert Control.
IntelliSafe
Driver
3. Select or deselect Rest Stop Guidance
to activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 345)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 347)
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating Driver Alert
Control (p. 346)
•
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 346)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
(p. 347)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
Lane assistance
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA101)
is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the
car accidentally leaving its own lane on
motorways and similar major routes.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in
the steering wheel.
•
•
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
WARNING
In some cases, driving behaviour is not
affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when
using the Pilot Assist* function – resulting
in the driver not getting a warning from
DAC.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads
with clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode.
The function becomes available again when
the road is wide enough.
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, regardless of whether the function has
given a warning.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations.
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 345)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
101 Lane
Keeping Aid
}}
* Option/accessory. 347
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
• Assist activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, the function will
actively steer the car back into its lane by
applying a slight torque to the steering
wheel.
• Warning activated: If the car is about to
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
There is also an option where both steering
assistance and warning are activated simultaneously.
NOTE
When a direction indicator/flasher is
switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from lane assistance.
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with
either steering assistance or a warning – e.g.
when using the direction indicators or cutting
bends.
Hands on the steering wheel
For steering assistance with lane assistance to
work, the driver must have his/her hands on
the steering wheel, which the system will continue to monitor.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, a warning signal is
heard and a message encourages the driver to steer the
car actively:
348
DRIVER SUPPORT
• Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
If the driver follows the prompt to start steering, the function is set in standby mode and
this message is shown:
• Lane Keeping Aid Standby until
steering applied
The function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
Activating or deactivating lane
assistance
Selecting assistance option for
lane assistance
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) function (LKA102)
is optional – the driver can choose to activate
or deactivate this function.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
The driver can select how the Lane Keeping
Aid (LKA103) should react if the car leaves its
lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe
in the centre display's top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how the function should react:
• Assist – the driver is given steering
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating lane assistance
(p. 349)
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 350)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 351)
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Related information
102 Lane
103Lane
•
•
Lane assistance (p. 347)
•
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 350)
Selecting assistance option for lane assistance (p. 349)
assistance without a warning.
• Both – the driver is given a warning
both from the steering wheel vibrating
and from steering assistance.
• Warning – the driver is only warned by
steering wheel vibration.
Related information
•
Lane assistance (p. 347)
Keeping Aid
Keeping Aid
349
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Lane assistance
Related information
In certain demanding conditions lane assistance (LKA104) may have difficulty helping the
driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side
markings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
•
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating.
The function is unable to detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the carriageway.
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
104 Lane
350
Keeping Aid
Lane assistance (p. 347)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 258)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
on the driver display. Here are some examples.
A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance (LKA105) can be shown
Symbol
Message
Specification
Driver support system
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Reduced functionality Service required
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
Lane Keeping Aid
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her
hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
Standby until steering applied
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
105 Lane
Keeping Aid
}}
351
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
A text message can be cleared by briefly
button, located in the centre
pressing the
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
•
352
Lane assistance (p. 347)
Display mode for lane assistance (p. 353)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 350)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Display mode for lane assistance
Unavailable
Lane assistance
is visualised by
symbols in the driver display depending on
the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Related information
•
•
(LKA106)
Lane assistance (p. 347)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 350)
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane
lines, the speed is too low or the road is too
narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the
symbol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is
giving a warning and/or attempting to steer
the car back into the lane.
106Lane
Keeping Aid
353
DRIVER SUPPORT
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
The function Collision avoidance assistance
can help the driver reduce the risk of the car
leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane
and/or swerving.
The function consists of these subfunctions:
•
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text
message:
Collision avoidance assistance Automatic
intervention
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Activating or deactivating steering assistance in the event of a collision risk
(p. 355)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 355)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 356)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 357)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 358)
•
Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 359)
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how
much the car should steer – the car can
never take command.
354
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Activating or deactivating steering
assistance in the event of a
collision risk
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance
assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off:
The steering assistance function is optional –
the driver can choose to activate or deactivate it.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
This function is activated automatically each
time the engine is started107.
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
•
Steering assistance at risk of road
departure
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance in the event of runoff risk can help the driver and reduce the risk
of the car accidentally leaving the road by
actively steering the car back onto the road.
The function has two activation levels on intervention:
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
•
•
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to
always have it activated since it improves
driving safety in most cases.
Steering assistance only
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Steering assistance only
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 358)
Intervention with steering assistance.
107 In
certain markets, the setting used when the engine is switched off is reactivated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 355
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Steering assistance with brake intervention
driving the car, activation of the function will
be delayed.
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
Related information
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance upon risk of headon collision can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is heading into
the opposite lane.
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 358)
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to
leave the side of the road, the car is steered
back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the
brakes are also activated.
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if
the function detects that the driver is actively
356
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Your car
At the same time as steering intervention is
activated, collision warning for driver support
is also activated. However, the brake pulse
included in the collision warning will not be
activated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the
same time, the function can help the driver to
steer the car back into its own lane.
However, the function does not intervene with
steering assistance if the direction indicator is
used. And if the function detects that the
driver is actively driving the car, activation of
the function will be delayed.
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
the driver to steer the car back into its own
lane.
Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance if there is a risk of
rear-end collision can help a distracted driver
who does not notice that the car is about to
leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle
is approaching at the same time, either from
behind or in the blind spot.
The function can even assist if the driver intentionally changes lanes using direction indicators without noticing that another vehicle is
approaching.
The lamps in the door mirrors flash during
steering intervention, regardless of whether
the BLIS108 function is activated.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
•
Warning from driver support in the event
of a collision risk (p. 294)
•
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with
clearly visible lane markings/lines.
Related information
•
•
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 358)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
BLIS* (p. 330)
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 358)
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
Your car
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent
lane at the same time, the function can help
108Blind
Spot Information
* Option/accessory. 357
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations for steering assistance
at risk of collision
In certain situations the function may have
limited functionality and fail to intervene in
the following cases, for example:
• for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
•
if the majority of the car has steered into
the adjacent lane
•
NOTE
This function uses the car's camera and
radar units, which have certain general limitations.
Related information
•
on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-existent lane markings
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
•
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 355)
•
•
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating.
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 356)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 357)
Other demanding situations can include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly.
In such cases it is recommended to switch off
this function.
358
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for
steering assistance upon risk of
collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding steering assistance may be shown in the
driver display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Collision avoidance assistance
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the
system has been activated.
Automatic intervention
Windscreen sensor
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop –
an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 354)
•
Limitations for steering assistance at risk
of collision (p. 358)
359
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist*
The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by
indicating the distance to obstacles through
acoustic signals combined with a graphic in
the centre display.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
WARNING
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind is also active when the car is
stationary.
At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from
an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the
tone is constant and the active sensor's field
closest to the car symbol is filled.
At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses
intensively and the active sector field changes
colour from ORANGE to RED.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the
relationship between the car and detected
obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location
of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to
a highlighted sector box at the front/back, the
shorter the distance between the car and
detected obstacle.
The side sectors change colour as the distance
between the car and an object is reduced.
360
The volume of the parking assistance signal
can be adjusted while the signal is sounding
by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the
top view's Settings menu option.
NOTE
Except in the sector nearest to the car
symbol, audible warnings are only given for
objects directly in the path of the car.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides* (p. 361)
Activating or deactivating the parking
assistance system* (p. 362)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
Symbols and messages for Park Assist
Pilot (p. 364)
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides*
•
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 363)
Park Assist Pilot has different behaviour
depending on which part of the car is
approaching an obstacle.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is used or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
Forwards
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived
as an obstacle.
Backwards
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
The Parking Assistance System's front detectors are activated automatically when the
engine is started. They are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft)
in front of the car.
The warning signal has a constant tone at less than
approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or
}}
* Option/accessory. 361
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
when the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres
(5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a trailer connected to the
car's electrical system, parking assistance
backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft)
from the sides.
However, the detection range of the side sensors increases significantly when the steering
angle of the front wheels is increased, and
obstacles of up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) located
diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle are
detected when the steering wheel is turned.
Activating or deactivating the
parking assistance system*
The park assist function can be activated or
deactivated.
The front and side parking assistance detectors are activated automatically when the
engine is started. The rear detectors are activated if the car rolls backwards or when
reverse gear is engaged.
Activate or deactivate the
function using this button in
the centre display's function
view.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Sensor fields for parking assistance system (p. 370)
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera*,
Park Assist Pilot can also be activated or deactivated from the relevant camera view.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 363)
The warning signal pulses intensively at less than
approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle.
362
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System cannot
detect everything in all situations and may
therefore have limited functionality in some
cases.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
•
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the
distance to an object behind the car.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 360)
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since information from
the sensors is not always reliable in
such situations.
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a
trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward
are switched off and will not warn of any
obstacles.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning
signals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes,
exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.
* Option/accessory. 363
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Unavailable Service required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
364
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 363)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*110
The park assist camera can assist the driver
when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and
graphics in the centre display.
The parking assistance camera is a support
function which is activated automatically
when reverse gear is selected or manually via
the centre display.
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic
Alert
Objects/obstacles may be closer to the car
than they appear to be on screen.
WARNING
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
Example of camera view.
Zoom109 - zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all
cameras
PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking
Assistance System
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
109The park assist lines are switched off when
110 Not available for all models and markets.
zooming in.
}}
* Option/accessory. 365
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
•
•
Activate park assist camera (p. 371)
•
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Symbols and messages for Park assist
camera (p. 373)
Park assist camera locations and
surveillance areas*
The function can display a composite 360°
view and separate views for each of the four
cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view.
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 334)
Related information
•
•
366
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 366)
•
Park assist lines for park assist camera*
(p. 368)
•
Sensor fields for parking assistance system (p. 370)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is
active.
360° view*
Forwards
If the car is also equipped
with Park Assist System*
then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually.
Backwards
The forwards parking camera is located in the grille.
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with
approximate coverage area.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit
road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g.
when there are high hedges. It is active at
speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following
which, the front camera is switched off.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car
are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is
around the car when manoeuvring at slow
speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can
be activated separately:
•
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface
in front of/above the front camera.
The backwards-facing camera is fitted above the registration plate.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph)
and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide
area behind the car. For certain models, part
of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may
appear slightly tilted — this is normal.
}}
* Option/accessory. 367
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
The sides
Park assist lines for park assist
camera*
The Park assist cameras indicate the position
of the car in relation to its surroundings by
displaying lines on the screen.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and
respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will
take - also when the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the park assist lines on the display
show the route the car will take – not
the trailer.
•
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically
to the car's electrical system.
•
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
The side cameras are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras can show what is along
each side of the car.
Related information
•
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Activate park assist camera (p. 371)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Example of park assist lines.
Park assist lines show the intended route for
the car's external dimensions with the current
steering wheel angle - this can facilitate parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and
when connecting a trailer.
368
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
•
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be
aware of the sides and front of the car
when manoeuvring in reverse.
•
The same applies vice versa - note
what happens to the rear parts of the
car when the front camera view is
selected.
•
Note that the park assist lines show
the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something
when the steering wheel is turned
when driving forward or that the front
sweeps against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when
reversing.
Park assist lines in 360° view*
Towbar assist line*
360° view with park assist lines.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are
shown behind, in front of and at the side of the
car (depending on the direction of travel):
•
•
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's
direction of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
Towbar with park assist line.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing
the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
}}
* Option/accessory. 369
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
1.
Press Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time.
2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Sensor fields for parking
assistance system
If the car is equipped with parking assistance
system* then the distance is shown in the
360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
Related information
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 366)
•
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
•
Towbar* (p. 439)
The fields for the sensors for forwards and
reverse change colour as the distance to the
obstacle decreases – from AMBER through
ORANGE to RED.
Field colour
reverse
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9)
Orange
0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
Field colour
forwards
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,6–0,8 (2,0–2,6)
Orange
0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0)
Red
0-0,3 (0-1,0)
For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic
signal changes over to a constant tone.
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the
car symbol.
370
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Sensor field to the sides
Warning signals depend on the intended route
of the car. When the steering wheel is turned,
therefore, there may also be a warning for
obstacles diagonally in front of or diagonally
behind the car, not just straight ahead or
directly behind.
Right-hand side rear sensor field
Activate park assist camera
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
in reverse – depending on steering wheel
angle.
The park assist camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function
buttons.
The colour of the side fields changes with
reduced distance to the obstacle – from
AMBER to RED.
Colour of side
fields
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow
0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0)
Red
0–0,25 (0–0,8)
In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic
signal changes from pulsing to intensively
pulsing.
Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be
detected.
Left-hand side front sensor field
Obstacle sector in the car's intended route
forwards – depending on steering wheel
angle
Sector with RED field colour and intensively pulsing tone
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 360)
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Park assist camera locations and surveillance areas* (p. 366)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
Camera view when reversing
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen
shows the 360° view if it or any of the side
views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera
activation
Activate the parking camera
with this button in the centre
display's function view.
The screen then initially
shows the last used camera
view. However, after each
engine start, the previously shown side view is
replaced by the 360° view and the previously
shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the
rear view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h
(16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver – it
}}
* Option/accessory. 371
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
reactivates automatically if the speed drops to
22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded
50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views are extinguished at
15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated.
Related information
•
•
•
372
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 363)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera can be shown in the driver display and/or
the centre display. Here are some examples.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings
and field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Unavailable Service required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
}}
373
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
374
Park assist camera* (p. 365)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist Pilot*
WARNING
(PAP111)
Park Assist Pilot
can assist the driver
to manoeuvre the car while parking. The
function can also assist with steering when
driving out from parallel parking.
The function first checks if a space is large
enough and if so then assists the driver to
steer the car into the space.
•
The function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving
and make it safer – it cannot handle all
situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate
to this function to learn about factors
such as its limitations and what the
driver should be aware of before using
the system.
•
Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always
responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.
The centre display indicates with symbols,
graphics and text the various operations to be
carried out and when to do so.
•
•
•
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 380)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 380)
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 383)
Related information
•
•
•
111
Driving support systems (p. 258)
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 376)
Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 377)
Park Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory. 375
DRIVER SUPPORT
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot*
Perpendicular parking
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot (PAP112) can be used for
both parallel and perpendicular parking.
Parallel parking
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist
Pilot* (p. 380)
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
The principal of parallel parking.
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by
means of driving forward/backward.
With the Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also get help from the function with
leaving the parking space.
112 Park
376
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and
then positioned in the space by means of
driving forward/backward.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park
Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Using Park Assist Pilot*
NOTE
Park Assist Pilot (PAP113) helps the driver
park via three steps. The function can also
help the driver to leave a parking space.
This function measures space and steers the
car – the driver's job is to:
•
keep an eye on what is happening around
the car
•
follow the instructions in the centre display
•
select a gear (reverse/forward) – an
acoustic signal indicates when the driver
should change gear
•
•
regulate and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphic and/or text appear on the
centre display when the different steps are to
be performed.
The function can be activated if the following
criteria are met once the engine has been
started:
•
•
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5–1.5 metres
(1.6–5.0 ft) while the function is searching
for a parking space.
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
The function parks the car using the following
steps:
1.
A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
Principle for searching before parallel parking.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear and brakes.
Find and measure parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
No trailer is attached to the car
Speed is lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
•
•
113 Park
Assist Pilot
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
Principle for searching before perpendicular parking.
Drive at a maximum of 30 km/h (20 mph)
before parking.
}}
* Option/accessory. 377
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
1.
Tap on the Park In button in the function
view or in the camera view.
> The function searches for a parking
space and checks whether it is big
enough.
Reversing in to the parking space
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the
centre display.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space
has been found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without
touching the steering wheel - and no
faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the function is activated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate
freely.
•
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned
before starting to drive backward/
forward.
Principle for reversing into parallel parking.
NOTE
The function searches the area for parking,
displays instructions and guides the car in
on its passenger side. But if required the
car can also be parked on the driver's side
of the street:
•
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system
searches for a parking space on that
side of the car instead.
Principle for reversing into perpendicular parking.
1.
378
Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Positioning the car in the parking space
1.
Move the gear selector to the gear position as instructed by the system, wait until
the steering wheel has been turned and
drive forward slowly.
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the
centre display.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards.
4. Be prepared to brake the car when
instructed by the graphic and message on
the centre display.
Principle for positioning during parallel parking.
The function is deactivated automatically and
the graphics and message show that parking
is complete. It may be necessary for the driver
to correct the car’s position. Only the driver
can determine whether the car is properly
parked.
or behind the car during a parking manoeuvre,
the car is auto-braked to stationary.
The driver display then shows a pop-up message where the driver can choose to cancel
the parking manoeuvre by tapping on Cancel,
or tap Resume to continue the parking
sequence.
Proceed as follows after selecting Resume:
–
Check that there is free space around the
car and follow the instructions in the centre display, such as:
To continue – Gently accelerate away
from object.
Related information
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 380)
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot
(PAP114) compared with when Park Assist
System uses the sensors.
Principle for positioning during perpendicular parking.
Auto-brake during parking sequence
If the parking sensors detect a vehicle or
pedestrian within the intended route in front of
114 Park
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory. 379
DRIVER SUPPORT
Leaving parallel parking with Park
Assist Pilot*
The Park Out function can help the driver to
leave a parking space when the car is parallel
parked.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park
Out function must only be used for a parallel-parked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car.
The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's
function view or in the camera view.
•
GREEN button indication – the function is
activated.
•
GREY button indication – the function is
deactivated.
1.
Tap on the Park Out button in the function view or in the camera view.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the
centre display - follow the instructions in
the same way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back
when the function is completed - the driver
may then need to turn the steering wheel back
to the maximum steering angle in order to
leave the parking space.
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP115) function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may
therefore have limited functionality.
WARNING
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Pay particular attention if there are
people and animals near the car.
If the function considers that the driver can
leave the parking space without any extra
manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the
car is still in the parking space.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car
may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre.
Related information
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause the function to swing into the
parking space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
•
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 380)
IMPORTANT
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
115 Park
380
Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
•
•
if the driver moves the steering wheel
if the car is driven too quickly - above
7 km/h (4 mph)
•
if the driver presses Cancel in the centre
display
•
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g.
when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road
•
•
as the steering servo for speed-dependent
steering wheel resistance is working at
reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to
overheating
when the parking sensors detect a vehicle
or pedestrian within the intended route in
front of or behind the car during a parking
manoeuvre, the car is auto-braked to stationary.
Where applicable, a message in the centre
display states the reason for a parking
sequence being discontinued.
116 ”Approved
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, the function
is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is
interference with the sensors from external
sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the
system works.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
There are also a few details to bear in mind
while parking, e.g.:
•
The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by the
function is suitable for parking.
•
Do not use the function if snow chains or
a spare wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use the function if cargo items are
protruding from the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system
to measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
During the search and check-measurement of the parking space, the function
may miss objects positioned deep in the
parking space.
•
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required
for manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
•
Use approved tyres116 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of the
function to park the car.
•
The function bases itself on the locations
of vehicles already parked nearby – if they
are inappropriately parked, your own car's
tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by
contact with the kerb.
•
Perpendicular parking spaces may be
missed or offered unnecessarily if one
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the function is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic
function. The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step.
tyres” refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
}}
381
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
parked car is protruding more than other
parked cars.
•
The function is designed for parking on
straight streets – not sharp curves or
bends. For this reason, make sure the car
is parallel to the potential parking spaces
when the function measures the space.
Related information
•
•
•
382
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 258)
Limitations for camera and radar unit
(p. 311)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP117) can
be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display. Here are some examples.
Message
Specification
Park Assist System
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
Park Assist System
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contactedA.
Unavailable Service required
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly
pressing the
button, located in the centre
of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message persists, contact a workshopA.
Related information
•
•
117
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 375)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 380)
Park Assist Pilot
* Option/accessory. 383
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
To start the car:
The car is started using the start button
beside the steering wheel when the remote
control key is in the passenger compartment.
1.
The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option
for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car,
the key can be anywhere in the car.
2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make
sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. Press the start button.
Start button location.
WARNING
Before starting:
•
•
Fasten the seatbelt.
•
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and
mirrors.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
1
386
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a
slight delay before starting is initiated.
When the engine is started, the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its
overheating protection triggers.
Backup reader's location.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned
by the backup reader, make sure that there
are no car keys, metal objects or electronic
apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another
by the backup reader may cause interference with each other.
Error messages
If the Car key not found message is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the
remote control key by the backup reader. Then
try to start the car again.
If the car is moving, the engine can be started simply by pressing the button.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
•
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Switching off the car
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 437)
The car is switched off using the start button
beside the steering wheel.
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 389)
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out
from the car when leaving the car and
make sure the car's electrical system is in
ignition position 0 - especially if there are
children in the car.
Start button location.
To switch off the car:
–
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible,
which minimises exhaust emissions and
protects the environment.
Related information
•
•
Press the start button - the car is switched
off.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
–
Press the start button and hold it
depressed until the car is switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the car (p. 386)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Switching off the car (p. 387)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
}}
387
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 437)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 389)
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make
the different functions available.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off,
the car's electrical system can be set in three
different levels – 0, I and II. These levels are
described with the denomination "ignition
position" throughout the owner's manual.
Level
0
The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level:
Functions
•
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminatedA.
•
•
Power* seats can be adjusted.
•
The centre display is started
and can be usedA.
•
The infotainment system can
be usedA.
The power windows can be
used.
In this mode, the functions are controlled by time and are switched off
automatically after a short while.
I
•
•
•
•
Panorama roof, power windows, 12V power socket in the
passenger compartment,
Bluetooth, navigation, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
Power seats can be adjusted.
12 V power sockets* in the
cargo area can be used.
The infotainment system is
started automatically if it was
running when the car was left.
Power is taken from the battery
in this ignition position.
388
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level
II
Functions
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after the
car has been started.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
Selecting ignition mode
•
The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make
the different functions available.
Ignition position I – Depress the start
button and release.
•
Ignition position II – Press and hold the
button depressed for approx. 5 seconds.
Then release the button.
•
Back to ignition position 0 – To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II –
press the start button.
Selecting ignition position
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery
and should therefore be avoided!
A
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 386)
•
•
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Start button location.
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 437)
•
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 389)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Switching off the car (p. 387)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 437)
Ignition position 0 – Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the
car.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions
are to be selected.
389
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent
the car from being driven by individuals under
the influence of alcohol. Before the engine
can be started the driver must take a breath
test that verifies that he/she is not under the
influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration
takes place in accordance with each market's
limit value in force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The
interface facilitates alcohol lock connection,
and gives the option of an integrated function
including messages related to the alcohol lock
in the car's main display. For information
about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to
the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.
•
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or if
the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible
to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive
the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the
separate instructions for that specific lock.
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control
unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass.
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
•
If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass
by pressing the right arrow button on the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad and
then on the O button.
•
If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the O button.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information
•
•
•
390
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 390)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 391)
The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car
can be started.
The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock
installation.
Starting the car (p. 386)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
•
•
•
Alcohol lock* (p. 390)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock* (p. 391)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock*
The alcohol lock is activated automatically
and is then ready for use when the car is
opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 390)
Alcohol lock* (p. 390)
Starting the car (p. 386)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the
speed or prevent the car from rolling.
In addition to the foot brake and parking
brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist
the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot
on the brake pedal when at a traffic light,
when starting on an uphill gradient or when
driving on a downhill gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available:
•
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto
Hold)
•
•
•
•
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)*
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 392)
Parking brake (p. 394)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
Auto braking after a collision (p. 399)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 399)
City Safety™ (p. 316)
Hill descent control* (p. 418)
* Option/accessory. 391
STARTING AND DRIVING
Foot brake
Anti-lock braking system
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal
will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the
pedal will therefore be needed to produce the
normal braking effect.
The car has anti-lock brakes (ABS2), which
prevents the wheels from locking while braking and allows maintained steering control.
Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when
this is engaged and this is normal.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the
engine is running.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when
the driver releases the brake pedal. A further
automatic test of the system may be made at
low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in
the brake pedal.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake
the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes should be relieved by
using engine braking in manual gearshift
mode. Engine braking is most efficiently used
if the same gear is used downhill as up. Use
drive mode Off Road* for increased engine
braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds.
2 Anti-lock
392
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault
and ABS fault illuminate at the same time,
a fault has occurred in the brake system.
Specification
•
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to
the nearest workshop and have the
brake system checked - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level
in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive
further before topping up the brake
fluid. The reason for the loss of brake
fluid must be investigated.
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid
and check for the cause of the
brake fluid loss.
Related information
Constant glow for 2 seconds
when the engine is started: Automatic function check.
•
•
•
•
•
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without
the ABS function.
•
•
Brake assistance (p. 393)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 399)
Braking on wet roads (p. 393)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 393)
Brake system maintenance (p. 394)
Brake lights (p. 144)
Braking System
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Brake assistance
(BAS3)
The brake assist system
helps to
increase brake force during braking, and can
thereby shorten the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the
driver brakes and increases brake force where
necessary. The brake force can be boosted up
to the level when the ABS system is engaged.
The function is suspended when the pressure
on the brake pedal decreases.
NOTE
When BAS is activated the brake pedal
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
(hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary.
When the brake pedal is released, all braking ceases.
Braking on wet roads
Braking on gritted roads
When driving for a prolonged period of time
in heavy rain without braking, the braking
effect may be delayed slightly when next
using the brakes.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It
is then necessary to depress the brake pedal
more forcefully. You should therefore maintain
a greater distance to the vehicles in front.
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt
may form on the brake discs and brake linings.
This may extend braking distance. You should
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads
or using a car wash. This warms up the brake
discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the
current traffic situation when braking.
Related information
•
•
Foot brake (p. 392)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 393)
•
Brake now and again to remove any layer
of salt. Make sure that other road users
are not put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next
trip.
Related information
•
•
Foot brake (p. 392)
Braking on wet roads (p. 393)
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 392)
3 Brake
Assist System
393
STARTING AND DRIVING
Brake system maintenance
Parking brake
Related information
Check brake system components regularly
for wear.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. After
replacing brake linings and brake discs, braking effect is only adapted after they have been
"worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles).
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are
approved for your Volvo.
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of
mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 395)
•
•
Parking on a hill (p. 396)
•
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
394
Foot brake (p. 392)
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is
being applied. The noise can also be heard
during the automatic function checking of the
parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is activated, it only acts on the rear wheels. If
it is activated when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost
stationary.
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 397)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when
the parking brake is activated.
Activating the parking brake
If the symbol flashes, it indicates
a fault has occurred. Read the
message in the driver display.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds.
Deactivating the parking brake
Automatic activation
The parking brake is activated automatically
1.
Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
4 Applies
to automatic gearbox.
•
when the car is switched off and the setting for automatic activation of the parking
brake is activated in the centre display.
•
when gear position P is selected on a
steep hill4.
•
if the Auto hold (Automatic brake when
stationary) function is activated and
• the car has been stationary for a long
time (5-10 minutes)
•
•
the car is switched off
the driver leaves the car.
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
activated when the car is in motion by pulling
and holding up the control. Braking stops
when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Deactivate manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the
symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
}}
395
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Deactivate automatically
1. Start the car.
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
2. With automatic gearbox:
Choose whether the parking brake is to be
activated automatically when the car is
switched off.
To change setting:
Depress the brake pedal firmly. Select
gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
With manual gearbox:
Depress the clutch pedal and select an
appropriate gear. Release the clutch pedal
and accelerate.
> The parking brake releases and the
symbol in the driver display extinguishes.
NOTE
For automatic deactivation, either the
driver has to have put on their seatbelt or
the driver door has to be closed.
Related information
•
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 396)
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 397)
•
•
396
Parking brake (p. 394)
Parking on a hill (p. 396)
1.
Related information
•
Always use the parking brake when parking
on a hill.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear
or the automatic transmission's P position
is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in
all situations.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension to select or deselect the
function Auto Activate Parking Brake.
•
Parking on a hill
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 395)
Parking brake (p. 394)
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by pulling the control upwards
while driving the car away. Release the control
when the engine achieves traction.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 395)
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the event of a fault in the
parking brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is
not possible to deactivate or activate the
parking brake after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake activated.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates
a fault has occurred. See the
message in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
If the car has to be parked before a possible
fault is rectified then the wheels must be
turned as if parking on a hill and the gear
selector must be in position P, or engage first
gear if the car has a manual gearbox.
Information message in driver
display.
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when
the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
When the car has stopped, the brakes are
activated automatically. The function can use
either foot brake or parking brake to hold the
car stationary and it works on all gradients.
When driving off, the brakes are released
automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt or the driver's door is closed.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can be neither deactivated nor activated. Connect a donor battery if the battery
voltage is too low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the parking
brake (p. 395)
•
•
•
Parking on a hill (p. 396)
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be
depressed a little harder before being
released to ensure the car does not roll.
Starter battery (p. 578)
Volvo service programme (p. 560)
The parking brake is activated if
•
•
•
•
the car is switched off
the driver's door is opened
the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
the car has been stationary for a longer
time (5-10 minutes).
}}
397
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
Specification
The symbol is illuminated when
the function uses the foot brake
to keep the car stationary.
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
•
The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
The automatic brake function at a standstill is
activated using the button in the tunnel console.
•
When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the
car from rolling backwards when starting
on an uphill gradient.
Related information
The symbol is illuminated when
the function uses the parking
brake to keep the car stationary.
•
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 398)
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 392)
Parking brake (p. 394)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 399)
–
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the
car is started next time.
Applicable when switching off
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol
illuminated in the driver display), the
brake pedal must be depressed at
the same time as the button is depressed in
order to deactivate.
398
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Help when starting on a hill
(HSA5)
Hill start assist
prevents the car from
rolling backwards when starting on an uphill
gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents
the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver starts to
drive away.
Hill start assist is available even when the
function for automatic brake when stationary
(Auto hold) is deactivated.
Related information
•
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
•
Foot brake (p. 392)
Auto braking after a collision
Gearbox
In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision
with a large animal is detected, the car's
brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any
subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is
no longer possible to control and steer the car.
In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further
collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a
safe manner.
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and
drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is
to change the gear ratio depending on speed
and power requirements.
There are two main types of gearbox, manual
and automatic.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are
activated during braking. When the car has
stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to
flash and the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a
risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
The manual gearbox has six gears and the
automatic gearbox has eight. The number of
gear changes means that the engine's torque
and power range can be used effectively. In
the automatic gearbox, two of the gears are
overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at
constant engine speed.
It is also possible to select gears manually
with the automatic gearbox. The driver display
respectively shows which gear or gear position is currently in use.
Related information
•
•
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
Manual gearbox (p. 400)
Gear shift indicator (p. 406)
Related information
•
•
•
5 Hill
Rear Collision Warning* (p. 329)
BLIS* (p. 330)
Brake functions (p. 391)
Start Assist
* Option/accessory. 399
STARTING AND DRIVING
Manual gearbox
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a
suitable gear manually, according to speed
and power requirements at the time.
•
•
Changing gear
Follow the shifting pattern on the gear
lever and start from neutral position before
moving it to the R position.
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Automatic gearbox
With an automatic gearbox, the system
selects a gear so that you can drive as
energy-efficiently as possible. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
During parking
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is
not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Related information
Overview of gear lever and shift patterns.
Neutral position (N)
The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting
pattern is shown on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
400
•
•
•
Gearbox (p. 399)
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
Gear shift indicator (p. 406)
Overview of gear lever and shift pattern in the driver
display.
The driver display shows the gear position
selected:
R, N, D or M. The P position is electrical.
During manual gear changing, the gear being
used is also shown.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol illuminates
in the driver display and a text message is
shown - follow the recommendation given.
Symbols in the driver display
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the
driver display shows a symbol and a message.
Symbol
Related information
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 401)
•
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 403)
With an automatic gearbox, an appropriate
gear is selected automatically depending on
the need for speed and power.
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 405)
Changing gear
Kick-down function (p. 405)
The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type
where shifting is performed electronically
instead of mechanically. This means simpler
shifting and more distinct gear positions.
•
•
•
•
Gear shift indicator (p. 406)
Manual gearbox (p. 400)
Specification
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given.
Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced
In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
Overview of gear lever and gear positions.
Change gear position by pressing the springloaded gear selector forwards or backwards,
or sideways for manual shifting.
}}
* Option/accessory. 401
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Gear positions
Park position - P
The park position is activated via the P button
next to the gear selector.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P position is engaged.
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected.
To select another gear position when the park
position is selected, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
Some gearbox variants require the engine to
be running.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then
select park position.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear
or the automatic transmission's P position
is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in
all situations.
NOTE
To be able to lock the car and arm the
alarm, the gear position must be in P.
Help functions
402
The system will change to P position automatically
•
•
if the car is switched off in position D or R.
if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and
opens the driver's door when the car is
running with the gear selector in a position
other than P.
To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and
with the door open - exit the P position by
selecting R or D again.
If the car is switched off in neutral position,
there is no automatic change-over to P position. This is to allow you to wash the car in the
type of car wash that requires the car to be
rolled through the facility.
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be
stationary when reverse position is selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II. Some gearbox variants
require the engine to be running.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
the level of acceleration and speed.
The car must be stationary when changing
gear from R position to D position.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Manual gearshift mode - M
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appropriate for the selected gear, in order to avoid
jerking and stalling.
Related information
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
•
•
•
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 405)
•
Kick-down function (p. 405)
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel.
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 403)
Overview of manual gear position in the driver display.
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual gear position by moving the
gear selector backwards from the D position.
The driver display shows which gear is being
used.
•
Press the gear selector to the right to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release
it.
•
Press the gear selector to the left to "–"
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
•
Press the gear selector backwards to
return to the D position.
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
–
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates
current gear.
}}
* Option/accessory. 403
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
–
Pull one of the paddles backwards towards the steering wheel - and release.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not
leave the permitted range. After each gear
change the figure in the driver display changes
to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function
Driver display when changing gear with steering
wheel paddles.
Manual deactivation in gear position D and
M
– Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward
the steering wheel and holding in place
until the figure in the driver display for the
current gear extinguishes.
> The gearbox returns to gear position D.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles
are deactivated after a short time if they are
not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing. The
exception is during engine braking - then the
paddles are activated for as long as engine
braking is in progress.
Driver display when changing gear with steering
wheel paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Switch
To change gear one step:
404
In gear position M there is no automatic deactivation.
Related information
•
•
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 401)
Gear shift indicator (p. 406)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear selector inhibitor
Related information
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions
in an automatic gearbox.
•
•
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems.
From park position - P
To be able to move the gear selector from the
P position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II. Some gearbox variants
require the engine to be running.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the ignition
position must be II. Some gearbox variants
require the engine to be running.
Message in the driver display
If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is
shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever
Press brake pedal to activate gear lever.
The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically.
6 Only
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 401)
Kick-down function
Kick-down6 can be used when maximum
acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the
gearbox control program has a protective
downshift inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or
more steps at a time, depending in engine
speed. The car shifts up when the engine has
reached is maximum engine speed in order to
prevent engine damage.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
possible with automatic gearbox.
405
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear shift indicator
With automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage
the next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing,
it is important to drive in the right gear and to
change gear in good time.
All-wheel drive (AWD7) means that the car is
driving all four wheels at the same time,
which improves traction.
To achieve the best possible traction, the
motive force is distributed automatically to the
wheels with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for torque to the
rear wheels, and can immediately redistribute
up to half of the motor's torque to the rear
wheels.
With manual gearbox
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear
in the driver display and indicates recommended shifting to a higher gear by a flashing
plus sign.
Related information
•
•
An up-arrow indicates a recommended
change to a higher gear, and a down-arrow a
recommended change to a lower gear.
7
406
All-wheel drive*
Automatic gearbox (p. 400)
Manual gearbox (p. 400)
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to
the front wheels. When stationary, the allwheel drive is always engaged in preparation
for maximum traction during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending
on the selected drive mode.
Related information
•
•
•
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Low speed control* (p. 417)
Gearbox (p. 399)
All Wheel Drive
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Drive modes*
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the
driving experience and facilitate driving in
special situations.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions
and settings for different driving needs. The
following systems are adapted to maintain
driving characteristics that are as good as possible in each drive mode:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Steering
Engine/gearbox8/all-wheel drive*
Brakes
Shock absorption
Driver display
Start/stop function
Climate settings
Select the drive mode adapted for the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all
drive modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode
and the start/stop function is activated. The
drive mode can be changed when the car has
8 Applies to automatic
9 Hill Descent Control
gearbox.
been started, e.g. to the Individual mode.
When the Individual mode is selected, it is
possible to make adjustments for specific
preferences, e.g. to show the tachometer.
Comfort
The Comfort mode is the car's normal mode.
These settings mean that the car feels comfortable, the steering is light, the shock
absorption is soft and body's movement is
smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for
carbon dioxide emissions.
Eco
• Adapt the car for more energy-efficient
and environmentally-conscious driving
with the Eco mode.
control (HDC9) are activated. Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds and the speedometer shows the range
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded,
Off Road mode is suspended and another
drive mode is activated.
In the Off Road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachometer.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be
used on public roads.
The drive mode means, for example, that the
Start/Stop function is activated and the output
of certain climate settings is reduced.
When driving in Eco mode, the driver display
shows an eco-meter that indicates in real time
how economical your driving is.
Off Road
Maximise the car's traction when driving
in difficult terrain and on poor roads.
•
The steering is light, the all-wheel drive* operation and low speed function with hill descent
}}
* Option/accessory. 407
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start
from: Eco, Comfort, Dynamic or
Polestar Engineered*.
Dynamic
• Dynamic mode means that the car has
sportier characteristics and faster
response to accelerating.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
The gear changes become faster and more
distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear
with greater traction.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Steering response is faster and shock absorption is harder10 which means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during
cornering.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
The Dynamic mode is also available in the
Polestar Engineered version*.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
10
11
408
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Suspension Control
ECO Climate
Start/Stop.
Related information
Individual
• Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then
adjust the settings according to the desired
driving characteristics. These settings are
saved in the active driver profile and are available each time the car is unlocked with the
same remote control key.
Driver Display
Steering Force
Settings
1.
view11
for individual drive mode.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode
and select Individual Drive Mode.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Drive mode Eco (p. 409)
Economical driving (p. 420)
Start/stop function (p. 412)
Low speed control* (p. 417)
Hill descent control* (p. 418)
All-wheel drive* (p. 406)
Driver profiles (p. 124)
Applies to Four-C.
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing drive mode*
2. Select the drive mode in one of two ways:
Select the drive mode adapted for the current
driving conditions.
Change the drive mode using the button in
the centre console.
Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations.
To change drive mode:
•
Tap the desired drive mode directly on
the touchscreen to select and activate
the drive mode.
•
Press the DRIVE MODE button again
to move the cursor to the desired drive
mode. The selected drive mode is activated after a short delay.
Related information
•
•
1.
12
Press the DRIVE MODE button.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display with the active drive mode highlighted.
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
Drive mode Eco
Drive mode Eco can help you with more ecofriendly driving, with greater fuel economy.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environment.
The following properties are adapted for Eco
mode:
•
•
Gearbox gearshift points12.
•
The Eco Coast12 freewheel function is activated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
•
Some of the climate control system's settings work at reduced power or are deactivated.
•
The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally-conscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Activating and deactivating drive mode
Eco with the function button (p. 411)
•
Activating and deactivating low-speed
driving* using a function button (p. 417)
•
Activating and deactivating hill descent
control* with the function button (p. 419)
Engine management and response from
the accelerator pedal.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast12
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in
practice that engine braking ceases, meaning
in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to
freewheel for longer distances. When the
driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the
}}
* Option/accessory. 409
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
engine whose speed is reduced to idling
speed with reduced consumption.
•
the road's downhill gradient is steeper
than approx. 6%
The function is best used where it is possible
to freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a
slight downhill gradient or when there is a predictable speed reduction to freewheel into a
zone with a lower speed limit.
•
Manual gear changing is performed with
the steering wheel paddles*.
Activating the freewheel function
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
•
•
•
•
The gear selector is in D position.
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
•
•
•
actuate the accelerator or brake pedal
move the gear selector to manual position
changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if
•
•
•
engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature
•
the gear selector is moved from the D
position to manual position
•
the speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)
When using the cruise control in the Eco drive
mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration
will be lower compared to other drive modes,
which enables further fuel savings. This means
that the car's speed can be slightly above or
below the set speed.
•
On a smooth road, the car's speed can
deviate from the set speed when the
cruise control is active and the car freerolls.
•
On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made12, then
reduced acceleration starts in order to
achieve the set speed.
•
On a downhill slope where the car freerolls, the car's speed can be slightly above
or below the set speed. The function uses
normal engine braking to maintain the set
speed. The foot brake is also used if necessary.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows
The driver display shows COASTING when
the freewheel function is being used.
12
410
Drive mode Eco is activated.
Deactivating and switching off the
freewheel function
In certain situations it may be desirable to
deactivate or switch off the function in order
to use engine braking. Examples of such situations may be on steep downhill gradients or
before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in
order to be able to do it in the safest way possible.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
change drive mode*
switch off drive mode Eco in the function
view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible to freewheel for short distances. This, in
turn, reduces consumption. However, for the
best fuel economy it is better to have the freewheel function activated and be able to freewheel for longer distances.
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Eco gauge in the driver display
NOTE
When the Eco drive mode is activated,
several parameters in the climate control
system's settings are changed, and several
electricity consumer functions are reduced.
Certain settings can be reset manually, but
full functionality is only regained by switching off Eco drive mode or adapting
Individual* drive mode with full climate
functionality.
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient
the driving is:
•
•
With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge
shows a low value with the pointer in the
green zone.
With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
how a reference driver would drive the car
under the same driving conditions. This is indicated with the short pointer on the gauge.
ECO climate control
In the Eco drive mode, eco climate control is
activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption.
In the event of difficulties due to misting,
press the button for max. defroster which has
normal functionality.
Activating and deactivating drive
mode Eco with the function button
There is a function button for Eco drive mode
in the centre display's function view unless
the car was equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console.
The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine
is switched off, and it must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started.
The driver display shows ECO when the function is activated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre
display function view
–
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Press the Driving Mode ECO button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Activating and deactivating drive mode
Eco with the function button (p. 411)
Drive modes* (p. 407)
Economical driving (p. 420)
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Start/stop function (p. 412)
Related information
•
•
•
Drive mode Eco (p. 409)
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Drive modes* (p. 407)
* Option/accessory.
411
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/stop function
Driving with start/stop function
With manual gearbox
With the start/stop function, the engine
switches off temporarily when the car has
stopped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic
queue, and then starts again when it is needed.
The start/stop function reduces fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced
exhaust emissions.
The start/stop function temporarily switches
off the engine when stationary and then
starts it automatically when required.
The Start/Stop function is available when the
car is started and can be activated if certain
conditions have been met.
•
The system makes it possible to adopt an
environmentally-conscious driving style by
allowing the car to engine auto-stop when
possible.
Related information
•
•
•
Driving with start/stop function (p. 412)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 414)
Drive modes* (p. 407)
The driver display indicates when the function
is
•
•
•
available
active
not available.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work normally, even when the
engine is auto-stopped. However, some
equipment may have its output temporarily
reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan
speed or extremely high volume on the audio
system.
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral
position and release the clutch pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
In drive mode Comfort or Eco, the engine
may auto-stop before the car is completely
stationary.
With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist
activated, the engine auto-stops approximately 3 seconds after the car has stopped.
Autostart
The following is required for the engine to
auto-start:
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to
auto-stop:
With automatic gearbox
•
412
Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start
after a slight speed increase.
With automatic gearbox
•
•
•
•
•
Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On
an uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA13)
engages, which prevents the car from rolling backwards.
When the Auto Hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
•
is shown in the tachThe symbol
ometer when the function is available.
•
A pointer in the tachometer points to
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot
Assist is activated, the engine will autostart when the accelerator pedal is
button
depressed, or by pressing the
on the left keypad of the steering wheel.
Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
engine auto-starts.
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure
on the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start
after a slight speed increase.
With manual gearbox
•
With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure
on the brake pedal slightly so that the car
13
Symbols in the driver display
when the function is active and
the engine is auto-stopped.
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
Related information
•
The symbol
is greyed out when
the function is not available.
•
No symbol is shown when the function is
deactivated.
•
Deactivating the start/stop function
(p. 414)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 414)
•
•
•
Start/stop function (p. 412)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 399)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
Hill Start Assist
413
STARTING AND DRIVING
Deactivating the start/stop
function
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
In certain situations it may be desirable to
deactivate the start/stop function.
Deactivate using the Start/
Stop function button in the
centre display's function
view. The indication in the
button is switched off when
the function is deactivated.
For the Start/Stop function to work requires
that a number of conditions are met.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in the driver display.
The function is deactivated until
•
•
it is reactivated
•
the next time the car is started.
•
•
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
cases:
•
The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
•
After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
•
•
The driver has not fastened the seatbelt.
•
The ambient temperature is below
approx. -5 °C (23 °F) or above
approx. 37 °C (98 °F).
Driving with start/stop function (p. 412)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 414)
The engine is not at normal operating temperature.
•
The windscreen's electric heating is activated.
•
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values.
•
•
•
414
The bonnet is opened.
•
•
The ABS system has been activated.
The engine does not auto-stop
the drive mode is changed to Eco or
Comfort
Related information
•
•
The car is in reverse.
The driver is making large steering wheel
movements.
The road is very steep.
When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating temperature.
In the event of heavy braking (even without the ABS system having been activated).
•
Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal
protection.
•
The exhaust system's particulate filter is
full.
•
A trailer is connected to the car's electrical
system.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
•
The gearbox is not at normal operating
temperature.
•
•
The gear selector is in M (±) position.
If traffic conditions allow it (for example in
a traffic jam).
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
With automatic gearbox:
•
The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is
in P position and the driver's door is open
- a normal start must take place.
STARTING AND DRIVING
With manual gearbox:
•
•
The driver is unrestrained.
•
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
•
The gear selector is moved from D to R or
M (±) position.
•
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is
on.
A gear is engaged without declutching.
Involuntary stop with manual gearbox
If the engine does not restart, proceed as follows:
1.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
Check that the driver side's seatbelt is
locked in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the
engine starts automatically.
WARNING
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set
in neutral position. A message is shown in
the driver display - follow the recommendation given.
The engine auto-starts without the
brake pedal having been released
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
the brake pedal:
•
High humidity in the passenger compartment forms misting on the windows.
•
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values.
•
•
•
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has auto-stopped. Switch off the engine
normally before lifting up the bonnet.
Related information
•
•
•
Start/stop function (p. 412)
Driving with start/stop function (p. 412)
Deactivating the start/stop function
(p. 414)
The bonnet is opened.
The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without
being completely stationary.
415
STARTING AND DRIVING
Level control* and shock
absorption
Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car.
Shock absorption (Four-C)
On a car equipped with Four-C the shock
absorption is adapted according to the drive
mode selected and the speed of the car.
Shock absorption is normally set for optimum
comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration,
braking and cornering.
Symbols and messages in driver display
Symbol
Message
Specification
Suspension
The active suspension's performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system
use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA.
Temporarily reduced performance
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
416
Drive modes* (p. 407)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Low speed control*
NOTE
(LSC14)
The low speed control function
facilitates and improves traction for driving offroad and on slippery surfaces, such as with a
caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch
ramp.
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel
of the accelerator pedal and engine
response are changed.
NOTE
In a car with drive mode button*, the function
is included in the Off Road drive mode.
The function is adapted for off-road driving
and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to
approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
With low-speed control, low gears and allwheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid
wheelspin and provides better traction on all
wheels. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed
control at low speed.
The function is activated together with hill
descent control, (HDC15) which means that
speed down steep hills can be controlled with
the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to
use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a
low and even speed while driving on steep
downhill gradients.
The driving mode is not designed to be
used on public roads.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function
button
There is a function button for low-speed driving with Hill Descent Control in the centre
display's function view unless the car was
equipped with a drive mode button in the
centre console.
Select low-speed driving in the centre
display function view
–
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating low-speed
driving* using a function button (p. 417)
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Hill descent control* (p. 418)
All-wheel drive* (p. 406)
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when
the engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
14
15
Low Speed Control
Hill Descent Control
}}
* Option/accessory. 417
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
Low speed control* (p. 417)
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Hill descent control*
(HDC16)
Hill descent control
is a low speed
function with enhanced engine braking. The
function makes it possible to increase or
reduce the car's speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake.
In a car with drive mode button*, the function
is included in the Off Road drive mode.
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road
driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on
steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake
pedal, but can instead focus on steering.
regardless of the gradient of the hill and without the need for the foot brake to be used. The
brake lights are switched on when the function is operating.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling
speed, or stop the car at any time by using the
foot brake.
The function is activated together with low
speed control (LSC17) which facilitates driving
and improves traction for driving off-road and
on slippery surfaces. The systems are
designed for use at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
Function
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at
inching speed both forward and backward,
assisted by the brake system. The speed can
be increased by using the accelerator pedal.
When the accelerator pedal is then released
the car slows back down to crawling speed,
16
17
418
Hill Descent Control
Low Speed Control
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Points to remember when driving with
HDC
•
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
If the function is disabled while driving on
a steep downhill gradient, the braking
effect will gradually decrease.
With automatic gearbox
•
HDC can be used in gear position D, R,
and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
changing.
•
It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
With manual gearbox
•
NOTE
HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with
reverse gear (R). There is no active braking
in higher gears even though the function is
not deactivated until approx. 40 km/h (25
mph).
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating hill descent
control* with the function button (p. 419)
•
•
•
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Low speed control* (p. 417)
All-wheel drive* (p. 406)
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control* with the function
button
There is a function button for hill descent
control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was
equipped with a drive mode button in the
centre console.
Selecting hill descent control in the
centre display function view
Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
–
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel
of the accelerator pedal and engine
response are changed.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be
used on public roads.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when
the engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 419
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
Hill descent control* (p. 418)
Changing drive mode* (p. 409)
Economical driving
•
Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly
way by driving gently and anticipating situations.
Adapt your driving style and speed to the prevailing situation.
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a normal load right after starting – a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
•
If possible, avoid using the car for driving
short distances. The engine does not have
time to reach normal operating temperature, which contributes to increased fuel
consumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
retailer.
Note the following:
18
420
•
For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
drive mode.
•
Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in
Eco drive mode – engine braking ceases,
meaning that the car's kinetic energy is
used to freewheel for longer distances18.
•
When driving with manual gear changing
– drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road
– lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good
distance to other vehicles and objects to
minimise braking.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
•
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
A roof load and space box increase wind
resistance, leading to higher consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Trip computer indication for instantaneous
fuel consumption can be helpful for driving
more economically.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
Applies to automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering
and brake servo.
Related information
•
•
•
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that
•
the engine is working normally and that
fuel consumption is normal
•
•
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Drive mode Eco (p. 409)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Economical driving (p. 420)
Settings for car modem* (p. 496)
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
Pilot Assist* (p. 285)
Speed limiter (p. 266)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 534)
braking effect on braking works as
intended
•
all lamps are working - adjust headlamp
level if the car is heavily laden
•
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when
driving to areas where there is a risk of
snowy or icy road surfaces
•
•
•
starter battery charging is good
the wiper blades are in good condition
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest
are located in the car - legally required in
certain countries
Related information
•
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 631)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Winter driving (p. 422)
* Option/accessory. 421
STARTING AND DRIVING
Winter driving
Slippery driving conditions
Driving in water
For winter driving it is important to perform
certain checks of the car in order to ensure
that it can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there
is a risk of snow or ice.
Wading means the car being driven through
water, e.g. on a flooded road. Driving in water
must be performed with great caution.
The car can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 45 cm (17 inches) at no more
than walking speed. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing
water.
•
The engine coolant must contain 50%
glycol. This mixture protects the engine
against frost down to approx. -35°C
(-31°F). To avoid health risks, different
types of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
•
422
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid
ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Winter tyres (p. 532)
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
Snow chains (p. 533)
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the
electric heater and trailer coupling after
driving in water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this
could cause electrical malfunctions.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Braking on gritted roads (p. 393)
Braking on wet roads (p. 393)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Starter battery (p. 578)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
•
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 627)
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
•
Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
•
If water enters the transmission, it
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil,
which shortens the service life of related systems.
•
Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential
or its internal components caused by
flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil
shortage, is not covered by the warranty.
•
In the event of the engine stalling in
water, do not try restart - tow the car
from the water to a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Opening and closing the fuel filler
flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler
flap to be opened19.
In the driver display, the
arrow next to the tank symbol
indicates which side of the
car the fuel filler flap is
located.
1.
19
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Related information
•
•
Filling fuel (p. 423)
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
(p. 432)
Related information
•
•
Filling fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel
filler system.
Recovery (p. 450)
Low speed control* (p. 417)
Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless* or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap.
It is important to feed the pump nozzle past the filler
pipe's two openable hatches before starting to fuel
the car.
Fuelling instruction:
1.
Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
}}
* Option/accessory. 423
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
2.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in
hot weather.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier20 on
the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and the identifier
in the sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel"
respectively.
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler
opening. The filler pipe has two opening
caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed
past both caps before refuelling is started.
20
424
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located in the foam block under the floor hatch
in the cargo area.
1.
Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both
caps before filling can be started.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 423)
Petrol (p. 425)
Diesel (p. 427)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 428)
Applicable to cars with fuel-driven
auxiliary heater*
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car
is in a filling station area.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout
Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Handling of fuel
IMPORTANT
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that
recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption.
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of
fuels which are not recommended will
invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is
applicable to all engines.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
Related information
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
•
•
•
Petrol (p. 425)
Petrol
It is important to use the correct fuel during
refuelling. Petrol is available with different
octane ratings that are adapted for different
types of driving.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol
must fulfil the EN 228 standard.
Identifier for petrol
Diesel (p. 427)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 431)
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been
swallowed.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN
standard EN16942 is located on the inside of
the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding
fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the
latest.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with
petrol engine:
}}
425
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C
(100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is
recommended for adapted performance and
fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7% oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
•
•
426
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have
not been recommended by Volvo.
IMPORTANT
Related information
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
•
•
•
•
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
•
Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
•
•
•
RON 95 can be used for normal driving.
RON 98 is recommended for good power
and low fuel consumption.
An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
Handling of fuel (p. 425)
Filling fuel (p. 423)
Petrol particle filter (p. 426)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 631)
Petrol particle filter21
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for
more efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the petrol particle filter during normal driving.
In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles
being oxidised and burned away. The filter is
emptied in this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature,
active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and
normally takes 10-20 minutes. Fuel consumption may temporarily increase during regeneration.
Use the parking heater in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a petrol car
The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying
distances and at different speeds is important
in order to achieve performance that is as
energy-efficient as possible.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in
cold climates) frequently, where the engine
does not reach normal operating temperature,
can lead to problems that can eventually
STARTING AND DRIVING
cause a malfunction and trigger a warning
message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city
traffic, it is important to regularly drive at
higher speeds to allow the emissions system
to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 70 km/h (44 mph) for
at least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
•
Petrol (p. 425)
Diesel
It is important to use the correct fuel during
refuelling. Diesel is available in different qualities adapted to different conditions.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel
fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435
standard. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high
volumes of sulphur and metals.
Identifier
lowing identifiers may be used in cars with
diesel engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F))
a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel
fuel, which may lead to starting problems. The
fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for
season and climate zone, but for extreme
weather conditions, old fuel or moving
between climate zones, paraffin precipitate
may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The identifier in accordance with the CEN
standard EN16942 is located on the inside of
the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding
fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the
latest.
When refuelling, check that the area around
the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel
onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with
detergent and water.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the fol21
Applicable to certain variants.
}}
427
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME22
(B7).
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
428
Emission control with
AdBlue®
(p. 430)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 631)
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check.
Before starting the car after the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
1.
The remote control key must be inside the
car.
2. Set the car in ignition position II – press
the start button without depressing the
brake pedal Or clutch pedal and hold the
button depressed for approx. 4 seconds.
Then release the button.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
Marine diesel fuel
4. Start the engine.
Heating oil
NOTE
FAME23 and vegetable oil.
Related information
22
23
Empty tank and diesel engine
Diesel particulate filter (p. 429)
Special additives
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Handling of fuel (p. 425)
Filling fuel (p. 423)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 428)
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Points to remember when filling with a
fuel can
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo
STARTING AND DRIVING
area. Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe
firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two
opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be
pushed past both caps before filling can be
started.
Related information
•
•
•
Filling fuel (p. 423)
Diesel (p. 427)
Tool kit (p. 525)
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for
more efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the diesel particle filter during normal driving.
When these conditions have been met, regeneration starts to burn off the particles and
empty the filter. To start regeneration, the
engine must have reached normal operating
temperature. Regeneration of the particulate
filter is automatic and normally takes
10-20 minutes.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine
and the filter is non-functional. Then there
is a risk that the filter will need to be
replaced.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a diesel car
The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. Driving varying
distances and at different speeds is important
in order to achieve performance that is as
energy-efficient as possible.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in
cold climates) frequently, where the engine
does not reach normal operating temperature,
can lead to problems that can eventually
cause a malfunction and trigger a warning
message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city
traffic, it is important to regularly drive at
higher speeds to allow the emissions system
to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for
at least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
}}
* Option/accessory. 429
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
•
•
Diesel (p. 427)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 430)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 631)
Emission control with AdBlue®24
SCR25
AdBlue is an additive used in the
system to reduce emissions of noxious substances from a diesel engine.
In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous
oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to
nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly
reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous
oxides.
AdBlue
AdBlue is a colourless liquid consisting of
32.5% urea26 in deionised water and is manufactured in accordance with the ISO 22241
standard. It is specially developed for SCR
cleaning technology for diesel engines.
AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel
filler flap. Consumption depends on driving
style, outside temperature and the operating
temperature of the system.
Conditions for driving with AdBlue
There must always be AdBlue of the correct
quality in the tank before the car can be
started. The SCR system is very sensitive to
contaminants.
The emission control system continuously
monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of
24
25
26
430
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
Selective Catalytic Reduction
CO(NH2)2
AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is
shown in the driver display.
IMPORTANT
AdBlue is required for the function of the
SCR system and legal emissions compliance. It is illegal to modify or manipulate
the AdBlue supply system in any way so
that no AdBlue reagent is consumed when
it is required for legal exhaust emissions
compliance. Any such tampering may be a
criminal offence which may lead to legal
prosecution actions.
It is not permitted to operate the car with
an empty AdBlue tank, since it will no
longer be compliant with the legal requirements for exhaust emissions. Therefore,
the car is equipped with a warning system
to inform when AdBlue refilling is required.
When the fill level in the AdBlue tank is
getting low, warnings are displayed to
inform that AdBlue refilling is required.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
Handling AdBlue®27
•
•
AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx.
67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is
not flammable but should be handled with
care since it can irritate the eyes and skin.
AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealing original packaging at a temperature above -11 °C
(12 °F) and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid
must not be stored in direct sunlight.
Points to remember when handling
AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be
used again when the solution has thawed.
•
Handling AdBlue® (p. 431)
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
(p. 432)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 434)
Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with
skin and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irritation to sensitive skin when handling
the fluid.
Storage
Related information
•
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 432)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 430)
WARNING
Action for first aid:
•
•
For inhalation - get fresh air.
•
For contact with the eyes - rinse immediately with a lot of water.
•
For ingestion - rinse the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
For skin contact - wash the skin with
soap and water.
Seek medical attention if the discomfort
remains or if a large quantity has been
ingested.
Action in the event of a spill
AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with
water. Avoid releasing into the drainage system.
27
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
431
STARTING AND DRIVING
Checking and filling with
AdBlue®28
Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if
the message for low AdBlue level is shown in
the driver display.
AdBlue consumption depends on driving style,
which is why filling may be necessary
between the normal service intervals. If the
AdBlue tank is allowed to drain completely
then it will no longer be possible to start the
car.
Checking AdBlue level
2.
1.
Press Status to show the AdBlue level.
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
NOTE
Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank
in good time before it is empty.
If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible
to start the engine after it is switched off –
not the regular way or using aids.
The only way to be able to restart after
driving the tank empty is to refill AdBlue of
specified quality, with the minimum being
the quantity shown in the driver display.
Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display.
Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a
full tank.
When less than 25 % of the tank remains
available, the colour of the remaining cursor changes to amber, and at less than
10 % it turns red.
28
432
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Filling
3. Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality29.
When the AdBlue level starts
to become low, a symbol illuminates in the driver display
and the AdBlue level low
message is shown.
1.
Do not overfill the tank. The amount of
AdBlue that can be filled is shown in the
app Car Status.
WARNING
When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling station, it is advisable to use the pump
adapted for passenger cars. The AdBlue
pump for heavy vehicles can also be used.
Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2.
IMPORTANT
Wipe away any spilled AdBlue.
Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from
coming into contact with the car's paintwork. If it does, rinse with plenty of water
since the fluid can affect the paintwork.
Open the blue cover for the smaller filler
pipe intended for AdBlue.
Related information
•
•
•
29
Handling AdBlue® (p. 431)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 434)
Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 629)
ISO 22241
433
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages for
AdBlue®30
The emission control system continuously
monitors the level, quality and dosage of
AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is
shown in the driver display.
Symbol
Message
Specification
AdBlue level low
The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up.
AdBlue dosing
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
and
AdBlue quality
30
434
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol
Message
Specification
Refill AdBlue
The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately.
Engine start prohibited
The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount
specified in the driver display, or contact a workshopA.
and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4.5
litres of AdBlue
Note that the car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount
of AdBlue filled.
When starting after filling AdBlue, follow the instructions regarding empty tank and diesel
engine.
Engine start prohibited
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function.
Service of AdBlue system needed to allow restart
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 432)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 431)
Book service and repair (p. 563)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 428)
435
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overheating in the engine and
drive system
Under certain conditions, e.g. hard driving in
hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat – in particular with a heavy load.
• In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
•
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine
temperature High temperature Stop
safely. Stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes and cool down.
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
•
•
31
436
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or
stop the car in a safe way and allow the
engine to run at idling speed for several
minutes to enable the gearbox to cool
down.
If the message Engine temperature
High temperature Turn off engine or
Engine coolant Level low, turn off
engine is shown, stop the car and switch
off the engine.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox,
an alternative gear shift program will be
selected31. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and
the driver display shows the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
Applies to automatic gearbox.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the
recommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation
given.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has
been switched off.
Specification
Related information
•
•
•
•
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 421)
Gear shift indicator (p. 406)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the
starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid
using the ignition position II when the car is
switched off. Instead, use ignition position I which uses less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
•
•
•
•
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
audio system (high volume).
Starter battery (p. 578)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
IMPORTANT
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's
cover (2).
windscreen wiper
In which case, charge the starter battery
by starting the car and then running it for
at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than
running the engine at idling speed while
stationary.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
headlamps
Related information
•
•
If the starter battery is discharged then the
car can be started with current from another
battery.
ventilation fan
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message
is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions
or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
–
Using jump starting with another
battery
Attachment points for the jump leads.
When jump starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits
or other damage:
1.
Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other
clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
}}
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between
cable and car during the starting attempt.
There is a risk of sparks forming.
WARNING
High voltage can be dangerous in the event
of incorrect intervention. Do not touch anything on the batteries that is not clearly
described in the owner's manual.
438
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
48 V support battery must never be
used for jump-starting.
•
•
External electrical equipment must not
be connected to the 48 V battery
under any circumstances.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
•
The 48 V battery may only be serviced
and replaced by a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the
car's positive jump-starting point/donor
battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged
so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jumpstarted with an external battery or a battery
charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop
function then auto-stops the engine shortly
afterwards, there is a great risk that engine
auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not
had the time to recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there
is insufficient time to charge the battery
with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the
battery has been recharged by the car. In
an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C
(approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be
charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
lower outside temperature, the charging
time may increase to 3–4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery
using an external battery charger.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Support battery (p. 581)
Towbar*
The car can be equipped with a towbar that
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind
the car.
There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
information.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as
not to drain the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and
lubrication with grease in order to prevent
wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is
used, the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
Starting the car (p. 386)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 178)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 389)
}}
* Option/accessory. 439
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
Specifications for towbar*
Dimensions, mounting points in mm
(inches)
•
Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 441)
•
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
A
939 (37)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 446)
B
72 (2,8)
Specifications for towbar* (p. 440)
C
6 (0,24)
D
145 (5,7)
E
88 (3,5)
F
Side beam tilts 8 degrees
G
353 (13,9)
H
1048 (41,3)
I
524 (20,6)
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
Related information
•
•
440
Towbar* (p. 439)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 622)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Extendable and retractable
towbar*
1.
2. Press and release the button – extension
might not start if the button is pressed for
too long.
The retractable tow hook is easy to retract or
extend as required. In the retracted position,
the towbar is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
Extending the towbar
WARNING
Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the
right-hand side at the rear of the cargo
area. An indicator lamp in the button must
illuminate with a constant orange glow for
the extension function to be active.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange. The tow hook is ready
to continue moving to the locked position.
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
}}
* Option/accessory. 441
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
3.
NOTE
2.
Power save mode activates after a while
and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening
the tailgate. This applies when retracting or
extending the towbar.
If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow.
Move the towbar to its end position,
where it is secured and locked in place the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter
in the electrical socket when retracting the
towbar.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to
locked position. This procedure may take
several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed
in locked position, wait a few seconds and
try again.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety
cable in the intended bracket.
442
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate
with a constant glow if the towbar is
correctly retracted.
Retracting the towbar
1.
Open the tailgate. Press and release the
button on the right-hand side at the rear of
the cargo area - retraction might not start
if the button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
in the button flashes orange.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
Towbar* (p. 439)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about
regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the
load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight.
•
Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres
above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's
climbing ability are reduced due to the
reduced air density, and the maximum
trailer load must therefore be reduced. The
weight of the car and trailer must be
decreased by 10% for each additional
1000 m (3280 ft) or part thereof.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer.
•
The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towbar complies with
the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's
payload.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear when shifting
manually and adjust your speed.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably
increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as
not to drain the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
can be certified for higher towing weights
than the car can actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours
to maintain a constant height regardless of
load (up to the maximum permissible weight).
When the car is stationary the rear of the car
lowers slightly, which is normal.
}}
* Option/accessory. 443
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a
risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the
engine and drive system overheats, a warning
symbol comes on in the driver display and a
message is displayed.
Related information
•
•
•
Trailer stability assist* (p. 444)
Checking trailer lamps (p. 445)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 622)
Trailer stability assist*
The function of trailer stability assist (TSA32)
is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations
where they begin snaking. The function is
included in the stability system ESC33.
Reasons for snaking
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear depending on load and engine speed.
Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 436)
•
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 627)
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
occurs at high speeds. However, there is a risk
of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is
overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
•
Extendable and retractable towbar*
(p. 441)
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
•
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
2. Activate the parking brake.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
3. Select gear position P.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a
car with hitched trailer on a hill.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example, end
up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
Trailer stability assist function
4. Release the brake pedal.
2. Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
444
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving
off.
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the
front wheels are individually braked. This
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination.
This is often enough to help the driver regain
control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
combination is stable once again, the system
stops regulating and the driver once again has
full control of the car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre
display.
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if
the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in
such a situation the system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver causing
the snaking.
32
33
Trailer Stability Assist
Electronic Stability Control
When Trailer Stability Assist
(TSA) is operating, the ESC
symbol flashes in the driver
display.
Related information
•
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
Electronic stability control (p. 259)
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights
on the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message. Other
lights on the trailer must be checked manually
by the driver before setting off.
Symbol
Message
• Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
• Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
• Trailer brake light Malfunction
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators
is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than
normal.
}}
445
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a
rear fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is
possible to check that the trailer lamps are
working via an automatic lamp activation. The
function helps the driver check that the trailer
lamps are working before starting off.
The car must be switched off to perform the
check.
1.
When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the
right-hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer
flash again.
> The check is complete.
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be
switched off in the centre display.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Lights and Lighting.
3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then
it is possible to start the check manually.
1.
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks
that Volvo has developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and
in order to achieve the maximum possible
safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks
are available for purchase at authorised Volvo
dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with
the bicycle rack.
•
Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
•
The bicycle rack may be designed for a
maximum of three bicycles.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car
Lights and Lighting.
3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Related information
•
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it
•
•
is incorrectly fitted on the towball
•
is used for carrying something other
than bicycles.
is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
4. Visually check that all lamps available on
the trailer are operational.
446
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The car's driving characteristics are affected
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar.
For example, due to:
•
•
•
•
increased weight
reduced acceleration capacity
reduced ground clearance
sumption. It may also lead to an increased
load on the towbar.
Related information
•
Towbar* (p. 439)
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another
vehicle by means of a towline.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit
for towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading
bicycles on the bicycle rack
The larger the distance between the load's
centre of gravity and the towball, the greater
the load on the towbar.
IMPORTANT
Some gear lever variants make it impossible to shift out of P unless the engine is
running. Contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for assistance when towing, or
summon professional help for recovery.
Load according to the following recommendations:
•
Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest
to the car.
•
Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by
loading the bicycles facing alternately if
several bicycles are loaded.
•
Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to
reduce the wind resistance, which affects
fuel consumption.
•
Do not use protective covers on the bicycles. This may affect manoeuvrability,
impair visibility and increase fuel con-
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed
with the wheels rolling forward.
•
Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than
80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in
excess of 80 km (50 miles).
}}
* Option/accessory. 447
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
•
Check that the steering lock is
unlocked before towing.
•
Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deactivated.
•
Always keep the remote control key in
the car when it is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.
1.
Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
5. Move the gear selector to neutral position
and release the parking brake.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be disengaged. Connect
a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start.
2. Secure the towline in the towing eye.
IMPORTANT
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking
the car.
4. Set the car in ignition position II - press
the start button without depressing the
brake pedal and hold the button
depressed for approx. 4 seconds. Then
release the button.
448
The catalytic converter may be damaged
during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 449)
•
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 145)
Recovery (p. 450)
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 437)
•
•
Selecting ignition mode (p. 389)
Gearbox (p. 399)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Fitting and removing the towing
eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing
eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind
a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper,
front or rear.
Fitting the towing eye
Front: Remove the cover - press on the
marking with a finger.
> The cover pivots around its centre line
and can then be removed.
Take out the towing eye from the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Rear: Remove the cover – press on the
marking with a finger while you fold out
the opposite side/corner.
> The cover pivots around its centre line
and can then be removed.
}}
449
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
may be damaged if you try to pull it up
using the towing eye.
4. Screw in the towing eye until it reaches its
end stop.
•
If necessary, raise the car by using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device. Do not
use the towing eye.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
Screw the eye in firmly. For example,
thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and
use it as a lever.
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
Removing the towing eye
–
Points to remember before using the
towing eye
• The towing eye may be used to pull the
car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and
ground clearance determine whether it is
possible.
•
450
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp
is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car
Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use and return it to its place in the foam
block.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
Related information
•
•
•
Towing (p. 447)
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the
help of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery
vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground
clearance under the car is inadequate, then
the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up.
The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
Recovery (p. 450)
Tool kit (p. 525)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information
•
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 449)
HomeLink®*34
HomeLink®35
is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system,
which can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm
system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and
thereby replace the remote controls for them.
General
HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior
rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of three programmable buttons and one
indicator lamp in the mirror glass.
For more information about HomeLink®, visit
www.HomeLink.com or call
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)36.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold.
Related information
•
•
•
Using HomeLink®* (p. 454)
Programming HomeLink®* (p. 452)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 454)
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
34
35
36
Applies to certain markets.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory. 451
STARTING AND DRIVING
Programming HomeLink®*37
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink® can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink® for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink® buttons should be reset
before programming.
WARNING
1.
Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink® button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®.
Note: The ability of some remote controls
to program HomeLink® is improved at a
distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx.
6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if problems
occur with the programming.
2. Press and hold depressed both the button
on the remote control and the button to be
reprogrammed on HomeLink®.
3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing
slowly (approx. once per second) to either
flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow.
> If the indicator lamp illuminates with
a constant glow: Indication that the
programming has finished. Press the
programmed button twice to activate.
If the indicator lamp flashes quickly:
The device to be programmed to
HomeLink® may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by
pressing the programmed button twice
to see whether the programming is
working. Otherwise, continue with the
following steps.
While programming HomeLink®, the
garage door or gate being programmed
may activate. For this reason, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or
gate while programming is in progress. The
car should be outside the garage while a
garage door opener is being programmed.
37
452
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)39.
Reprogramming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual
proceed as follows:
1.
4. Locate programming button38 on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5. Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming
must be completed within 30 seconds of
the button being depressed.
6. Press and release the button on
HomeLink® that you want to program.
Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/
releasing a second time and, depending
on the receiver model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and
the garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the programmed button is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com, or
38
39
HomeLink®
button,
Related information
•
•
•
Using HomeLink®* (p. 454)
HomeLink®* (p. 451)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 454)
Press the desired button and hold it
depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink®
starts to flash slowly, programming can
continue as normal.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink®
buttons at the same time, not each button
individually. Individual buttons can only be
reprogrammed.
–
Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx.
10 seconds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over
from a constant glow to starting to
flash, the buttons are reset and ready to
be reprogrammed.
Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers.
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
* Option/accessory. 453
STARTING AND DRIVING
Using HomeLink®*40
HomeLink®
When
is fully programmed it can
be used in place of the separate original
remote controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp
illuminates or flashes when the button has
been depressed. Naturally the original remote
controls can still be used in parallel with
HomeLink® if required.
NOTE
When the ignition has been switched off,
HomeLink® works for at least 7 minutes.
NOTE
HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is
locked and the alarm is armed* from the
outside.
40
41
454
•
•
WARNING
Type approval for HomeLink®*41
If HomeLink® is used to control a
garage door or gate, ensure that
nobody is near the door or gate while it
is in motion.
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop
and safety reverse.
Related information
•
•
•
HomeLink®* (p. 451)
Programming
HomeLink®*
(p. 452)
Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 454)
Type approval for EU
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
•
•
•
•
•
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI
49464, USA
For more information, search support information on type approval at www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
HomeLink®* (p. 451)
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction42 in which the front of
the car is pointing.
Activating and deactivating the
compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction43 in which the front of
the car is pointing.
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
–
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown
by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE
(north east), E (east), SE (south east), S
(south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW
(north west).
Depress the button on the underside of
the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
> If the compass is deactivated when the
car is switched off, it will not be activated the next time the car is started. In
this case, the compass needs to be
activated manually.
Related information
•
•
Compass* (p. 455)
Calibrating the compass* (p. 455)
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass44 should be calibrated if the car
is moved between several magnetic zones.
1.
Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power
lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)
and ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if
electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for
example). The number for the current
magnetic zone is shown.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 455)
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 455)
42
43
44
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only.
}}
* Option/accessory. 455
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
character C is shown in the display when
the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with
point 6 above with the heated windscreen
activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
•
•
Magnetic zones.
Compass* (p. 455)
Activating and deactivating the compass*
(p. 455)
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
underside of the rearview mirror
depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the
character C is shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display,
indicating that calibration is complete.
Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune
calibration.
456
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
Related information
The audio and media system consists of
media player and radio. You can also connect
a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car.
When the car is connected to the Internet
you can also use apps for media playback.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Overview of audio and media
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on
which audio system the car is equipped with.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. It is recommended to download
system updates when new ones are available.
Media player (p. 469)
Radio (p. 462)
Phone (p. 484)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Apps (p. 459)
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Driver distraction (p. 39)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 502)
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
Audio settings
The sound reproduction quality is preset, but
it can be adjusted as well.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with
the right-hand steering wheel keypad. This
applies, for example, during playback of music,
radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic
messages.
Sound reproduction
The sound system is pre-calibrated by means
of digital signal processing. This calibration
takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers,
passenger compartment acoustics, listener
position, etc., for each combination of car
model and audio system. There is also a
dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Personal preferences
Various settings are available in the top view
under Settings Sound depending on the
car's audio system.
Premium Sound* (Harman Kardon)
• Equaliser – equalizer setting.
• Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
458
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
High Performance*
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
• Balance – balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
Sound experience*
Apps
Sound experience is an app that provides
access to further audio settings.
Sound Experience is opened from the app
view in the centre display. The following settings can be defined, depending on the audio
system fitted to the car:
The app view contains applications (apps)
that give access to certain of the car's services.
Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view
from the home view. Apps that have been
downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for
embedded functions, such as FM radio, are
found here.
• Seat Optimisation – the sound can be
adjusted so that it can primarily be adapted for Driver, All and Rear.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
Performance
• Tone and Balance – balance between
speakers and setting of e.g. bass, treble
and equalizer.
• System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone
Ringtone.
• Surround – surround sound mode with
level settings.
• Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer,
etc.
Related information
•
•
Audio settings (p. 458)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sound experience* (p. 459)
Media player (p. 469)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 134)
Settings for phone (p. 491)
Sound, media and Internet (p. 458)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
}}
* Option/accessory. 459
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre
display's app view.
All the apps used should be updated to the latest version.
Downloading apps
New apps can be downloaded when the car
is connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 460)
Updating apps (p. 461)
Deleting apps (p. 462)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Android Auto* (p. 481)
NOTE
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
Storage space on hard disk (p. 501)
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 499)
1.
Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market
and model)
Some basic apps are always available. More
apps such as web radio and music services
can be downloaded when the car is connected
to the Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the
car is connected to the Internet.
1
460
2. Select New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to
expand in the list and get more information about the app.
4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app
will remain in the list and it is possible
to try to start a download again.
Cancelling the download
– Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this
cannot be cancelled.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 459)
Updating apps (p. 461)
Deleting apps (p. 462)
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is
connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay
extra attention to the data traffic costs.
Update some
1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3. Locate the desired app and select Install.
> Updating is started.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 459)
Downloading apps (p. 460)
Deleting apps (p. 462)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
If an app is being used during an ongoing
update, it will be restarted in order for the
installation to be completed.
Update all
1. Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
Storage space on hard disk (p. 501)
2. Select Install all.
> Updating is started.
* Option/accessory. 461
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet.
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1.
Radio
AM2
It is possible to listen to the
and FM
radio frequency bands and to digital radio
(DAB)*. When the car is online, it is also possible to listen to Internet radio.
Open the Download Centre app in the
app view.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Settings for radio (p. 466)
Digital radio* (p. 468)
RDS radio (p. 467)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Media player (p. 469)
2. Select Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3. Locate the desired app and select
Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it
disappears from the list.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Apps (p. 459)
Downloading apps (p. 460)
Updating apps (p. 461)
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
2 Availability
462
Related information
•
•
•
Start radio (p. 463)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 463)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 465)
varies depending on model and/or market.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Start radio
The radio is started from the centre display
app view.
1. Open the required frequency band (e.g.
FM) from the app view.
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 463)
Changing radio band and radio
station
•
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 465)
•
•
Settings for radio (p. 466)
There are instructions here for changing the
radio band, the list in the radio band and the
radio station in the selected list.
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g.
FM), or open the driver display's app menu
using the right-hand keypad on the steering
wheel and make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
2. Select a radio station.
1.
Related information
Radio (p. 462)
2. Select playback from Stations,
Favourites, Genres or Ensembles3.
Searching for radio stations (p. 464)
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
•
•
Press Library.
}}
* Option/accessory. 463
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels.
Genres - only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g.
pop or classical.
Searching for radio stations
The radio automatically compiles a station list
of the radio stations within the area that are
transmitting the strongest signals.
3. Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input
of a character and the search results
are shown by category.
Manual tuning
Changing stations within the selected
list
–
Press on
or
under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the
selected list via the centre display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Searching for radio stations (p. 464)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 465)
Settings for radio (p. 466)
Application menu in driver display (p. 91)
3 Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
4 Availability varies depending on model
464
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
Radio (p. 462)
AM4 - station and frequency.
•
•
•
FM — station, genre and frequency.
1.
Press Library.
DAB* - ensembles and stations.
.
2. Press
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
Searching manually makes it possible to find
and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest stations in the area.
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio
no longer changes frequency automatically
when reception is poor.
and/or market.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
–
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
press
or
. With a long press, the
search jumps to the next available station
in the frequency band. It is also possible to
use the right keypad on the steering
wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Radio (p. 462)
Save radio channels in the Radio
Favourites app
It is possible to add a radio channel to the
Radio favourites app and the favourites list
for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on
how to add and remove radio channels can
be found below.
Radio Favourites
The Radio Favourites app
shows saved radio channels
from all frequency bands.
Start radio (p. 463)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 463)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
from a manual station search, the radio does
not automatically change to a stronger frequency.
If a radio channel is removed from the Radio
Favourite app, the channel will also be
removed from the favourites list for the relevant frequency band.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Settings for radio (p. 466)
1.
Open the app Radio favourites from the
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to
start listening.
•
•
•
Radio (p. 462)
Start radio (p. 463)
Searching for radio stations (p. 464)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 463)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Settings for radio (p. 466)
Application menu in driver display (p. 91)
Adding and removing radio favourites
1.
Tap on
to add a channel to or from
frequency band favourites and the Radio
Favourites app.
2. Tap on Library, select Edit and tap on
to remove a radio channel from the favourites.
When a radio channel is saved from a station
list, the radio will automatically search for the
best frequency. But if a radio channel is saved
465
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for radio
There are various radio functions to activate
and deactivate.
Cancelling traffic messages
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
in
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by
tapping on Cancel in the centre display.
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view
available functions.
AM/FM Radio
• Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content,
artists, etc.
• Freeze Program Name: select to stop
the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after
20 seconds.
• Select Announcements:
- Local Interruptions: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the
neighbourhood. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions
function is a geographically restricted ver-
466
sion of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic Announcements function must be activated at the same time.
- News : interrupts the current media
playback and broadcasts news. Playback
of previous media source is resumed
when the news broadcast is finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the message is finished.
- Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts
information about traffic disruptions. Playback of previous media source is resumed
when the message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
• Sort Services: option for how channels
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
service number.
• DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function for linking within DAB. If reception of
a radio channel is lost, another channel is
found automatically in another channel
group (ensemble).
• DAB To FM Handover: starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If
reception of a radio channel is lost, an
alternative FM frequency is searched for
automatically.
• Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
• Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen.
• Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
playing. Selected messages will interrupt
the current media playback to play back
the message. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is
finished.
- Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous
media source is resumed when the message is finished.
- Traffic Flash: receives information about
traffic disruptions.
- News Flash: receives news.
- Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
- Warning/Services: receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
•
•
Radio (p. 462)
Digital radio* (p. 468)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
RDS radio
Related information
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the
radio automatically changes to the strongest
transmitter. RDS provides the ability to
receive e.g. traffic information and to search
for certain programme types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An
FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following
functions:
•
•
•
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
•
Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information.
•
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
Radio (p. 462)
Settings for radio (p. 466)
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or
only selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages,
the radio can switch stations, interrupting the
audio source currently in use. The radio returns
to the previous audio source and volume when
the set programme type is no longer broadon the
cast. To go back earlier, press
right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap
Cancel in the centre display.
* Option/accessory. 467
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Digital radio*
(DAB5)
Digital radio
is a digital broadcasting
system for radio. The radio supports DAB,
DAB+ and DMB6.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in
the centre display.
Digital radio is played back in the same way as
other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
option to select playback from Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the
option to select playback from subchannels
and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio
channels (a channel group) broadcasting on
the same frequency.
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels
are indicated with an arrow symbol in the
channel list.
Link between FM and digital radio*
Related information
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
•
Link between FM and digital radio*
(p. 468)
•
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 463)
•
•
Searching for radio stations (p. 464)
•
•
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Save radio channels in the Radio Favourites app (p. 465)
Settings for radio (p. 466)
The function enables the digital radio (DAB)
to switch from a channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another
channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and
FM.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media
DAB.
3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover
and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to
activate/deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
•
•
•
Digital radio* (p. 468)
Radio (p. 462)
Settings for radio (p. 466)
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown
beside the station name (download time varies).
5 Digital
6 Digital
468
Audio Broadcasting
Multimedia Broadcasting
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Media player
Related information
The media player can play back audio from
external audio sources connected via the
USB port or Bluetooth. It can also play back
video format via the USB port.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio
books and music services via apps.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 469)
Controlling and changing media (p. 471)
Searching media (p. 472)
Apps (p. 459)
Radio (p. 462)
Video (p. 473)
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 474)
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be
operated using the steering wheel's righthand keypad or voice control.
The media player also operates the radio,
which is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
Media via USB port (p. 475)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be
operated using the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The radio is operated in the media player and
is described in a separate section.
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market
and model.)
}}
* Option/accessory. 469
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected
apps:
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
Mp3 player and iPod®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod
app (not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1.
Connect media source.
2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media
source.
470
1.
Connect the car to the Internet.
2. Open the current app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are
downloaded.
Video
1. Connect media source.
•
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 475)
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 475)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 460)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Video (p. 473)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Android Auto* (p. 481)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Compatible media formats (p. 477)
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
Related information
•
•
•
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 92)
Radio (p. 462)
Controlling and changing media (p. 471)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Controlling and changing media
The playback of media can be controlled with
voice control, steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The media player can be
operated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel
keypad or the centre display.
Change track/song - tap on the desired track
or
in the centre display, press on
under the centre display or on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time
axis in the centre display and drag sideways,
or press and hold
or
under the centre
display or on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Changing media - select from previous
sources in the app, in the app view, press on
the desired app or select with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre display or press
on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase
or decrease the volume.
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on
the USB device and to create
a playlist from it. The playlist
can contain a maximum of 50
songs.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Media player (p. 469)
Searching media (p. 472)
Audio settings (p. 458)
Apps (p. 459)
Gracenote® (p. 472)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to
the song being played back, the physical buton the
ton under the centre display or
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
471
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer,
song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist
and, when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet).
•
•
Media playback (p. 469)
Gracenote®
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during playback.
Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music
recognition. Information on the music can be
presented by means of the identification and
analysis of the metadata in the music files.
Sometimes metadata from different sources
can be inconsistent or inadequate.
Gracenote has support for phonetic processing of artist name, album titles and genres,
and in this way, voice control can be used to
play back music.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media
1.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2. Enter the search terms.
3. Press Search.
> Connected devices are searched and
the search results are listed by category.
• Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
• Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show
each category separately.
1 - the file's original data are used.
Related information
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
•
•
472
Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
Media player (p. 469)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
2 - Gracenote data are used.
• None - no results are shown.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Updating Gracenote
Video
Playing a video
The content of the Gracenote database is
updated continuously. Download the latest
update to take advantage of improvements.
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
No picture is shown when the car starts to
move, but only the audio is played back. The
picture is shown again when the car is stationary.
Videos are played using the USB app in the
app view.
1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
For information and download, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 469)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 502)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 133)
Information on compatible formats for media
can be found in a separate section.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Settings for video (p. 474)
Finding video files may be problematic if the
USB device also contains music and audio
tracks. In this case, it is possible to find them
by going to Library and selecting the video
tab.
Compatible media formats (p. 477)
Related information
Related information
•
•
•
•
2. Open the app USB from the app view.
Playing a video (p. 473)
Playing back DivX® (p. 474)
•
•
•
•
Video (p. 473)
Playing back DivX® (p. 474)
Settings for video (p. 474)
Compatible media formats (p. 477)
473
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Playing back DivX®
Settings for video
Media via Bluetooth®
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
Certain language settings can be changed for
video playback.
With the video player in full screen mode, or
by opening the top view and pressing
Settings Media Video, the following
can be adjusted: Audio Language and
Subtitle Language.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information
and to complete the registration.
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
from external Bluetooth devices, such as
mobile phones and tablets.
For the media player to be able to play back
audio files wirelessly from an external device,
the device must first be connected to the car
via Bluetooth.
•
Certified®
This DivX
device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) films.
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
474
Video (p. 473)
Playing a video (p. 473)
Settings for video (p. 474)
Compatible media formats (p. 477)
Related information
Video (p. 473)
Related information
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
(p. 475)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
•
•
Media playback (p. 469)
Compatible media formats (p. 477)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a device via Bluetooth®
Media via USB port
Connecting a device via USB port
Connect a
device to the car for
wireless playback of media and to provide the
car with an Internet connection where possible.
Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them
are fully compatible with the car.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via the car's USB port.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the
ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running.
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via one of the car's USB ports.
The phone must be connected to the USB
port with white frame (when there are two
USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and
Android Auto*.
For information on compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played
back via the USB port.
Bluetooth®
The procedure for connecting a media device
is the same as for connecting a phone to the
car via Bluetooth®.
Related information
•
•
•
Media via Bluetooth® (p. 474)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Media playback (p. 469)
Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via USB port
(p. 475)
•
•
•
•
Media playback (p. 469)
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Video (p. 473)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
USB inputs (type A) under the centre display.
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 476)
Android Auto* (p. 481)
}}
* Option/accessory. 475
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Technical specifications for USB
devices
Technical specification for USB C
connector
The following specifications must be met to
allow the contents of the USB devices to be
read.
No folder structure will be shown in the centre
display during playback.
•
•
•
•
Max number
USB input* (type C) on rear of tunnel console for
charging telephones and tablets for example7.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7
476
Media playback (p. 469)
Media via USB port (p. 475)
Media player (p. 469)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 476)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 476)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Android Auto* (p. 481)
Files
15 000
Folders
1 000
Folder levels
8
Playlists
100
Items in a playlist
1 000
Subfolders
No limit
Type C socket
Version 3.1
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 3.0 A
Related information
•
Media via USB port (p. 475)
Technical specification for USB A
connector
•
•
•
•
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Compatible media formats
The following file formats must be used for
media playback.
Audio files
Format
MP3
AAC
File extension
.mp3
Codec
MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
.m4a, .m4b, .aac
AAC LC
(MPEG-4 part III
Audio), HE-AAC
(aacPlus v1/v2)
Format
File extension
Audio codec
MP3, AC3
AVI
.avi
Subtitles
XSUB
AVI (DivX)
.avi, .divx
ASF
.asf, .wmv
Special functions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference
Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater
profile. Visit divx.com for
more information and software tools to convert your
files into DivX Home
Theater video.
Subtitles
Format
File extension
SubViewer
.sub
SubRip
.srt
SSA
.ssa
DivX®
DivX certified devices have been tested for
high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback.
When you see the DivX logo, you have the
freedom to play DivX films.
WMA
.wma
WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV
.wav
LPCM
Profile
DivX Home Theater
FLAC
.flac
FLAC
Video codec
DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution
720x576
Bit rate
4.8Mbps
Frame rate
30 fps
File extension
.divx, .avi
Max file size
4 GB
Video files
Format
File extension
MP4
.mp4, .m4v
MPEG-PS
.mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Related information
•
•
•
Media player (p. 469)
Video (p. 473)
Playing back DivX® (p. 474)
477
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Apple® CarPlay®*
CarPlay gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions,
send/receive messages and use Siri, all while
you stay focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected
iOS devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay
there is the option to install it
retroactively. Contact a Volvo
dealer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported
and which iOS devices are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/
carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible
with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between the device and the car is
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay no
guidance is shown in the driver display, but
only in the centre display.
When navigation is started through Apple
CarPlay, ongoing native turn-by-turn route
guidance will be ended.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
centre display, the iOS device or using the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to
certain functions). The apps can also be voice8 Apple
478
controlled using Siri. A long press on the
starts voice control
steering wheel button
using Siri and a short press activates the car's
own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early,
8
hold the steering wheel button
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to
your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you
are fully responsible for your and any
others person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Using Apple® CarPlay®*
To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be
activated on your iOS device. The device also
needs an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the
mobile network for all functions to work.
Connect an iOS device and start
CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is
active. An alternative Internet source must
be used to connect to the Internet for the
car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in
modem*.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480)
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
not been connected previously:
Voice recognition (p. 130)
1.
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Connect an iOS device with support for
CarPlay to the USB port. In the cases
where there are two USB ports, the one
with the white frame around the port must
be used.
and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
2. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on Accept to connect.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Starting CarPlay
To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has
been connected previously:
1.
Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In
the cases where there are two USB ports,
the one with the white frame around the
port must be used.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the device will
be shown. The tile with CarPlay is
opened automatically in the cases
where the home view is shown when
connecting the iOS device.
2. If the tile with CarPlay does not open
automatically, tap on the device name.
The subview with CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
3. If an app is active in the same tile, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The subview with CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
9 Apple,
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app
is started, or is already active when connecting, in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the
subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the
app view.
Switch the connection between
CarPlay and iPod
CarPlay to iPod
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication
CarPlay.
Apple
3. Untick the box for the iOS device that
shall no longer start CarPlay automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
3. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to
the USB port.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is
opened and compatible apps are
shown9.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 475)
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 480)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 495)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 495)
•
Voice recognition (p. 130)
4. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to
the USB port.
5. Open the app iPod from the app view.
iPod to CarPlay
1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.
CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory. 479
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Apple® CarPlay®*
Settings for iOS device connected with
CarPlay10.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication
CarPlay and select setting:
•
•
Apple
Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.
Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®.
Update your iOS device with the latest
version of the iOS operating system and
ensure that the apps have been updated.
•
•
In the event of a problem with CarPlay,
disconnect the iOS device from the USB
port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to
close the app on the device that is not
working and then restart the app, or try
closing all apps and restart your device.
•
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
•
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between the iOS device and
the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone
devices can be found on the Apple website. You can also search for CarPlay in the
App Store to find information about apps
that are compatible with CarPlay on your
market.
•
Using Siri it is possible to write/dictate
and read out messages. Messages are
read out and dictated in the language
selected in the settings for Siri. When the
message is written/dictated, no text will
be shown in the centre display – instead,
Related information
•
•
•
If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as
in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored simultaneously in the list. When the list is full and a
new device is connected the oldest one is
deleted.
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes
1.
10
480
Press Settings in the top view.
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
the text will appear on the iOS device.
When Siri is used, note that the telephone's microphones are used and that
the quality is therefore dependent on the
position of the telephone.
•
•
•
If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when CarPlay is used. Resume the
Internet connection in the car by sharing
the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the
device.
Some of the CarPlay functions (such as
voice call and messages) mean that use of
the car's own functions is stopped and
CarPlay is shown automatically instead. If
this behaviour is not wanted, deselect the
display of the equivalent function in
CarPlay under the phone's settings for
notifications.
CarPlay only works with iPhone11.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary
depending on market.
Related information
•
•
11
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 495)
Android Auto*
NOTE
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and
use car-adapted apps from an Android
device. Android Auto works with selected
Android devices.
When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth
to another media player. Bluetooth is
active while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display, but
only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad or voice control. Holding down the
starts Google
steering wheel button
Assistant and a short press deactivates it.
Information about which apps are supported
and which Android devices are compatible is
available on the website: www.android.com/
auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play.
Please note that Volvo is not responsible for
the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view.
After Android Auto has been started once, the
app will be started automatically the next time
the device is connected. Automatic start can
be deactivated under settings.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms
and conditions. Volvo Cars is not
responsible for Android Auto or its
features or applications. When you use
Android Auto, your car transfers certain
information (including its location) to your
connected Android phone. You are fully
responsible for your and any other
person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
•
•
Using Android Auto* (p. 482)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 482)
Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
* Option/accessory. 481
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Using Android Auto*
To use the Android Auto app, the app must
be installed on your Android device and the
device must be connected to the car's USB
input.
NOTE
For installation of Android Auto to be possible, the car must be equipped with two
USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only has
one USB port then it is not possible to use
Android Auto.
Settings for Android Auto*
2. Tap on the device name – the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible
apps are shown.
2. Press Communication
and select setting:
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect your Android device to the USB
input with a white frame.
3. If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the Android Auto app
from the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are
shown.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view.
Android Auto runs in the background if
another app is started in the same subview. To
show Android Auto in the subview again - tap
on the Android Auto icon in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then
tap on Accept to connect.
> The subview with Android Auto is
opened and compatible apps are
shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
482
Previously connected Android
1. Connect your device to the USB input
with a white frame.
> If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the device is
shown.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 481)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 482)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 475)
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Settings for an Android device that has been
connected the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
Android Auto
•
Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected.
•
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable
is connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be
stored in the list. When the list is full and a
new device is connected the oldest one is
deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to
clear the list.
System volumes
1.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
• Voice Control
• Navi Voice Guidance
• Phone Ringtone
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Related information
•
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 481)
Using Android Auto* (p. 482)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Tips for using Android Auto*
•
Here are some useful tips for using Android
Auto.
• Ensure that your apps are updated.
•
When starting the car, wait until the centre display has started, connect the device
and then open Android Auto from the app
view.
•
In the event of problems with Android
Auto, disconnect your Android device from
the USB port and then reconnect via USB.
Otherwise, try closing the app on the
device and then restarting the app.
•
When a device is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media
via Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android
Auto is used.
•
If the icon for Android Auto is greyed out,
this means no device is connected. When
you connect your device the icon will be
illuminated. If the icon is not visible at all
then the car does not have support for
connecting a device for this purpose.
•
If the device is connected to the car via
Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when Android Auto is used. Resume
the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from
the device.
If the car is shared by a lot of people, such
as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a
maximum of 20 Android devices can be
stored simultaneously. When the list is full
and a new device is connected the oldest
one is deleted. A factory reset has to be
performed in order to clear the list.
Related information
•
•
Android Auto* (p. 481)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 495)
* Option/accessory. 483
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Phone
Overview
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected
wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.
The audio and media system acts as handsfree, with the facility to remotely control a
selection of the phone's functions. The phone
can still be operated with its own keys even if
it is connected to the car.
When a phone has been connected online and
connected with the car, it can be used make
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.
Microphone.
The phone is operated from the centre display,
but also via voice recognition and the app
menu, which are accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad.
Phone.
Wireless phone charger.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice
recognition.
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 486)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 487)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 487)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 488)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 488)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wireless phone charger* (p. 492)
Settings for phone (p. 491)
Voice recognition (p. 130)
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 92)
Audio settings (p. 458)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 494)
Driver display.
Related information
•
•
•
•
484
Managing phone calls (p. 488)
Managing the phone book (p. 491)
Managing text messages (p. 489)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to
then be able to make calls from the car, send/
receive messages, play back media wirelessly
and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices
connected at once, in which case one of them
can only play back wirelessly. The most
recently connected phone will automatically
be connected to make calls, send/receive
messages, play back media and provide an
Internet connection. It is possible to change
what the phone is to be used for under
Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in
the centre display's top view. Your mobile
phone needs to be equipped with Bluetooth
and support tethering.
After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer
needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have
Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the
car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the
car from the phone.
2. Open the phone tile in the centre display.
•
If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on Add phone.
• If there is a phone connected to the car,
. In the pop-up wintap on Change
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
The list is updated as new devices are
detected.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
4. Check that the specified number code in
the car matches that in the phone. In
which case, choose to accept in both places.
5. On the phone, choose to accept or reject
any options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.
Option 2 - search car from phone
1.
Open the phone tile in the centre display.
•
If there is no phone connected to the
car, tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
•
If there is a phone connected to the car,
. In the pop-up wintap on Change
dow, tap on Add phone Make car
discoverable.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
4. Select the name of the car on the phone.
5. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
6. Check that the specified number code in
the car matches the one shown in the
external device. In which case, choose to
accept in both places.
7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject
any options for phone contacts and messages.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1.
Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
}}
485
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
NOTE
•
•
The message function must be activated in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In
which case, delete the phone from the car
and then connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them
are fully compatible with the car.
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
•
•
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
It is possible to connect a phone to the car
automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to
have been connected to the car for the first
time.
It is only the two last connected phones that
can be connected automatically.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 494)
1.
2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 487)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 487)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 488)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 488)
•
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
486
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 487)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 487)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 488)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 486)
Activate Bluetooth in the phone before
setting the car in ignition position I.
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 494)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone
•
Ignition positions (p. 388)
It is possible to connect a phone to the car
manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to
have been connected to the car for the first
time.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
It is possible to disconnect a phone connected to Bluetooth, and it will then no
longer be connected to the car.
• When the phone is out of range of the car
it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call, then
the call will be continued on the phone.
2. Open the subview for phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 486)
•
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 487)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 488)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 488)
•
•
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
•
It is also possible to disconnect the phone
by manually deactivating Bluetooth.
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
Settings for phone (p. 491)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 488)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 488)
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 494)
* Option/accessory. 487
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones
Removing devices connected to
Bluetooth
It is possible to switch between a number of
Bluetooth-connected phones.
1. Open the tile for the phone.
It is possible to remove phones from the list
of registered Bluetooth devices, for example.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
or drag down the top
2. Tap on Change
view and tap on Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Add device.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
2. Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone.
3. Tap on the device to be removed.
4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The device is no longer registered to
the car.
Related information
•
•
Generic illustration.
Phone (p. 484)
Making phone calls
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
1.
Open the subview for phone.
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 487)
•
Removing devices connected to Bluetooth
(p. 488)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected
phone (p. 487)
•
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 488)
2. Select call from call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It
is possible to search or browse in the conin the contact list in
tact list. Tap on
order to add a contact under Favourites.
•
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
3. Press
4. Tap on
to make a call.
to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via
the app menu, which is accessed from the
.
right-hand steering wheel keypad
488
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Private call
–
Press Add call.
• Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
free function is disconnected and the
call continues on your mobile phone.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap
on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the
parties.
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
• Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched
off and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
to end the active call.
5. Tap on
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
1.
•
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
•
Handling the application menu in the
driver display (p. 92)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
•
•
•
Managing the phone book (p. 491)
Tap on Join calls to merge the active
multi-party call.
2. Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver
display and the centre display. Manage the
call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad
or in the centre display.
1.
Tap on Answer/Reject.
2. Tap on
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Managing text messages (p. 489)
Managing text messages12
Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone.
In some phones, the message function must
be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In
such cases, they cannot display contacts and
messages in the car.
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre
display if the setting is selected.
Press Messages in the app
view to manage text messages in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre
display
Press the icon to get the message
read aloud.
Audio settings (p. 458)
to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1. Tap on Answer/Reject.
2. Tap on
to end the call.
}}
489
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Sending text messages in the centre
display13
1. You can reply to a message or create a
new message.
•
•
Reply to message - tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to,
then tap on Answer.
Create new message - tap on Create
new. Select a contact or enter a number.
Message notification
Settings for text messages
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings.
Settings for text messages on connected
phone.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
2. Compose the message.
Phone (p. 484)
Settings for text messages (p. 490)
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
Managing text messages in the driver
display
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Text messages are only shown in the driver
display if the setting is selected.
•
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 499)
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
– To have the message read aloud - select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message has been read out, it is
possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car
is connected to the Internet.
–
12
13
490
message notifications in the centre display's status bar.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
Text Messages
• Notification in centre display - shows
Settings for phone (p. 491)
•
3. Press Send.
2. Press Communication
and select settings:
• Notification in driver display - displays notifications in the driver's display
and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's righthand keypad.
• Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Managing text messages (p. 489)
Settings for phone (p. 491)
Press Answer with the steering wheel
keypad. A dictation dialogue starts.
Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Only certain phones can send messages via the car.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Managing the phone book
When a phone is connected to the car with
Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly
in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the
phone selected in the centre display.
. It is possible to sort by first
sorted under
name or surname, and this setting is adjusted
in the telephone setup.
Related information
•
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
Settings for phone (p. 491)
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car,
the following settings can be made:
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication
select settings:
• Ringtones - selection of ring signal. It
Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 133)
•
Enter the characters, letters and words
manually in the centre display (p. 117)
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Phone and
is possible to use a ring signal from the
phone or the car. Some phones are not
fully compatible and their ring signals
may therefore not be available for use in
the car. 14
• Sort Order - select sort order of contact list.
Related information
Browse between the letters and
to
find a matching contact. Depending on
existing contacts in the phone book, only
matching letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on
to search
for a phone number of name in the contact
list.
•
•
•
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
Settings for text messages (p. 490)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
Audio settings (p. 458)
Favourites - tap on
to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are
491
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Wireless phone charger*
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
There is a charging plate for wireless phone
charging located under the centre display.
A condition for being able to charge
the phone is that it supports wireless
charging (Qi). Phones not equipped
with wireless charging receivers can
often be supplemented with a shell that
makes wireless charging possible.
2. Press Communication Bluetooth
Devices and select settings:
• Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
• Previously paired devices - lists registered/paired devices.
• Remove device - removes the connected
device.
• Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and
as Internet connection.
• Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth
connection.
Related information
•
•
•
•
14
492
Phone (p. 484)
Settings for phone (p. 491)
Using the wireless telephone
charger*
The rubber plate under the centre display
makes it possible to charge phones without
the need to use the phone's cable.
For information on certification, go to
www.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
•
Phone (p. 484)
Using the wireless telephone charger*
(p. 492)
Wireless phone charger in front of gear lever
–
Remove all other objects from the charging plate and position the phone in the
centre of the charging plate.
> Phone charging is started and the
symbol is shown at the top in the centre display.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
NOTE
Some phones may become hot during
wireless charging. This is normal.
For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
If the phone does not charge:
• Check that the charging plate is free from
other objects.
•
Check that the phone supports wireless
charging (Qi).
•
Remove the case from the phone if one is
fitted.
•
Lift the phone and position it in the centre
of the charging plate once again.
•
Check that the car is running.
If the phone is positioned incorrectly, or if
objects prevent charging on the charging
plate, a message is shown in the centre display.
IMPORTANT
Keep the phone and charging plate free of
other objects while charging to avoid overheating.
Related information
•
•
•
15
Phone (p. 484)
Wireless phone charger* (p. 492)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
Internet-connected car*
When the car is connected to the Internet, it
is possible – for example – to use web radio
and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or
with the car's built-in modem* (SIM card).
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible to share the car's Internet connection
(Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as
tablets can access the Internet15.
The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in further charges.
Contact your network operator about the
cost for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Before connecting the car to the Internet,
search support information on terms and conditions for services and privacy policy for customers at www.volvocars.com.
}}
* Option/accessory. 493
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Related information
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 494)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 495)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 495)
Apps (p. 459)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 497)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 498)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 499)
Volvo ID (p. 26)
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 499)
Connect the car to the Internet via
a Bluetooth-enabled phone
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth
by sharing your phone's Internet access and
access several online services in the car.
1. To be able to connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the
phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first
time.
2. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated.
On an iPhone, this function is known as
"tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones,
the menu page "tethering" must also be
open until the Internet connection has
been established.
NOTE
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection
sharing), and the subscription must include
data.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using
Wi-Fi or the car modem*.
Related information
3. If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the
centre display top view.
•
•
4. Press Communication
Devices.
•
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 485)
•
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 495)
•
•
•
Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 478)
Bluetooth
5. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
494
6. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change connection.
> Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 495)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 492)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Connect the car to the Internet via
a phone (Wi-Fi)
therefore needs to be reactivated the next
time it is used.
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by
tethering your phone and access online services in the car.
1. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated.
On an iPhone, this function is known as
"tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones,
the menu page "tethering" must also be
open until the Internet connection has
been established.
When a phone is connected to the car, it is
saved for future use. To show a list of saved
networks or manually delete saved networks,
go to Settings Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
It is possible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM
card (P-SIM)*.
Cars equipped with Volvo On Call will use the
Internet connection with car modem for the
services.
NOTE
1.
The telephone and network provider must
support tethering (Internet connection
sharing), and the subscription must include
data.
2. Press Settings in the top view.
3. Continue to Communication
Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Wi-Fi.
5. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change connection.
6. Tap on the network name of the network
to be connected.
7. Enter the network password.
> The car connects to the network.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi
connection, are described in a separate section.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder
under the cargo area floor.
Related information
Note that a mini SIM is required to fit the
car's card reader.
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 498)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 499)
2. Press Settings in the top view.
3. Press Communication
Internet.
Car Modem
}}
* Option/accessory. 495
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Car modem Internet.
5. If another connection source has been
used, confirm the option to change connection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
NOTE
Note that the SIM card used for Internet
connection via P-SIM cannot have the
same telephone number as the SIM card
that the phone uses. If this is disregarded,
it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a
SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data
card that does not handle telephone calls
and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone.
Related information
•
•
•
•
496
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 551)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
Settings for car modem* (p. 496)
Settings for car modem*
The car is equipped with a modem that can
be used to connect the car to the Internet. It
is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can
be entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN
code shall be required for access to the
SIM card.
• Send request code - used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
2. Press Communication Car Modem
Internet and select settings:
• Car modem Internet - select whether to
NOTE
use the car modem as Internet connection.
Note that the SIM card used for Internet
connection via P-SIM cannot have the
same telephone number as the SIM card
that the phone uses. If this is disregarded,
it will not be possible to route calls correctly to the telephone. Therefore, use a
SIM card with a separate telephone number for the Internet connection, or a data
card that does not handle telephone calls
and is therefore unable to disrupt the function of the telephone.
• Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
• Network
Select network operator - automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the
car modem will attempt to connect to the
Internet when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may
result in heavy costs. Check your roaming
agreement for data traffic abroad with
your network provider in your home country.
• SIM card PIN
Related information
•
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 495)
•
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to
use the Internet connection16.
The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1.
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in
further charges from your network operator.
Press Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication
Hotspot.
Car Wi-Fi
3. Tap on Network name and name the
shared connection.
4. Tap on Password and select a password
to be entered on connecting devices.
5. Tap on Frequency band and select the
frequency on which the hotspot is to
transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking
the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Contact your network operator about the
cost for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol
in the centre display's status bar.
Press Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 112)
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
7. If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection
source, confirm the option to change connection.
> It is now possible for external devices
to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi
hotspot).
16
Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
* Option/accessory. 497
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
No or poor Internet connection
Related information
Factors that affect the Internet connection.
The amount of data transferred is dependent
on the services or apps in use in the car. For
example, streaming audio can require large
amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength.
•
•
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary
depending on the location of the phone in the
car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength.
Ensure that there is no source of interference
in between.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies
depending on the coverage in the present
location. Poor network coverage may occur,
for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also
depends on the agreement you have with your
network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic,
contact your network operator.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 499)
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1. Press Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication
Saved networks.
Wi-Fi
3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to
be removed.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the
network in future.
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously
by restoring factory settings. Please note that
all user data and system settings are reset to
original factory settings.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 498)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 122)
Connect the car to the Internet via a
phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 495)
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone.
498
* Option/accessory.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
•
•
•
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz17.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type — WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at
the same time then it may result in reduced
performance.
Related information
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
User terms and conditions and
data sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the headings
Terms and conditions and Data sharing
may be shown.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user
accepts that certain information is sent from
the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality.
The data sharing function for online services
and apps is deactivated as default18. Data
sharing needs to be activated so that certain
online services and apps in the car can be
used. Data sharing can be set from the centre
display's settings menu or in connection with
the services or apps being started in the centre display.
There you can select the online services which
are allowed to share data. Data sharing for
downloaded apps can also be deactivated
there. Note that services and apps cannot be
used as intended if data sharing is deactivated.
After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or
software update, the data sharing settings
may have been reset to their default settings.
In which case, reactivate data sharing for
online services and for downloaded apps.
NOTE
Privacy and data sharing settings are
unique for every driver profile.
Related information
•
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 500)
Privacy and data sharing
With the software update made available
November 2017, privacy and data sharing settings were introduced for online services and
downloaded apps. The settings can be found
under Privacy and data in the settings menu
in the car's centre display.
17
18
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
Does not apply to Volvo On Call*.
* Option/accessory. 499
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
Data sharing for services and apps required
can be set in the centre display's settings
menu.
1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.
2. Press System
Privacy and data.
3. Select activation or deactivation of data
sharing for individual services and all apps.
If data sharing has not been activated for an
online service or downloaded apps, this can be
done when they are started in the centre display. If this is the first time a service is started,
or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software
updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for
online services need to be approved. Note that
data sharing will then also be activated for
other services or apps for which sharing has
already been approved.
NOTE
After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may
need to reactivate data sharing so that the
online services and apps shall work again.
Related information
•
500
User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 499)
Data sharing for services
If you have not activated data sharing for an
online service or for downloaded apps, you
can do this in connection with starting them
in your centre display. If this is the first time
you are starting a service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, you
also need to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services.
Activate data sharing when you start a
service
1.
Select the function or service to be activated.
> If this is the first time you are using the
service, or e.g. after a factory reset or
certain software updates, you first need
to approve Volvo's terms and conditions for online services in order to continue.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
2. Select to approve data sharing for the
service or to cancel.
If you select to approve, data sharing is activated and you can start to use the service.
Activate data sharing when you start
an app
To approve data sharing for an app that needs
the function, start the app and tap on Allow in
the pop-up window.
You can deactivate data sharing for services
and apps in the settings menu under System
Privacy and data Data Sharing.
Storage space on hard disk
It is possible to view how much free space
there is on the car's hard disk.
Storage information for the car's hard disk,
including total capacity, available capacity and
how much space is used for installed apps can
be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information
•
Apps (p. 459)
501
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
License agreement for audio and
media
DivX®
Gracenote®
A license is an agreement for the right to
operate a certain activity or the right to use
someone else's entitlement according to the
terms and conditions in the agreement. The
following texts are Volvo's agreements with
manufacturers/developers.
Dirac Unison®
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC
and are used under licence.
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a
faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using
advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all
loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic highprecision measurements. Like a conductor of
an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison.
502
This DivX Certified® device can play back
DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p
(including .avi, .divx). Download free software
on www.divx.com to create, play back and
stream digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films. Get the registration
code by locating the DivX VOD section in the
device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com
for more information on how to complete the
registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote
MusicID are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA
and/or other countries.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program
to perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data")
from online servers or embedded databases
(together called "Gracenote servers") and in
order to perform other actions. You may only
use Gracenote data in accordance with the
intended end-user functions for this program
or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your
own personal non-commercial use. You agree
not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this
Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN
THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and
Gracenote servers will be terminated if you
violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote
servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all
Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all
Gracenote servers, including all ownership
rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances
have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce the company's rights under
this agreement against you directly in its own
name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier
to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to
count enquiries without knowing anything
about who you are. Additional information is
available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote software and everything
included in Gracenote data are licensed to you
"as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or
warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the
Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the
right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote software
or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the
Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will
operate without interruption. Gracenote has
no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future,
and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE
RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A
GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL
IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
}}
503
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
504
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. Neither the
name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this
Software without prior written authorization
from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the
GPL/LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the
distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use
in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode
data files and any associated documentation
(the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files
or Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Data Files or Software are furnished to do
so, provided that (a) the above copyright
notice(s) and this permission notice appear
with all copies of the Data Files or Software,
(b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with
the Data File(s) or Software that the data or
software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
}}
505
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
506
use or other dealings in these Data Files or
Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não
pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive
2014/53/EU.
For more information, search support information at www.volvocars.com.
The United Arab
Emirates:
}}
507
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Kazakhstan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
508
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率
2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射
■ 最大
率(EIRP)
率谱密度
天线增益
天线增益
10dBi 时
10dBi 时
≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限
20 ppm
■ 帯外发射
率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)
•
•
•
•
•
率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率
大发射
率(包括额外
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业
使用
4.使用微
率无线电设备,必须忍
装射频
产生有害干扰
各种无线电业
率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采
的干扰或工业
措施消除干扰后方可继续
科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
}}
509
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
||
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을
적으로 하며,
든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수
습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical
Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM
Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RDBV/25A/1118/S(18-4228), RDBV/26A/1118/S(18-4229)
510
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低
率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司
變更頻率
商號或使用者均不得擅自
加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低
率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用
電通信
低
前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業
科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Sound, media and Internet (p. 458)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Media player (p. 469)
Gracenote® (p. 472)
Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32)
* Option/accessory.
511
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
New tyres
The function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
Tyre economy
•
•
The car is fitted with tyres according to the
tyre information sticker found on the driver's
side door pillar (between the front door and
the rear door).
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo
original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on
the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully
adapted to the car. In the event of changing
tyres, it is therefore important that the new
tyres also have this marking in order for the
car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel
consumption to be maintained.
1
514
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
tion can therefore be affected. This applies to
all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the
tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres
as possible when you replace them. This is
especially important with regard to winter
tyres. The last four digits in the sequence
mean the week and year of manufacture. This
is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of
Transportation), and this is stated with four
digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The func-
Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and
squealing tyres.
•
•
•
Tyre wear increases with speed.
•
The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
•
When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear
wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking.
•
If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel
rims permanently.
Correct wheel alignment is very important.
Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
Tyre rotation
The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and
WHEELS AND TYRES
wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more
even wear.
IMPORTANT
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and
dark place, and should never be stored
close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the
front and rear wheels should be switched with
each other. A suitable distance for the first
change is approx. 5000 km (approx.
3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx.
6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread
depth) between tyres have already occurred,
then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier
to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car
continuing forwards in a straight line rather
than having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted
on wheel rims) they should be hung up or
positioned lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying
on their sides or standing upright, but not
hung up.
•
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
WARNING
•
Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving
characteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size
may have a negative effect on the car's
stability and driving characteristics.
•
Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim
size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any
costs caused by such installations.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 517)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
(p. 518)
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 520)
•
•
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 534)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 516)
* Option/accessory. 515
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for tyre
Speed rating
Designations for tyre dimension, load index
and speed rating.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims
and tyres.
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum
permitted speed for each speed rating (SS).
The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be
used. If such a tyre is selected, the car must
not be driven more quickly than the tyre is
rated for. For example, cars with Q rating tyres
must be driven at speeds not exceeding
160 km/h (100 mph). The road conditions and
applicable road traffic rules determine how
quickly the car can be driven, not the speed
rating of the tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, for
example: 235/55 R18 100V.
235
55
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
18
Rim diameter in inches
100
NOTE
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
The maximum permitted speed is specified
in the table.
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 240 km/h (149 mph).)
Q
160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on
winter tyres)
Load index
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
V
2 Both
516
Tyre width (mm)
those with metal studs and those without.
W
270 km/h (168 mph)
Y
300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI)
and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
specifications, which can be found in the
printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too
low a load index or speed rating is used, it
may overheat and be damaged.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres (p. 514)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 517)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
Minimum permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres (p. 637)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims
and tyres.
Tyres' rotation direction
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have
the same type and dimension, and also the
same make.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 514)
All wheel rims have a dimension designation,
for example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7,5
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
18
Rim diameter in inches
50,5
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Related information
•
•
•
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
•
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
•
Tyres should only be switched between
front and rear positions, never between
left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.
•
If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to
force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
•
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Tyres (p. 514)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 516)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
517
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Checking tyre pressure
Cold tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, save fuel and extend the service
life of the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Driving
on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low
could result in the tyres overheating and being
damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling
comfort, road noise and driving characteristics.
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold. Tyres are considered cold when
they have the same temperature as the surrounding air. This temperature is normally
reached when the car has been parked for at
least three hours.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's
tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the
letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the
tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16
inch), the tread will be level in height with the
tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as
soon as possible. Remember that tyres with
little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain
and snow.
Related information
•
518
Tyres (p. 514)
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the
recommended tyre pressure for cold tyres in
order to maintain good tyre performance. Tyre
pressure that is too low or too high may cause
uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
•
•
Tyre pressure that is too low is the
most common cause of tyre failure and
may result in serious cracks in the tyre,
the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of
the car and increased risk of personal
injury.
Tyres with pressure that is too low
reduce the load capacity of the car.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km
(1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If
you have to drive further than this to inflate the
tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure
and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when
you arrive at the pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the
tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre
pressure regularly and adjust to the correct
pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre
information decal or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm then you must never release any air.
The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm
tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the
recommendation for cold tyres may have a
pressure that is far too low.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
•
•
•
•
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 519)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
(p. 520)
Tyres (p. 514)
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must
therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to
maintain the recommended tyre pressure.
Use the recommended tyre pressure for cold
tyres in order to maintain good tyre performance and even tread wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(approx. 3 hours after the car has been
driven). After a few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
1.
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tyre and then press the tyre pressure
gauge firmly down onto the valve.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted
nails or other objects that could puncture
the tyre and cause leakage.
5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the
spare tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by
pressing in the metal pin in the centre of
the valve. Then check the pressure again
using the tyre pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre
pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre
pressure table or on the tyre pressure label.
}}
* Option/accessory. 519
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 538)
Recommended tyre pressure
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows which pressures the tyres should have
at different loads and speed conditions.
The tyre pressure monitoring system3, gives a
warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of
the car's tyres is too low.
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tyre pressure.
Approved tyre pressures (p. 639)
If there is a fault in the system the
tyre pressure warning symbol
flashes for approximately one minute and then
remains illuminated.
System description
The decal displays the designation for the factory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for good fuel economy.
However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if improved noise and travelling comfort are desired.
The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the
different wheels via the ABS system in order
to be able to determine whether they have the
correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too
low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a
result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing
the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have
pressure that is too low.
Related information
•
•
520
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 639)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring
system is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the
tyre should be cold and have the air pressure
recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre
pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure
level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in
one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and
check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate
to the correct air pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that
is too low may cause the tyre to overheat,
which can cause a tyre failure. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre
service life, and can affect car handling and
stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not
replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre
pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure
3 Indirect
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
has not been reached so that the indicator
symbol illuminates.
• Tyre pressure low Check Car Status
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS
system fault indicator is combined with the
indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When
the system detects a fault, the symbol in the
driver display will flash for about one minute
and then remain illuminated. This procedure
will be repeated when the car is started until
the fault has been rectified. When the symbol
is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or
warn of low tyre pressure may be affected.
• Tyre pressure system Temporarily
app in center display
unavailable
• Tyre pressure system Service required
To bear in mind
•
Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system after changing a wheel or adjusting tyre pressure.
•
A TPMS system fault can occur for several
reasons, such as after changing to a spare
tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent
TPMS from functioning correctly.
If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system
must be reset by storing a new tyre pressure for these tyres to avoid false warnings.
•
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS.
If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does
not work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
•
The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
•
It is not possible to switch off the tyre
pressure monitoring system.
Messages on the instrument panel
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated
in the driver display and a message is shown.
Check the tyre pressure in the Car Status app
in the centre display.
}}
* Option/accessory. 521
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Related information
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 523)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 524)
•
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 522)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the
monitoring system*
In order for the system for tyre pressure
monitoring4 to work correctly, a reference
value for the tyre pressure must be saved.
This must take place every time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is changed so
that the system can warn about low pressure
correctly.
For example, when driving with a heavy load
or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph),
the tyre pressure should be adjusted in
accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre
pressure values. The system is then reset by
saving a new tyre pressure.
Perform the following procedure to store a
new tyre pressure as a reference value in the
system:
1.
Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
3. Start the car.
4. Open the Car Status app in the app view.
5. Press TPMS.
4 Indirect
522
NOTE
The car must be stationary for the Store
Pressure button to be selectable.
6. Press Store Pressure.
7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Drive the car until the new tyre pressure
has been saved. The new tyre pressure is
stored when the car is driven at a speed
above 35 km/h (22 mph).
> When sufficient data has been collected for the system to be able to detect
low tyre pressure, the animation showing storage progress disappears from
the centre display. The system does not
provide additional confirmation that a
new tyre pressure has been saved.
If storing fails, a message is shown: Storing
pressure unsuccessful. Try again.
If the car's ignition is switched off before the
new tyre pressure has been saved then the
procedure needs to be performed again. Allow
the storing to finish within the same driving
cycle to ensure that the new tyre pressure has
been saved correctly.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but
highly toxic. The procedure to save a new
tyre pressure must therefore always be
performed outdoors or in a workshop with
exhaust extraction.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
See tyre pressure status in the
centre display*
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring5, tyre pressure status can be viewed in
the centre display.
Checking status
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h
(22 mph) are required for the system to
become active.
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 519)
1.
See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 523)
2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 524)
Status indication
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 520)
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
low Check Car
Status app in
center display
The indicator symbol
switches on to indicate
that there is low tyre
pressure in one or more
tyres. See the Car Status app in the centre display for more information.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
system Temporarily
unavailable
The indicator symbol
flashes and changes to
constant glow after
approx. 1 minute. The
system is currently
unavailable, activated
shortly.
Driver display:
Tyre pressure
system Service required
The indicator symbol
flashes and changes to
constant glow after
approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working
correctly, contact a
workshopA.
Open the Car Status app in the app view.
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending
on car model or updated software.
5 Indirect
Below are some examples of the messages
that can be shown for tyre pressure status and
what they mean.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
}}
* Option/accessory. 523
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 522)
•
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 524)
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 520)
Car status (p. 562)
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
When the system for tyre pressure6 warns
that tyre pressure is too low, action is
required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for the
system is illuminated and the Tyre
pressure low message is shown.
1.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres.
"Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same
temperature as the ambient temperature
(approx. 3 hours after the car has been
driven). After a few kilometres of driving,
the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Switch off the car.
2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres
with a tyre pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure,
see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Always save a new tyre pressure in the
system via the centre display after the tyre
pressure has been adjusted.
Note that the indicator symbol does not
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has
been rectified and storing a new tyre pressure has been started.
6 Indirect
524
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden
tyre damage in advance.
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 519)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 522)
When changing wheels
Tool kit
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting
wheels.
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's
cargo area.
See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 523)
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 520)
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 538)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Removing a wheel (p. 527)
Fitting the wheels (p. 529)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
Tool kit (p. 525)
Winter tyres (p. 532)
Jack*
Spare wheel* (p. 531)
Tool for removing the plastic caps from
the wheel bolts
Wheel bolts (p. 527)
Funnel for filling fluids
Wheel wrench* and towing eye
The foam block under the cargo area floor
contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair
kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the
wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable
wheel bolts.
If the car is fitted with a spare wheel*, there is
a jack and a wheel bolt wrench.
}}
* Option/accessory. 525
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 551)
When changing wheels (p. 525)
Jack*
IMPORTANT
The jack can be used to raise the car, for
example, to change to the spare wheel.
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Jack* (p. 526)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 534)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 449)
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Related information
•
•
•
526
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 551)
Tool kit (p. 525)
Raise the car (p. 565)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheel bolts
Related information
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to
the hubs.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
•
•
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may
mean that they are not attached equally as
tightly.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. (103 foot-pound). Overtightening
or loose tightening may damage the nuts
and the bolts.
Removing a wheel (p. 527)
Fitting the wheels (p. 529)
Removing a wheel
Wheel changes must always be performed
correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is
undone and what is important to remember
are provided below.
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
}}
* Option/accessory. 527
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
528
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and set the
gear selector in Park position (P).
•
Chock the wheels standing on the
ground using solid wood blocks or
large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged,
that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
•
Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it
is raised on a jack.
1.
Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench until the stop position as
per the instructions.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car
has a manual gearbox.
3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and
tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that
are fitted in the foam block.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into the
wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels
that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
7. With the car still on the ground, use the
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise).
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
8. When raising the car, it is important that
the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the
intended points on the car's underbody.
The triangle markings in the plastic cover
indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting
points. There are two jacking points on
each side of the car. There is a recess for
the jack at each point.
11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far
away from the side of the car as possible,
at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car.
12. Raise the car high enough to allow the
wheel to be removed to move freely.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheels
Wheel changes must always be performed
correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is
attached and what is important to remember
are provided below.
IMPORTANT
•
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
•
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term
use, such as when changing a wheel
after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used
to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer
time than is required just to change a
wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
9. Position the jack on level, firm and nonslippery ground under the jacking point
that will be used.
10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack
(or the lift arms at a workshop) is correctly
positioned in the jacking point so that the
bump in the centre of the head fits into the
jacking point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point.
When changing wheels (p. 525)
Raise the car (p. 565)
Jack* (p. 526)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
(p. 449)
Fitting the wheels (p. 529)
}}
* Option/accessory. 529
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
WARNING
•
Apply the parking brake and set the
gear selector in Park position (P).
•
Chock the wheels standing on the
ground using solid wood blocks or
large stones.
•
Check that the jack is not damaged,
that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
•
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
•
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
•
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
•
Passengers must leave the car when it
is raised on the jack.
•
If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
•
•
The car needs to be raised high enough so
that the wheel to be loosened can roll freely.
1.
Clean the surfaces between wheel and
hub.
WARNING
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may
mean that they are not attached equally as
tightly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
NOTE
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm
(103 foot-pound). Check the tightening
torque with a torque wrench.
•
•
•
•
•
•
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
•
530
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid
damage to the valve from gravel, dirt,
etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Never crawl under the car or reach
under with a part of your body when it
is raised on a jack.
6. Check the tyre pressure and save the new
tyre pressure in the system for tyre pressure monitoring*.
When changing wheels (p. 525)
Raise the car (p. 565)
Jack* (p. 526)
Tool kit (p. 525)
Removing a wheel (p. 527)
Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 522)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type,
can be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.
The spare tyre is only designed for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be
changed when the spare wheel is used and
the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash
the car in an automatic car wash if the
Temporary Spare is being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car.
WARNING
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on
the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary Spare"
wheel.
•
The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare
wheel. The spare wheel must be
replaced with a normal wheel as soon
as possible.
•
The spare wheel is smaller than the
normal wheel, which affects the car's
ground clearance. Look out for high
kerbs and do not machine-wash the
car.
•
Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare
wheel.
•
On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on
the rear axle can be disengaged.
•
If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow
chains at the same time.
•
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one
can be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of
different sizes or with a spare tyre other
than the one supplied with the car. Using
different-sized wheels can cause serious
damage to the car's transmission.
Related information
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 525)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
* Option/accessory. 531
WHEELS AND TYRES
Handling the spare wheel
Storing the punctured tyre
Winter tyres
Follow these instructions for handling the
spare wheel.
1.
Winter tyres are adapted for winter road conditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
Screw back the mounting screw that held
the spare wheel in place.
IMPORTANT
Do not attempt to unscrew the lower part
of the mounting screw if it is secured in the
body. There is a risk it may break.
If the lower attachment of the mounting
screw does loosen from the body underneath the spare wheel, refit it in the hole
and turn clockwise to reattach it.
The spare wheel is located under the cargo
area floor in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The foam block contains all the
tools for changing a wheel.
1.
Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
3. Undo the retaining screw.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
2. Put the tools back in their right place in
the foam block.
3. Then fold down the cargo area floor and
place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Related information
•
•
•
•
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about
which wheel rim and type of tyre are most
suitable.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed, mark which side of the car they were
mounted on, for example L for left and R for
right.
Spare wheel* (p. 531)
Studded tyres
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 551)
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the
studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives
the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer
service life.
Tool kit (p. 525)
Removing a wheel (p. 527)
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
532
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tread depth
Snow chains
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres
that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm
(0.15 inches).
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can
help to improve the traction in winter conditions.
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions greater than
18 inches
Related information
•
•
•
•
When changing wheels (p. 525)
Winter driving (p. 422)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 518)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided
snow chains are permitted.
IMPORTANT
Snow chains can be used on the car with
the following restrictions:
•
Always follow the mounting instructions from the manufacturer carefully.
Fit the chains as tensioned as possible
and tension them at regular intervals.
•
Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
•
In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels
are fitted that have a different size to
the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained
between the chains and brakes, suspension and body components.
•
Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
•
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
•
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns
when driving with snow chains.
•
Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and
tyres.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to the car and lead to an accident.
}}
533
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
•
•
Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving
characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp
turns, as well as braking with locked
wheels.
Some types of chain that are firmly
tensioned affect brake components
and must therefore NOT be used.
You can obtain more information on snow
chains from a Volvo dealer.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 422)
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit7, is used
to seal a puncture as well as to check and
adjust the air pressure in the tyre.
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have
the puncture repair kit.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing
works as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres
with tread punctures but has limited ability
to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do
not use the emergency puncture repair kit
on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or
similar damage.
Sealing fluid expiry date
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if
the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the
decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as
environmentally hazardous waste.
Related information
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
emergency puncture repair and is
approved by Volvo.
•
•
•
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 535)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 538)
Tyres (p. 514)
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
7
534
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Using a puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit
can be used to seal a puncture.
Bottle opening
(TMK8)
Overview
Connection for bottle
Air hose
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tyre sealing system:
•
The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol.
These substances are harmful if swallowed.
•
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory
tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes.
Connection valve
Connecting
Precautions:
Label, maximum permitted speed
•
•
•
Store out of the reach of children.
•
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Switch
Electrical cable
Bottle bracket
Pressure reducing valve
Sealing fluid bottle
8 Temporary
Mobility Kit
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact
with the skin. If sealing fluid has come
into contact with your clothes, remove
them.
First aid:
•
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention
if symptoms occur.
•
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for
least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting
Pressure gauge
Decal, warning for wheel cover
Harmful if ingested.
}}
535
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
•
•
•
Inhalation: Move the exposed person
to fresh air. If irritation persists, get
medical attention.
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical
personnel. Get medical attention.
Disposal: Dispose of this material and
its container at a hazardous or special
waste collection point.
WARNING
1.
•
Do not remove the bottle when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
•
Do not remove the air hose when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
Set up the warning triangle and activate
the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
sealed in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or
similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It
helps to seal the hole.
536
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the
compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed
limit. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency
tyre repair kit has been used.
In addition, remove the warning decal and
attach it firmly to the side of the wheel so
that it doesn't fall off.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0
(Off), and locate the electrical cable and
the air hose.
4. Fit the sealing fluid bottle in the compressor so that the red arrows on the compressor and bottle meet, and then turn
clockwise until it clicks.
The bottle is equipped with a non-return
valve which means that the fluid does not
come out unless it is fitted in the compressor.
5. Attach the air hose to the bottle's opening
and turn clockwise until it clicks.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V
sockets is in use when the compressor is
operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WHEELS AND TYRES
8. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery to a tyre centre.
Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum
is 2.5 bar (36 psi). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
pressure drops after approximately
30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve
and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
To access the pressure reducing valve, the
sealing fluid bottle must first be removed.
Remove the bottle in the following order:
•
1. Remove the air hose from the tyre
valve.
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
2. Remove the air hose from the bottle.
NOTE
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
3. Remove the bottle from the compressor.
4. Refit the air hose directly in the compressor.
5. Refit the air hose to the tyre valve.
6. Release air using the pressure reducing
valve.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi)
then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery to a tyre centre.
Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre.
13. Clean the air hose before putting it away
and be careful that there is no leakage of
sealing fluid.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up
check.
WARNING
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre. Make
sure that nobody is standing near the car
and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
}}
537
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
15. Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off.
The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
these replacements be performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
•
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the
tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside
assistance for recovery.
If the tyre pressure is higher than
1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the
driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa
= 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure
is too high.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
538
Maximum mileage with tyres containing
sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 551)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 534)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from
the puncture repair kit (p. 538)
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using
the compressor in the emergency puncture
repair kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
(Off), and take out the electrical cable and
the air hose.
2. Attach the air hose directly into the compressor's bottle bracket and turn clockwise until it clicks.
Move the warning decal to the side of the
compressor. It does not need to be
attached to the wheel cover unless the
sealing fluid is used.
3. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WHEELS AND TYRES
4. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
8. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
IMPORTANT
6. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified
on the tyre pressure label on the driver
side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is
too high.
After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management.
5. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I (On).
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
•
Related information
•
•
•
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 535)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 534)
7. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
539
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
front seat backrest and also USB ports* in the tunnel
console.
Overview of the passenger compartment's
interior and storage locations.
WARNING
Front seat
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other
compartments. Otherwise they may injure
people in the car in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
IMPORTANT
Storage compartment for legroom, electrical socket
and USB port above the wireless phone charger*,
cup holder and storage under armrest in tunnel console.
Storage compartment in door panel, card holder on
left of steering wheel, storage under driver's seat1,
sun visor and glovebox with extensible hook.
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and
other items on sensitive surfaces.
Rear seat
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Emptying the ashtray* (p. 544)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 544)
Electrical sockets (p. 545)
Using the glovebox (p. 546)
Sun visors (p. 548)
Tunnel console (p. 543)
Wireless phone charger* (p. 492)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 475)
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder*
in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the
1
542
A maximum of 1 kg (2.2 lbs) can be stored here.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the
front seats.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories,
etc. in the glove compartment or other
compartments. Otherwise they may injure
people in the car in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Emptying the ashtray* (p. 544)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 544)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Electrical sockets (p. 545)
Climate controls (p. 191)
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and
other items on sensitive surfaces.
Storage compartment with cup holder.
Waste bin*2 that can be removed and
emptied.
Storage compartment under the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment. There
is also a USB port underneath*.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is
located under the tunnel console's cup
holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other
metal objects in the cup holder, since this
may trigger the alarm.
NOTE
The USB sockets can be used for charging
a mobile phone or tablet, for example. Only
the front USB input can be used to play
media in the car's audio system.
2 Only
in cars with automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory. 543
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Using the cigarette lighter*
Related information
The cigarette lighter can be a complement to
the 12 V socket in the front section of the tunnel console.
•
•
Cigarette lighter in tunnel console, front seat.
1.
Press the button on the lighter.
> The button jumps up when the lighter
starts to glow.
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Emptying the ashtray* (p. 544)
Emptying the ashtray*
When there is a cigarette lighter fitted in the
car there is a detachable ashtray in the tunnel
console.
1.
2. Refit the ashtray in the tunnel console.
2. Pull the lighter out from the socket and
use the glow to give a light.
WARNING
Exercise caution with smouldering glow
and ash so that they do not damage the
interior or injure passengers, for example.
Only extinguish cigarettes on the intended
surface.
3. Refit the lighter in the socket.
WARNING
Take care when the lighter is activated so
that the glowing part does not, for example, damage the interior or injure passengers.
544
Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up
and empty the contents.
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 544)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Electrical sockets
Using electrical sockets
There is one 12 V electrical socket in the tunnel console and one 12 V electrical socket* in
the cargo area.
12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's
electrical system must be set in the lowest
ignition position I. The sockets are then active
as long as the starter battery level does not
become too low.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
Related information
•
•
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V sockets can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as music
players, cooler boxes and mobile phones.
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Using electrical sockets (p. 545)
If the engine is switched off and the car is
locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the
engine is switched off and the car is not
locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to
be active for a further seven minutes.
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk
of discharging the starter battery, which
can limit functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when
the car's electrical system is disconnected
or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they
are not in use in order to avoid the starter
battery being discharged.
}}
* Option/accessory. 545
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
•
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage
the socket or come loose when driving.
•
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver
or electrical system for example.
•
Position the accessory so that it is not
at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or
collision.
•
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can
burn passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V sockets
1.
Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (cargo area)
in front of the socket and plug in the
accessory's connector.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and
refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or
fold up the cover (cargo area) when the
socket is not in use or if the socket is left
unattended.
Related information
•
•
Electrical sockets (p. 545)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger
side. The printed owner's manual and maps
can be kept in the glovebox, for example.
There is also space for a pen and card holder.
Glovebox with extensible hook.
The hook on the glovebox can be extended
when the glovebox is open so that it can be
used after the glovebox has been closed.
Locking and unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car
is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
with the accompanying key.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A)
per socket.
546
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
The key's designated storage space. The figure is
schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Activating cooling.
Deactivating cooling.
–
Pull out the key.
–
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward
the passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
•
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
Private locking (p. 250)
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the
climate control system is active (i.e. when the
car is set in ignition position II or when the
engine is running).
* Option/accessory. 547
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Sun visors
Cargo area
Recommendations for loading
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the
driver seat and the front seat passenger seat
which can be folded down and angled out to
the side when necessary.
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large
objects.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious.
Use the load retaining eyelets or bag holders
available for holding the load securely in place.
The parcel shelf can be both easily removed
and stored under the cargo area floor to make
space for bulky loads.
There are a number of things that are important to bear in mind when loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor.
Related information
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the guard is lifted up.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g.
cards or tickets.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 542)
•
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change
depending on the weight and positioning
of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
Good things to remember when loading:
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
Bag hooks (p. 550)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 551)
Remove and store the parcel shelf
(p. 555)
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
548
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection
of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed
in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
Related information
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 551)
Roof load and loading on load
carriers
•
Through-load hatch in the rear seat*
(p. 551)
•
Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 549)
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and
in order to achieve the maximum possible
safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers
are available for purchase at authorised Volvo
retailers.
•
Level control* and shock absorption
(p. 416)
•
Weights (p. 621)
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 174)
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
If the load is longer than the car at the
front, e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing
eye to its front socket and attach the bungee to this.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of
the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of
the rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch* in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow
loads.
}}
* Option/accessory. 549
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the car's specifications with regard
to weights and maximum permitted load.
Bag hooks
Under the floor hatch*
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
Weights (p. 621)
1.
There is a bag hook in the side panel on each
side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Lift the handle in the centre of the cargo
area floor and fold up the floor.
2. Move the cargo area floor forward to
upright position and fit it in the adjustment
groove on each side.
> It is now possible to hang bags with
handles at a suitable height on the
hooks.
In glovebox
There is also an extensible hook in the glovebox that can be used for hanging up a bag.
Related information
•
•
•
550
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
Using the glovebox (p. 546)
Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 553)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Load retaining eyelets
Use the load retaining eyelets to attach
straps in order to anchor items in the cargo
area.
Through-load hatch in the rear
seat*
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g.
skis.
Folding up the cargo area floor
The cargo area floor can be secured in raised
position using the support arm.
1. Grip the handle to fold up the cargo area
floor.
2. Fold up the support arm and secure the
end in the socket on the underside of the
cargo area floor.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which
protrude may cause injury under violent
braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
Weights (p. 621)
1.
In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle
and fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
3. Adjust the centre seat's head restraint
upwards so that the steel tubes do not
block the hatch opening.
> The cargo area floor remains in raised
position.
If the private locking function is used then the
through-load hatch must be closed.
Related information
•
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
Private locking (p. 250)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 551)
}}
* Option/accessory. 551
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
With folding cargo area floor*
Release folding cargo area floor*
2.
The folding cargo area floor can be released
to facilitate access to e.g. the SIM card
holder or the lower storage area.
1.
–
Lift the handle in the middle of the folding
cargo area floor and fold it forwards.
Press the lock spring as indicated by
the arrow until it stops. Maintain the pressure.
Related information
•
Cargo area (p. 548)
Fold the folding cargo area floor forwards.
At the same time, lift the cargo area
floor a few millimetres up from the base.
3. Release the pressure from the lock spring,
but continue holding up the cargo area
floor.
552
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Fitting and removing the safety
net*
4.
The safety net prevents loads from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting
points.
The cargo area floor can be placed carefully back onto the lock springs without
being locked in position.
Carry on holding up the cargo area floor
and press the lock spring on the other side
as indicated by the arrow.
> If the actions in section 2 have been
completed correctly, the cargo area
floor should now have been released
from its side brackets.
NOTE
The cargo area floor is also secured with
hinges at the front.
Volvo recommends leaving the cargo area
floor in its front hinges.
5. Press on the cargo area floor to lock it
back into its brackets.
Related information
•
Cargo area (p. 548)
For reasons of safety, the safety net must
always be fastened and anchored as described below.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and
can be secured two different locations in the
car:
•
•
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
}}
* Option/accessory. 553
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must
be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
Fitting the safety net
WARNING
2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the
front or rear roof mounting with the
anchoring strap locks turned towards you.
4.
Remove any clothing hooks from the roof
bracket by turning it a quarter turn clockwise on the left-hand side and a quarter
turn anticlockwise on the right-hand side
respectively.
It is necessary to ensure that the upper
securing points of the safety net are fitted
correctly and that the puller-straps are
hooked in properly.
Rear fitting.
Damaged safety nets must not be used.
For rear fitting:
NOTE
With forward mounting, the safety net is
most easily mounted via one of the rear
doors.
1.
554
Unfold the safety net with the upper
attachment hooks facing up.
Applies to left-hand side.
3. Hook the net's second attachment hook
to the roof bracket on the opposite side.
Take care to press forward the net's
retaining hooks for each respective roof
mounting's front end position.
With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's puller-straps
into the front load retaining eyelets in the
cargo area.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring
straps.
Removing the safety net
The safety net can be easily removed and
folded up.
1.
Front fitting.
For front fitting:
With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps into the
outer eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails
- it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward
slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat and backrest hard against
the net when they are moved back again only adjust until the seat or backrest
makes contact with the net.
Remove and store the parcel shelf
The parcel shelf can be removed to increase
the size of the cargo area.
Removing parcel shelf
Reduce safety net tension by pressing the
button in the anchoring strap lock and
feeding out a little of the anchoring strap
on each side.
2. Press in the catches and detach both of
the anchoring strap's hooks.
3. Undo the upper attachments and release
the net from the roof mountings.
4. Fold up the net and store it in its case.
Refit any clothing hook if required.
Related information
•
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 548)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 551)
Detach the parcel shelf's lifting eyes on
both sides.
Unhook the parcel shelf at the front edge
and remove it.
IMPORTANT
If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards
hard into the safety net, the net and roof
mounts may be damaged.
}}
555
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
||
Parcel shelf storage beneath the cargo
area floor
With folding cargo area floor*:
First aid kit*
1.
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap, if
the car is equipped with one of these.
The removed parcel shelf can be stored under
the cargo area floor.
Fold up the folding cargo area floor forwards to be able to lower the parcel shelf
downwards with the upper side turned
down and the rear part facing forwards.
Fold up the cargo area floor and secure it
in raised position with the support arm.
Turn the upper side of the parcel shelf
downwards and lower it into the space
with the rear part facing forwards.
2. Fold the cargo area floor back to level
position.
Related information
•
Cargo area (p. 548)
Related information
•
556
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending
on car model.
Cargo area (p. 548)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located in the compartment on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Open the hatch by first turning the knob a
quarter turn and then pulling the hatch
from its brackets in the top and bottom
edges.
Press the latch that secures the warning
triangle slightly to the right and remove
the case.
Remove the warning triangle from the
case, unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case
are properly secured in their storage space
and that the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
•
•
Cargo area (p. 548)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 145)
557
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to perform the service and
maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the
personnel, special tools and service literature
that can provide the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
•
•
560
Car status (p. 562)
Book service and repair (p. 563)
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket (p. 38)
•
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 567)
•
•
Brake system maintenance (p. 394)
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be
simpler and more efficient when the transfer
of diagnostic information and software can
take place via the workshop's network.
During a workshop visit, your service technician may want to connect your car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform
fault-tracing and software download. For this
type of communication, the car only connects
to a workshop's network. It is not possible to
connect the car to another Wi-Fi network,
such as at home, in the same way as to a
workshop's network.
Connection with the remote control
key
Connection is normally handled by the service
technician who then uses the remote control
key buttons. That's why it's important to take
a key with buttons with you for the workshop
visit. Press three times on the lock button on
the remote control key to connect the car to
the workshop's network via Wi-Fi.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the
symbol appears in the centre
display.
WARNING
The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and
systems.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
•
Book service and repair (p. 563)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car1.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
NOTE
Data download may affect other services
that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the
effect on other services is experienced as
disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate
to switch off or interrupt other services.
Functions for online car and infotainment can
be updated via the Download Centre.
Updates can be made one at a time or all at
once.
Searching for update
•
•
•
If an update is available, the
message New software
updates available is shown
in the centre display's status
bar.
searching for and updating system software
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling
apps.
Related information
•
Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561)
•
•
•
•
•
Downloading apps (p. 460)
Updating apps (p. 461)
Deleting apps (p. 462)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
1 Data
2 Data
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the
ignition is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next
time the car is used.
For system updates to be possible, the car
must be connected to the Internet2.
–
Go to Download Centre in the centre display's app view.
> If no search has been performed since
the last time the infotainment system
was started, a search is performed. No
search is performed if a software installation is in progress.
A number on System updates shows
how many updates are available. One
tap shows a list of the updates that can
be installed in the car.
is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
Update all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the Install all option
can be selected at System updates.
Update individual system software
programs
–
Select Install for the software required.
}}
* Option/accessory. 561
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Cancelling software download
–
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced Install at the start of the download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this
cannot be cancelled.
Car status
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to
book service3.
The Car Status app is started
from app view in the centre
display and has four tabs:
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
•
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 430)
Deactivating the background search
for software update
Automatic search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deactivated.
1.
Tap on Settings in the centre display's
top view.
2. Press System
Download Centre.
3. Deselect Auto Software Update.
Related information
•
•
•
Download Center (p. 561)
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
3 Applies to certain markets.
4 AdBlue Applies to cars with
562
• Messages - status messages
• Status - checking engine oil level and
AdBlue level4
• TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
• Appointments - appointment information
and car information3.
Related information
•
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 95)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
•
•
•
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 520)
Book service and repair (p. 563)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 564)
diesel engines.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Book service and repair5
2. Press Appointments.
This service provides a way to send a booking
request for service and workshop visit
directly in the car.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message
will appear in the driver display and at the top
of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours
that the engine has been running, or distance
driven since the last service.
3. Press Request appointment.
Before the service can be used
•
•
•
Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car.
Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
contact by going to www.volvocars.com
and logging in.
To send and receive booking information,
the car must be connected to the Internet6.
Book a service
Fill in a booking request when so required or
when a message indicating that the car needs
a service or repair is shown.
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
5 Applies to certain markets.
6 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet,
7 This time frame may vary depending on market.
8 Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is
filled in.
5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is
filled in.
The booking enquiry sent from the car
includes car information that facilitates workshop planning.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking
proposal. Information about your dealer is also
available in the car so that you can contact
your workshop.
6. Fill in the field Tap to write information
to the workshop if there is anything you
would like done during the workshop visit
or any other important information to your
workshop.
When the car has received an appointment
suggestion, a message will be shown at the
top of the centre display.
7. Press Send appointment request.
> You will receive an appointment suggestion via e-mail within a couple of
days7.
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable,
tap on Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send
new proposal or Decline.
You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
In certain markets, once you have sent
the appointment request, the message
that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display.
8. Tap on Cancel request to cancel your
request.
Accept the appointment suggestion
1.
Tap the message.
For certain markets, the system reminds you
of a scheduled appointment time as it
approaches and the navigation system8 can
also guide you to the workshop when the time
comes.
Related information
•
•
Car status (p. 562)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 564)
and this may involve a cost.
}}
* Option/accessory. 563
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
Sending car information to a
workshop9
•
•
Volvo ID (p. 26)
It is possible to send information for the car
at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop
appointment and want to help your workshop
by providing them with better data so that
your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service
appointment.
1. Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
2. Press Appointments.
3. Press Send car data.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre
display. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity
indicator.
The information is sent via the car's
Internet connection10.
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification
number (VIN11).
9 Applies to certain markets.
10 Data is transferred (data traffic)
11 Vehicle Identification Number.
564
Car information content
The data sent is the last information saved (the
last time the car was running) and includes
information in the following areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
service requirement
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN11)
the car's software version
the car's diagnostics data.
Related information
Book service and repair (p. 563)
•
•
•
Car status (p. 562)
•
Internet-connected car* (p. 493)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 103)
when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Raise the car
When raising the car, it is important that the
jack is fitted in the intended points on the
car's underbody.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack,
this must be placed beneath one of the
four jacking points. Take care to position
the workshop jack so that the car cannot
slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car
remains stable and is not damaged. Always
use axle stands or similar.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions
supplied with the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for
occasional, short-term use, such as when
changing a wheel after a puncture. If the
car is to be jacked up more often, or for a
longer time than is required just to change
a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
}}
565
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
Related information
•
•
566
Removing a wheel (p. 527)
Jack* (p. 526)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Servicing the climate control
system
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system must only be
serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance
with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for
Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service
and repair of the refrigerant system must
only be performed by trained and certified
technicians in order to ensure the safety of
the system.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be
used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle
in the passenger compartment and a handle
under the bonnet.
Open the bonnet
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 560)
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed
position.
}}
567
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Close the bonnet
1.
Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing
path under the bonnet is not obstructed,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Move the handle under the bonnet
upwards to release the bonnet from the
lock catch and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
When the bonnet is released, a
warning symbol and graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the
car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal
will repeat.
Bonnet completely closed.
WARNING
Never drive with an open
bonnet!
If this symbol is visible –
or something else indicates that the bonnet is
not fully closed while driving – stop immediately
and close it properly.
Related information
NOTE
•
•
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning
signal is heard despite the bonnet being
closed properly, contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Bonnet not completely closed.
568
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine compartment overview
WARNING
The overview shows some service-related
components.
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start or continue
to operate automatically for up to approx.
6 minutes after the engine has been
switched off.
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
•
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high
and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical
system must always be in ignition position
0 when work is being performed in the
engine compartment.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition
coil when the car's electrical system is in
ignition position II or when the engine is
hot.
Washer fluid filler pipe12
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the
driver's side)
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
12
Related information
•
•
•
•
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 567)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 585)
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
569
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals and
warranty can be applied.
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a
risk that this will cause serious damage to the
engine.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise there is a risk of the service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact of the car being
affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and
viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car
Corporation disclaims any liability for any
such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
570
Volvo uses different systems to warn about
the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event
of low oil pressure. Certain engine variants
have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
driver display's warning symbol for low oil
is used. Other variants have an
pressure
oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via
the driver display's warning symbol
and
display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher
than specified grade is permitted. If the car is
driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the
one specified.
Related information
•
•
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 625)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 627)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message Engine oil
level Service required, visit a
workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level
may be too high.
1.
Open the Car Status app from the app
view in the centre display.
2. Press Status to show the oil level.
IMPORTANT
Filler pipe.1314
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action with regard to engine oil level needs
to be taken until a message is shown in the
driver display.
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil
level, such as Engine oil level
low Refill 1 litre for example,
then only fill the volume specified, e.g.
1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
See oil level in the centre display
The oil level is visualised using the electronic
oil level gauge in the centre display when the
car has been started. The oil level should be
checked regularly.
13
14
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car
must have been driven approx. 30 km
(approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched
off and on level ground before the oil level
indication is correct.
}}
571
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are
not met, then the message No value
available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is
something wrong in the car's systems.
Related information
•
•
Engine oil (p. 570)
•
•
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 625)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 627)
Ignition positions (p. 388)
Car status (p. 562)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature.
The heat that is transferred from the engine
to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. Never top up
with water only. The risk of freezing increases
with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is
coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx.
2 quarts) have been filled, always call for
recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage
due to a defective cooling system when
attempting to start the car.
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open
the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up
is required, unscrew the expansion tank
cap slowly to allow any overpressure to
disappear.
572
Coolant expansion tank.
–
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant
if necessary. The coolant level must not
exceed the MAX mark outside the expansion tank.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
•
Harmful if ingested. May cause organ
(kidney) damage.
•
Use ready-mixed coolant as recommended by Volvo. If concentrated liquid is used, make sure that the ratio is
50 % coolant to 50 % water of an
approved quality.
•
•
•
•
Do not mix different coolants.
Only new coolant should be used
when replacing major cooling system
components to ensure the system has
sufficient corrosion protection.
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Related information
•
•
15
16
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
Bulb replacement
NOTE
Lamp types vary depending on model and
equipment level. If a bulb15 breaks, it can be
replaced according to the method described
in the Owner's Manual.
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend visiting an authorised Volvo
workshop.
If a fault occurs in LED16 lamps, the entire
lamp unit usually must be replaced.
NOTE
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and
rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
For information about bulbs not covered in
this Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo
dealer or a certified Volvo service technician.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Related information
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb
(p. 574)
•
•
Changing brake light bulb (p. 576)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 577)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
(p. 577)
Coolant — specifications (p. 628)
Some cars have no bulbs.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
573
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Exterior lamp positions
Lamps, rear
The exterior lighting of the car uses a number
of different lamps. An LED17 type lamp must
be replaced by a workshop. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Replacing the rear direction
indicator bulb
Bulbs for rear direction indicators are located
behind the panel in the side of the cargo area.
Lamps, front
Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
Fog lamp
Position lamps (LED)
Direction indicators
Daytime running lights/position lamps/
direction indicators (LED)
Brake lights
Main beam (LED)
Dipped beam (LED)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED)
17
574
1.
Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge
to detach it.
2. Move the insulation aside to access the
supporting bridge.
Reversing lamps (LED)
Related information
•
•
•
Bulb replacement (p. 573)
Bulb specifications (p. 577)
Lighting control (p. 136)
LED (Light Emmitting Diode)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
Related information
•
•
•
3. Unscrew and remove the spring bolt anticlockwise, press the clips into the sides
and remove the supporting bridge. It is
easiest to allow the screw to remain in the
supporting bridge.
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb specifications (p. 577)
Bulb replacement (p. 573)
4. Undo the grey bulb holder by turning it
anticlockwise and pulling it out.
5. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
6. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning
it clockwise.
7. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
8. Fit the supporting bridge with associated
spring bolt and make sure that the clips
align in the correct position. Tighten the
spring bolt until it stops, max. 2 Nm (1.5 ft
lbs).
9. Move back the insulation and then hook in
the panel and press it back into place.
575
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Changing brake light bulb
Related information
Bulbs for brake lights are located behind the
panel in the side of the cargo area.
•
•
3. Undo the black bulb holder by turning it
anticlockwise and pulling it out.
1.
Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge
to detach it.
2. Move the insulation aside to access the
brake light bulb.
4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning
it clockwise.
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
7. Move back the insulation and then hook in
the panel and press it back into place.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease from your fingers
is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
576
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb specifications (p. 577)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
The rear foglight is fitted in the rear bumper
on the driver's side.
7. Plug in the connector.
Bulb specifications
8. Insert the hook on the wide part of the
foglight unit in the rear bumper and rotate
the unit inwards so that the clips engage.
Specifications for replaceable bulbs.
Related information
•
•
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Contact a workshop18 if faults occur in lamps
other than bulbs. If a fault occurs in LED19
lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be
replaced.
Bulb specifications (p. 577)
Function
WA
Type
Rear direction indicators
24
PY24W
Brake lights
21
H21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
A
Watt
The rear fog light is only fitted on the driver's side.
Related information
1.
•
•
Loosen the foglight unit on the driver's
side by inserting a flat object, such as a
table knife or a screwdriver, on the bulb
kit's narrower short side of the keypad and
then prize the foglight unit out.
Exterior lamp positions (p. 574)
Bulb replacement (p. 573)
2. Unplug the connector.
3. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out.
4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
5. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning
it clockwise.
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise.
577
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed
for the carbon dioxide reducing functions
Start/stop and regenerative charging, and to
support the functionality of the car's different
systems.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving
conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
The starter battery is used to start up the
electrical system and drive the starter motor
as well as other electrical equipment in the
car.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop20.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly
tightened.
18
19
20
578
WARNING
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Never smoke near the battery.
Charging points
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points
in the engine compartment.
Negative charging point
Positive charging point
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery and the
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage.
Fast charging function must not be used
since it may damage the battery.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the driver display
about the starter battery's state of charge
may be temporarily inapplicable, following
the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external starter
battery or battery charger - only the
car's negative charging point may be
used as the grounding point.
NOTE
Location
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore
needs to be recharged if the car is not used
for a longer time or when it is only driven
short distances. Extreme cold further limits
starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition,
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
The starter battery is located in the engine compartment.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function
must be reset to work properly. A reset
must take place for pinch protection to
work.
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached
with a retaining strap. Make sure the
retaining strap is properly tightened.
}}
579
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Specifications for starter battery
Battery type
H6 AGM
Voltage (V)
Cold start
capacityA
12
-
CCAB
(A)
Size, L×B×H
278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah)
70
A
B
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, make sure you
replace it with a battery with the same
size, cold starting capacity and type as the
original battery (see the decal on the battery).
Related information
•
•
•
580
760
Symbols on the batteries (p. 582)
Support battery (p. 581)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 437)
•
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 153)
•
Battery recycle (p. 583)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Support battery
Cars with the start/stop function are equipped with two batteries - one more powerful
12 V starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the function's
starting sequence.
Temporarily reduced Start/stop function due
to high current take-off means:
The engine auto-starts without the driver
lifting his/her foot from the foot brake
pedal.
•
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A
workshop should be contacted in the event of
questions or problems - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
The 12 V support battery is located down in the
engine compartment. The starter battery is also
shown here (top).
NOTE
•
The higher the current take-off in the
car, the more the alternator must be
working and the batteries charging =
Increased fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/stop function is
disengaged.
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external starter
battery or battery charger – only the
car's negative charging point may be
used as the grounding point.
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged
so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jumpstarted with an external battery or a battery
charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop
function then auto-stops the engine shortly
afterwards, there is a great risk that engine
auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not
had the time to recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there
is insufficient time to charge the battery
with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the
battery has been recharged by the car. In
an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C
(approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be
charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
lower outside temperature, the charging
time may increase to 3–4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery
using an external battery charger.
Specifications for support battery
Type
Voltage (V)
AGM
12
}}
581
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Cold start capacityA CCAB (A)
170
Size, L×B×H
150×90×130 mm
(5.9×3.5×5.1
inches)
Capacity (Ah)
10
A
B
If the battery is replaced, make sure you
replace it with a battery with the same
size, cold starting capacity and type as the
original battery (see the decal on the battery).
Related information
582
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Use protective goggles.
According to EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
•
•
•
•
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols
on the batteries.
Starter battery (p. 578)
Risk of explosion.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the
car.
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
•
•
•
Start/stop function (p. 412)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 582)
Battery recycle (p. 583)
Related information
The battery contains corrosive acid.
Starter battery (p. 578)
Support battery (p. 581)
Battery recycle (p. 583)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Battery recycle
Fuses and central electrical units
A used starter battery or support battery
should be recycled in an environmentally
sound manner – it contains lead.
Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
Related information
•
•
•
Starter battery (p. 578)
Support battery (p. 581)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 582)
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
Engine compartment
Under the left-hand front seat
Related information
•
•
•
Replacing a fuse (p. 584)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 585)
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
(p. 590)
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault
in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Location of central electrical units
583
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
1.
Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
WARNING
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop
about the fuses not mentioned in the
owner's manual. If replacing the fuse is not
performed correctly, it can cause serious
damage to the electrical systems.
Related information
•
•
584
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 583)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 585)
•
Fuses under the left-hand front seat
(p. 590)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect
engine and brake functions, amongst other
things.
}}
585
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Function
Ampere
Type
USB port, tunnel console, rear*
5
Micro
12 V socket in tunnel console, front
15
Micro
–
–
Micro
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM)
20
Micro
Ignition coils; Spark plugs
15
Micro
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control module (diesel)
15
Micro
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (diesel); Glow control
module (diesel); Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for output pulse (diesel)
10
Micro
Lambda probe, centre (petrol); Lambda probe, rear (diesel)
15
Micro
Sensor for nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Micro
Coolant pump
20
Micro
Right-hand headlamp
20
Micro
Left-hand headlamp
20
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM)
586
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
Airbags
5
Micro
Accelerator pedal sensor
5
Micro
Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module; Control module for brake system
5
Micro
Electric additional heater*; OBD II firewall
5
Micro
Alcohol lock*
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
Internal relay coils
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
Sensor for brake pedal
5
Micro
Calculation unit
5
Micro
Control module for actuator for engagement/change of automatic gearbox gear positions
5
Micro
Hydraulic clutch control unit
25
Micro
Transmission control module
15
Micro
Hydraulic clutch control unit
25
Micro
Engine Control Module (ECM)
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
}}
* Option/accessory. 587
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Ampere
Type
Horn
20
Micro
Siren*
5
Micro
Windscreen wipers
30
MCaseA
Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake)
40
MCaseA
Brake control with 48V battery
30
MCaseA
Control unit for brake system (ABS pump)
40
MCaseA
–
–
MCaseA
Actuator for transmission
25
MCaseA
Actuator for transmission
30
MCaseA
–
–
30
MCaseA
–
–
MCaseA
–
–
MCaseA
Towbar control module*
25
MCaseA
Towbar control module*
40
MCaseA
–
MCaseA
20
MCaseA
–
Right-hand headlamp; Left-hand headlamp
–
Power driver seat*
588
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
A
Ampere
Type
–
–
MCaseA
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Fuel filter heater (diesel)
30
MCaseA
Heated windscreen* right-hand side
40
MCaseA
Heated windscreen* left-hand side
40
MCaseA
Control function for support battery
5
Micro
Left-hand headlamp
20
Micro
Right-hand headlamp
20
Micro
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 583)
Replacing a fuse (p. 584)
* Option/accessory. 589
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses under the left-hand front
seat
Fuses under the left-hand front seat protect,
amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules.
590
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
The fuse box in the engine compartment
provides space for several spare fuses. On the
inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
}}
591
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Ampere
Type
Audio control device (amplifier)A
40
MCaseB
Central Electric Module A: Sensors, radar units, power seats*.
40
MCaseB
Central Electric Module B: Sensors, radar units, power seats*.
40
MCaseB
Fan module for climate control system, front
40
MCaseB
Power operated tailgate*
25
MCaseB
Power seat*, right
20
MCaseB
Parking heater*
25
MCaseB
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)
30
MCaseB
Door module in right-hand rear door
20
Micro
Door module in left-hand rear door
20
Micro
Door module in left-hand front door
20
Micro
Suspension module
20
Micro
Door module in right-hand front door
20
Micro
Seat heating, rear*
15
Micro
–
–
Micro
Calculation module
5
Micro
Sun sensor
592
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Micro
Steering lock
7,5
Micro
Control module for climate control system
7,5
Micro
Interior movement detectors*
5
Micro
Driver display
5
Micro
Keypad in centre console
5
Micro
Steering wheel module
5
Micro
Module for start knob; Electronic shifting module; Electronic parking brake
5
Micro
Centre display
5
Micro
Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call
5
Micro
Module for multi-band antenna
5
Micro
Relay coils
5
Micro
Module for detecting foot movement* (for opening the power operated tailgate)
5
Micro
Sensus control module
15
Micro
10
Micro
TV*C
Diagnostic socket OBDII
}}
* Option/accessory. 593
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
Ampere
Type
5
Micro
Lock motor for head restraint on rear left-hand side
15
Micro
Lock motor for head restraint on rear right-hand side
15
Micro
Rear window defroster
30
MCaseB
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-hand side
40
MCaseB
Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side
40
MCaseB
5
Micro
Control module for fuel pump
20
Micro
Coolant pump
7,5
Micro
Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel*
15
Micro
Air humidity sensor
5
Micro
Headlamp washers*
25
MCaseB
Windscreen and rear window washers
25
MCaseB
–
–
MCaseB
–
–
MCaseB
–
–
Micro
Alcohol lock*
Module for increased accessories
Humidity sensor
594
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
Ampere
Type
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Seatbelt pretensioner module
5
Micro
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: control module, exterior reversing sound
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module*
15
Micro
Coolant pump
7,5
Micro
Parking camera*
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
Control module for airbags and seatbelt tensioners
5
Micro
Rear window wiper
15
Micro
Roof console for panoramic roof*
20
Micro
5
Micro
7,5
Micro
–
Micro
Sun sensor
Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Control panels in rear doors and cargo area
–
}}
* Option/accessory. 595
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
A
B
C
Ampere
Type
Control module for driver support functions
5
Micro
Alcohol lock*
5
Micro
Wireless mobile charger*; USB port
5
Micro
–
–
Micro
–
–
Micro
Applicable to certain variants.
This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Applies to certain markets.
Related information
•
•
596
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 583)
Replacing a fuse (p. 584)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the interior
Related information
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
•
•
IMPORTANT
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these
parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit
or concentrated alcohol to clean the
interior, since this may damage the
upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
•
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical
buttons and controls. Wipe them
instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent.
•
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
•
Only use cleaning agents on the type
of material for which they were
intended.
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
Cleaning the centre display
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a
microfibre cloth.
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
1.
Turn off the centre display with a long
press on the home button.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
equivalent quality. Wipe the screen with a
clean and dry microfibre cloth using small
circular movements. If necessary, lightly
moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on
the home button.
}}
* Option/accessory. 597
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pressure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
598
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
When you need to clean the textile upholstery
or headliner, never scrape or rub a stain as this
may destroy the fabric. Nor should you ever
use stain removing agents, as this risks discoloration of the fabric.
Related information
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not
use window cleaning agent, other cleaning
agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol,
ammonia or cleaning agent containing
abrasive.
•
•
•
•
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or
tissue paper, since they may scratch the
centre display.
•
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
•
•
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the seatbelts
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Each
inlay mat is secured with pins.
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
•
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
•
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
1.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of
the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the
mat straight up.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and
dirt.
NOTE
The inlay mats must not be swung around
without care or hit against objects to
remove dirt since this can crack the inlay
mats.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught
adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
•
•
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
•
•
•
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
3. A special textile cleaner is recommended
for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with
agents recommended by Volvo retailers.
4. After cleaning, fit the inlay mat in place by
pressing it in at each pin.
* Option/accessory. 599
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning leather upholstery*
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery* is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather
Care KitWipes, for cleaning and treatment of
leather upholstery. The protective outer layer
of the leather is preserved when this is used
according to the instructions.
To achieve results that are as good as possible, Volvo recommends cleaning and application of the protective cream one to four times
per year (or more frequently if required). Volvo
Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo
dealers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1.
600
Apply the leather cleaner to a damp
sponge and squeeze until a foam is created.
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular
motion.
Cleaning the leather steering
wheel
3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the
stain without scrubbing.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes
for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First
remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or
cloth.
4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow
the leather to dry thoroughly.
Protecting the leather upholstery
1.
Apply a small amount of leather protective
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the
leather in light circular motions.
2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
> Protecting the leather upholstery
makes it more resistant to the stresses
from the sun's UV radiation.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the
leather on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
Related information
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
•
•
•
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
•
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
•
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 601)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly,
and deal with stains straight away.
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers, either.
IMPORTANT
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 599)
Cleaning the exterior
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
(p. 599)
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as
firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in
a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use
car shampoo.
Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 600)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 600)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are
easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with
a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small,
circular motions. If needed, dampen the
microfibre cloth with a little clean water.
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
Related information
•
•
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 597)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 597)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 598)
* Option/accessory. 601
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Polishing and waxing
IMPORTANT
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection. The
car does not need to be polished until it is at
least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight, the surface being
polished should be a maximum of 45 °C
(113 °F).
• Wash and dry the car thoroughly before
you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off
asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or
white spirit. More stubborn stains can be
removed using fine rubbing paste
designed for car paintwork.
•
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
IMPORTANT
Polish first with a polish and then wax
with liquid or solid wax. Follow the
instructions on the packaging carefully.
Many preparations contain both polish
and wax.
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment
such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by
such treatments is not covered by Volvo
warranty.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
602
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
•
•
•
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Handwashing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as
firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches
and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in
a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use
car shampoo.
Important points to remember when
handwashing the car
•
•
Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight.
This can cause the detergent or wax to dry
and have an abrasive effect.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. They contain
substances that damage and discolour
paintwork very quickly. For example, use
soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of
water. An authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended for the removal of any discolouration.
•
Wash the underbody, including wheel
housings and bumpers.
•
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case,
the surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
drops of water to dry in strong sunlight,
you reduce the risk of water drying stains
which may need to be polished out.
•
After the car has been washed, tar from
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to
get rid of the last spots.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and
rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to
withstand this. Condensation is normally
vented out of the lamp housing when the
lamp has been switched on for a time.
IMPORTANT
•
Make sure that the panoramic roof*
and sun visor are closed before washing the car.
•
Never use polishing agent with abrasive properties on the panoramic roof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber mouldings around the panoramic roof.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching
sponge instead.
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and in the sills after
washing the car.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
}}
* Option/accessory. 603
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
Automatic car wash
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork.
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 396)
Washing the car in an automatic car wash is a
simple and quick way of getting it clean, but it
cannot reach everywhere. Volvo recommends
washing your car by hand or using an automatic car wash supplemented with washing
by hand.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the car is not
washed in an automatic car wash during
the first few months (this is because the
paintwork has not fully hardened).
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic braking when stationary and automatic parking brake application. If these
functions are not deactivated, the brake
system will jam when the car is stationary
and the car will not be able to move.
604
IMPORTANT
For car washes where the car is pulled forward with rolling wheels, the following
applies:
1.
Before washing the car, make sure that
the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, otherwise there is the risk of it
starting and damaging the wiper arms.
2. Make sure that the door mirrors are
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured,
antennas retracted or removed, otherwise they risk being damaged by the
automatic car wash.
3. Drive into the car wash.
4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at
standstill" function using the button
on the tunnel console.
5. Switch off the "Automatic parking
brake application" function via the top
view of the centre display.
6. Switch off the engine by pressing the
start button next to the steering wheel.
Hold the button depressed for at least
2 seconds.
The car is ready for the car wash.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
The system will automatically switch to P
mode unless the above step is followed.
The wheels are locked in P mode, which
they should not be when putting the car
through an automatic car wash.
NOTE
Be aware that if the car has the keyless
locking and unlocking function*, the car
can be locked/unlocked when the car is
being washed if the remote control key is
within range.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
•
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 237)
High-pressure washing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash
with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm
(13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
Automatic braking when stationary
(p. 397)
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 396)
* Option/accessory. 605
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Cleaning the wiper blades
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Wash the car in a car wash
with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or
car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
606
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber
and trim components
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car
shampoo.
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a
pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can
cause discolouration of anodised aluminium
components*, as illustrated. We advise
against use of abrasive polishing agents, as
illustrated.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent
with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher
than 11.5. This may result in discolouration
of anodised aluminium parts such as roof
rack and around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in
discolouration and destroy the surface
treatment.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
Cleaning wheel rims
Rustproofing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. The longer the car is left dirty,
the more difficult it will be to get it completely clean and there is a risk of scratching
the paintwork. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car
shampoo.
The car has protection against corrosion.
Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists
of metallic protective coatings on the sheet
metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected and minimised metal overlap,
and shielding plastic components, abrasion
protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on
exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of
corrosion-resistant cast aluminium.
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
Rustproofing (p. 607)
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
requires no maintenance, but a good way to
reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car
clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must be avoided on glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as
soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 601)
Polishing and waxing (p. 602)
Handwashing (p. 603)
Automatic car wash (p. 604)
High-pressure washing (p. 605)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 606)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 606)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 607)
607
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Car paintwork
The paintwork consists of several layers and
is an important part of the car's rustproofing,
and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on
the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To
avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
Related information
•
•
Touching up minor paintwork
damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and
marks on e.g. the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 608)
NOTE
When paint is repaired the surface must be
clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be at least 15 °C (59 °F).
Colour codes (p. 609)
Materials that may be needed
• Primer – a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers.
21
608
Applying touch-up paint to the
damaged surface
•
Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks21.
•
•
Masking tape.
Fine sand paper.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
If the damage has not reached down to the
metal, the touch-up paint can be applied
directly after the surface has been cleaned.
1.
Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of
a primer is appropriate. In the event of
damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive
primer should be used to give better
results - spray into the lid of the spray can
and brush on thinly.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a
very fine polishing agent may be carried
out locally if required (e.g. if there are any
uneven edges). The surface is cleaned
thoroughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off
with a basecoat and clearcoat once the
primer has dried.
Colour codes
Colour code
The decal for the colour code is positioned on
the car's right-hand door pillar between the
front and rear door and will be visible when
the right-hand rear door is opened.
Replacing the wiper blade, rear
window
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with
washer fluid, they aim to clean the windows
and ensure visibility while driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be
replaced.
For scratches, implement the same procedure
but mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints for touching
up paintwork are available from Volvo dealers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
and clear coat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
Related information
•
•
Car paintwork (p. 608)
Colour codes (p. 609)
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
Related information
•
•
Car paintwork (p. 608)
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 608)
}}
609
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Replacing the wiper blade, rear
window
3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You
should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
installed.
4. Lower the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected
maintenance shortens the service life of
the wiper blades.
Related information
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the
lower section of the blade to the right.
Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it
from the windscreen to lock position.
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
NOTE
There is a lock position at half extension
angle that may feel like resistance, this lock
prevents the arm from falling back against
the windscreen. The wiper arm must be
pulled past the lock for wiper blade
replacement.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to
the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
610
•
•
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
Replacing windscreen wiper
blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with
washer fluid, they aim to clean the windows
and ensure visibility while driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be
replaced.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Set the wiper blades in service
position
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Service position is activated/
deactivated via the function view in the
centre display when the car is stationary
and the windscreen wipers are not on.
Press the button located on the wiper
blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Related information
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
•
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Wiper blades in service position.
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper
blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position.
NOTE
When replacing the wiper blades, note that
they have different lengths. The blade on
the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.
3. Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
windscreen.
The wiper blades are different lengths
In some situations, the windscreen's wiper
blades must be set in service position (vertical position), e.g. when they shall be
replaced.
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
not frozen down.
Activating/deactivating service mode
Service mode can be activated/deactivated
when the car is stationary and the windscreen
}}
611
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
wipers are not on. Service mode is activated/
deactivated via the function view in the centre
display:
Press the Wiper Service
Position button. The light
indicator in the button illuminates when service mode is
activated. When activated,
the wipers move to the service position. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when service mode is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit the service position
if:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
•
•
Windscreen washing is activated.
The rain sensor is activated.
The car is driven away.
IMPORTANT
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear
window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must
be used when the temperature is under the
freezing point.
Filling washer fluid (p. 612)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Windscreen wiping is activated.
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the activation of wiping,
washing or the rain sensor, as well as
before driving. This is to avoid scraping the
paint on the bonnet.
612
Related information
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
Washer fluid is filled into the reservoir with the
blue cap. The reservoir is used for windscreen
washer, rear window washer and headlamp
washers*
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in
the driver display, together with the
symbol.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo – with frost protection during cold weather and for temperatures below
freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6
and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with
neutral water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid the
fluid freezing inside the pump, reservoir
and hoses.
•
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 164)
•
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 166)
•
Set the wiper blades in service position
(p. 611)
•
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 610)
•
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 609)
•
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 162)
Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 162)
Volume:
•
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres
(5.8 qts).
•
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5
litres (3.7 qts).
Related information
•
•
Using the rain sensor (p. 163)
•
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 167)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 165)
613
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information
such as chassis number, type designation,
colour code, etc.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo
dealer regarding the car and when ordering
spare parts and accessories.
616
SPECIFICATIONS
Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights
and code designation for exterior colour and
type approval number. The decal is positioned
on the door pillar, and will be visible when the
right-hand rear door is opened.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R134a.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R1234yf.
}}
617
SPECIFICATIONS
||
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated
in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included
to show their approximate appearance and
locations in the car. The information that
applies to your particular car can be found
on the decal on the car.
Decal for gearbox type designation and
serial number.
Decal for the car's identification number VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
618
Related information
•
Air conditioning — specifications (p. 629)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can
be read in the table.
Dimensions
mm
inches
Dimensions
mm
inches
A
Ground clearanceA
205
8.1
E
Load length,
floor
887
34.9
B
Wheelbase
2702
106.4
F
HeightB
1658
65,3
C
Length
4425
174.2
G
Load height
733
28.9
D
Load length,
floor, folded
seat
1670
65.7
H
Front track
1601
63.0
I
Rear track
1626
64.0
J
Load width,
floor
1059
41.7
K
Dimensions
mm
inches
Width
1873
(1863C)
73,7
(73,3C)
}}
619
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Dimensions
mm
inches
L
Width including door mirrors
2034
80,1
M
Width including folded-in
door mirrors
1910
75.2
A
B
C
At kerb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on
tyre dimension, chassis option, etc.)
Including roof antenna, for kerb weight.
Body width.
Related information
•
620
Weights (p. 621)
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read
on a label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full, plus and all oils and fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched)
influence the load capacity and are not
included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added
the loading capacity of the car is reduced
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as
well as other accessories such as towbar,
load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety
grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats,
etc.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information
•
•
Type designations (p. 616)
Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 622)
621
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load
Max. weight braked trailer
Towing capacity and towball load for driving
with a trailer can be read in the tables.
NOTE
Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is
recommended for trailers heavier than
1800 kg.
622
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
T2
B3154T9
T2
T3
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
Manual select
1600
110
B3154T9
Automatic
1600
110
B3154T7
Manual select
1600
110
T3
B3154T2
Automatic
1600
110
T3
B3154T4
Automatic
1600
110
T4
B4204T47
Automatic
1800
110
T4 AWD
B4204T47
Automatic
2000
110
T5 AWD
B4204T14
Automatic
2100
110
T5 AWD
B4204T18
Automatic
2100
110
T5 AWD
B4204T36
Automatic
2100
110
D3
D4204T16
Manual select
1600
110
D3
D4204T16
Automatic
1800
110
D3 AWD
D4204T16
Manual select
2000
110
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
D3 AWD
D4204T16
Automatic
2000
110
D4 AWD
D4204T12
Automatic
2100
110
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
A
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted
to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle
weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that
speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph).
National legal requirements for the vehicle
combination, such as speed, etc. must be
observed.
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
750
50
Related information
•
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 616)
Weights (p. 621)
Driving with a trailer (p. 443)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 444)
* Option/accessory. 623
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be found in
the table below.
Engine
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Output
Output
Max. rated power
Max. rated power
Torque
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(Nm/rpm)
Engine codeA
No. of cylinders
T2
B3154T9
95/5000
129/5000
–
–
245/1600–3000
3
T3
B3154T7
120/5500
163/5500
–
–
265/1850–3000
3
T3
B3154T2
120/5500
163/5500
133/5500
181/5500
265/1500–3000
3
T3
B3154T4
110/5500
150/5500
–
–
265/1500–3000
3
T4 / T4 AWD
B4204T47
140/4700
190/4700
156/4700
211/4700
300/1400-4000
4
T5 AWD
B4204T14
182/5500
247/5500
–
–
350/1800-4800
4
T5 AWD
B4204T18
185/5500
252/5500
206/5500
280/5500
350/1800-4800
4
T5 AWD
B4204T36
183/5500
249/5500
–
–
350/1800-4500
4
D3 / D3 AWD
D4204T16
110/3750
150/3750
–
–
320/1750-3000
4
D4 AWD
D4204T12
140/4000
190/4000
–
–
400/1750-2500
4
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
•
•
624
NOTE
Type designations (p. 616)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 625)
Coolant — specifications (p. 628)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil — specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine codeA
T2
B3154T9
T3
B3154T7
5,6
T3
B3154T2
5,6
T3
B3154T4
5,6
T4 / T4 AWD
B4204T47
T5 AWD
B4204T14
5,6
T5 AWD
B4204T18
5,6
T5 AWD
B4204T36
5,6
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres, approx.)
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
5,6
5,6
}}
625
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres, approx.)
A
D3 / D3 AWD
D4204T16
D4 AWD
D4204T12
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
•
626
Type designations (p. 616)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 627)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 571)
•
Engine oil (p. 570)
5,2
5,2
SPECIFICATIONS
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse
driving conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise there is a risk of the service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact of the car being
affected.
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C
(-22 °F) or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F).
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and
viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car
Corporation disclaims any liability for any
such damage.
Volvo recommends:
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 625)
Engine oil (p. 570)
627
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant — specifications
Transmission fluid — specifications
Brake fluid — specifications
Prescribed grade: Ready-mixed coolant
approved by Volvo. If concentrated coolant is
used, mix with 50% water (of approved
water quality, not salt water, etc.). Consult a
Volvo dealer if unsure.
Only coolant approved by Volvo should be
used in order to prevent impairment of the
cooling system, engine problems, etc.
Under normal driving conditions, the transmission fluid does not need to be changed
during the service life of the gearbox. However, it may be necessary in adverse driving
conditions.
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer
pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master
brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders,
which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original or equivalent fluid compliant with a combination of
Dot 4, 5.1 and ISO 4925 class 6.
WARNING
Swallowing coolant is hazardous, it may
cause damage to organs (kidneys). The
product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor,
water, etc.
Related information
•
Topping up coolant (p. 572)
Manual gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid
M66:
BOT 350 M3
M76:
BOT 352 B1
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid
TG-81SC:
AW-1
AWF8G30:
AW-2
Related information
•
628
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is
changed or filled by an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Type designations (p. 616)
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 569)
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank - volume
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in
the table below.
All models
Litres (approx)
US gallons (approx)
54
Tank capacity for AdBlue®1
Air conditioning — specifications
The tank capacity for the additive AdBlue is
approx. 14.5 litres.
The car's climate control system uses a freonfree refrigerant either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about
which refrigerant the car's climate control
system uses is printed on a decal located on
the inside of the bonnet.
Related information
•
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 432)
14.2
Related information
•
Filling fuel (p. 423)
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can
be read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
1
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
}}
629
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Decal for R1234yf
Symbol
WARNING
Meaning
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance
with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for
Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service
and repair of the refrigerant system must
only be performed by trained and certified
technicians in order to ensure the safety of
the system.
A trained and certified technician
is required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol
Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
Refrigerant
Compressor oil
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Weight
Prescribed grade
540 g (1.19 lbs)
R134a
Volume
Prescribed grade
130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.)
PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
WARNING
IMPORTANT
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
The A/C system's evaporator must never
be repaired or replaced with a previously
used evaporator. A new evaporator must
be certified and labelled in accordance
with SAE J2842.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
630
Weight
Prescribed grade
480 g (1.06 lbs)
R1234yf
Related information
•
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 567)
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
Extra-urban driving (fast)
Low value
The information in the tables below is in
accordance with WLTP (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehicles Test Procedure),
which is an international test method for
vehicles equivalent to a passenger car
designed for laboratory testing.
Motorway driving (very fast)
High value
The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and carbon dioxide
emissions (CO2) are measured in gram CO2
per km.
Explanation
litres/100 km
Combined value (combined driving)
NOTE
If there is no consumption and emissions
data in the table, this is available in an
enclosed supplement.
gram CO2/km
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Urban driving (slow)
Suburban driving (average)
T2 (B3154T9)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
}}
631
SPECIFICATIONS
||
T2 (B3154T9)
T3 (B3154T7)
T3 (B3154T2)
T4 (B4204T47)
T4 AWD
(B4204T47)
T5 AWD
(B4204T14)
632
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
257
11.4
169
7.4
145
6.4
171
7.5
174
7.7
272
12,1
184
8.1
157
6.9
188
8.3
189
8.4
267
11.8
181
8.0
150
6.6
175
7.7
181
8.0
274
12.2
192
8.5
163
7.2
192
8.5
194
8.6
270
11.9
189
8.3
160
7.1
184
8.1
189
8.3
281
12.4
202
8.9
174
7.7
205
9.1
205
9.1
SPECIFICATIONS
D3 (D4204T16)
D3 (D4204T16)
D3 AWD
(D4204T16)
D3 AWD
(D4204T16)
D4 AWD
(D4204T12)
The values in the table above for fuel consumption and CO2 emissions are based on
special drive cycles (see below). The car's
weight may increase depending on its equipment level. Together with how heavily the car
161
6.2
143
5.5
121
4.6
156
5.9
143
5.5
166
6.3
149
5.7
132
5.0
171
6.5
154
5.9
198
7.6
158
6.0
132
5.0
168
6.4
156
6.0
209
8.0
162
6.2
141
5.4
179
6.8
165
6.3
173
6.6
146
5.6
125
4.8
155
5.9
146
5.6
186
7.1
166
6.4
144
5.6
180
6.9
167
6.4
210
8.0
163
6.2
140
5.4
170
6.5
165
6.3
218
8.3
171
6.5
148
5.6
180
6.9
173
6.6
204
7.8
166
6.3
142
5.4
172
6.6
166
6.4
232
8.9
185
7.1
159
6.1
190
7.2
185
7.1
is loaded, this affects fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions. According to WLTP, every car
has unique fuel consumption and CO2 emission values depending on how the car is
equipped. These values range between the
low value and high value in the table above. In
many markets, you can find your car's unique
fuel consumption and CO2 emission values in
the car's registration document.
}}
633
SPECIFICATIONS
||
There are several reasons for fuel consumption
that is higher than the values in the table.
Examples of these include:
•
If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects its weight.
•
•
Driving style.
•
High speed causes increased air resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic
version of the model, this could increase
rolling resistance.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
There may be huge deviations in fuel consumption if comparing to the drive cycle profiles (see below), which are used in the certification of the car and on which consumption
figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the referenced regulations.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably
increase the car's fuel consumption.
634
WLTP standard
From and including 1 September 2018, a new
standard was introduced for calculating consumption values in the car. The WLTP standard (Worldwide Harmonised Light-Duty Vehicles Test Procedure) represents the average
driving conditions for everyday driving. In
comparison with the previous standard
(NEDC), WLTP takes into account more varied
traffic situations and speeds, but also equipment and weight classes. Optional equipment
that affects consumption is deactivated during
testing, e.g. air conditioning, seat heating, etc.
The new standard should provide more realistic figures when it comes to fuel consumption,
carbon dioxide and emissions. The values are
intended to allow comparison between different cars and not to represent your typical normal consumption.
Drive cycle profiles
A drive cycle simulates actual average driving
of the car. The standard is based on four different drive cycle profiles. The four drive cycle
profiles are:
•
•
•
•
Urban driving – slow driving
Suburban driving – average driving
Extra-urban driving – fast driving
Motorway driving – very fast driving.
Every drive cycle is determined by different
conditions such as speed, time and mileage,
for example.
The official value for combined driving, which
is shown in the table, is a combination of the
results from the four drive cycles, in accordance with legal requirements.
The exhaust gases are collected in order to
extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2
emissions) during the four drive cycles. These
were then analysed to determine the value for
CO2 emissions.
Related information
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 616)
Weights (p. 621)
Economical driving (p. 420)
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are
indicated by the registration document or
Engine
✓ = Approved
other documents. The following table shows
all approved combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
man/
235/60R17A
235/55R18B
235/50R19
245/45R20
245/40R21
aut
7,5x17x50,5
7,5x18x50,5
7,5x19x50,5
8x20x50.5
8x21x50.5
man
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T2 (B3154T9)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T3 (B3154T7)
man
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T3 (B3154T2)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T3 (B3154T4)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T4 (B4204T47)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T4 AWD (B4204T47)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5 AWD (B4204T14)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5 AWD (B4204T18)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T5 AWD (B4204T36)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
D3 (D4204T16)
man
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
D3 (D4204T16)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
D3 AWD (D4204T16)
man
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
T2 (B3154T9)
}}
635
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Engine
man/
235/60R17A
235/55R18B
235/50R19
245/45R20
245/40R21
aut
7,5x17x50,5
7,5x18x50,5
7,5x19x50,5
8x20x50.5
8x21x50.5
D3 AWD (D4204T16)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
D4 AWD (D4204T12)
aut
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
A
B
235/60 R17 is not an approved size for use together with 18" brakes. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped.
235/55 R18 on cars equipped with 18" brakes is only possible when using approved wheel rims. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped.
Related information
636
•
Minimum permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres (p. 637)
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 616)
•
Snow chains (p. 533)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 516)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 517)
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum permitted tyre load
index and speed rating for tyres
The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine
man/
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
aut
T2
B3154T9
man
96
H
T2
B3154T9
aut
96
H
T3
B3154T7
man
96
H
T3
B3154T2
aut
96
H
T3
B3154T4
aut
96
H
T4
B4204T47
aut
96
V
T4 AWD
B4204T47
aut
96
V
T5 AWD
B4204T14
aut
96
V
T5 AWD
B4204T18
aut
96
V
T5 AWD
B4204T36
aut
96
V
D3
D4204T16
man
96
H
D3
D4204T16
aut
96
H
D3 AWD
D4204T16
man
96
H
}}
637
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Engine
man/
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
aut
D3 AWD
D4204T16
aut
96
H
D4 AWD
D4204T12
aut
96
H
A
B
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
638
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 639)
Type designations (p. 616)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 516)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 517)
SPECIFICATIONS
Approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each engine
alternative can be found in the table.
Engine
Tyre size
235/60 R17
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Speed
Load, 1-3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0-160 km/h (0-100 mph)
230
230
260
260
260
160+ km/h (100+ mph)
240
240
260
260
–
max 80 km/h (max 50 mph)
420
420
420
420
–
235/55 R18
All engines
235/50 R19
245/45 R20
245/40 R21
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
Economical driving.
In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Type designations (p. 616)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 518)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 635)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 520)
639
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
406
overtaking
setting the time interval
standby mode
Symbols and messages
WARNING
300
297
280
283
294
A/C (Air conditioning)
202
ABS
anti-lock brakes
392
AdBlue
filling
operation
Symbols and messages
tank volume
430
432
431
434
629
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater)
212
Adjusting the steering wheel
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD
A
Accessories and extra equipment
installation
37
37
Active bending lights
142
Active main beam
140
Active Park Assist
Limitations
Symbols and messages
375
380
383
Active Yaw Control
259
Airbag
Activating/deactivating
driver's side
passenger side
Adapting driving characteristics
407
Airbag, see Airbag
Adaptive Cruise Control
activate
Auto brake
change cruise control functionality
change of target
deactivate
fault tracing
Limitations
managing speed
276
278
298
282
295
279
281
281
296
Air conditioning
Aerial
location
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade
Recirculation
table of options
196
188
Air quality
allergies and asthma
passenger compartment filter
183, 184
184
185
Air recirculation
196
Alarm
deactivation
motion and tilt sensors
reduced alarm level
251
253
252
254
178
Alarm about hazard warning flashers Connected Safety
263
240
Alarm about slippery driving conditions Connected Safety
263
49
52
50
51, 52
49
202
629
Air conditioning system
repair
180, 191
567
Air distribution
Air vents
change
defrosting
186
186, 187
187
197
Alcohol lock
390, 391
Allergy and asthma inducing substances.
184
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
406
Ambience lights
adapt
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
148
481, 482, 483
478, 480
Approach lighting
146
Apps
459
Ashtray
544
641
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Assistance at risk of collision
activate/deactivate
Limitations
Symbols and messages
upon risk of head-on collision
upon risk of rear-end collision
upon risk of run-off
Audio and media
458
Audio settings
phone
play media
Text message
458, 490
491
469, 471
490
Auto climate control
195
Auto hold
397
Automatic brake
activate/deactivate
after collision
Driver support
397
398
399
258
Automatic car wash
604
Automatic car washes
604
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop
Automatic gearbox
kickdown
oil
trailer
Automatic locking
642
354
355
358
359
356
357
355
412
400, 401
405
628
443
244
Automatic relocking
Automatic speed limiter
activate/deactivate
Limitations
tolerance
217, 238
269
271
272
272
Auxiliary heater
212
AWD, All Wheel Drive
406
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting
rear seat, lowering
Bag holder
170, 171, 173, 174
174
550
Limitations
Symbols and messages
Bluetooth
connect
connect car to Internet
phone
settings
475
494
484
492
Bonnet, opening
567
Book service and repair
563
Brake assist
after collision
399
Brake fluid
grade
628
Brake functions
391
392
392
397
393
144
391
145
394
393
393
394
628
Bicycle rack
towbar mounted
446
Brakes
Anti-lock braking system, ABS
automatic when stationary
brake assist system, BAS
brake light
brake system
emergency brake lights
maintenance
on gritted roads
on wet roads
Parking brake
BLIS
activate/deactivate
330
331
Brake system
fluid
Battery
jump starting
maintenance
overload
recycling
start
support
symbols on the battery
437, 578
437
578
437
583
578
581
582
332
333
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Bulbs
change
specifications
573
577
bypass alcohol lock
390
C
Car key battery low
220
Car modem
connect car to Internet
settings
495
496
Car status
Tyre pressure
562
523
Car upholstery
Camera sensor
see Camera unit
310
Camera unit
Limitations
maintenance and cleaning
310
311
315
597, 598, 599, 600, 601
Car washing 601, 603, 604, 605, 606,
607
Catalytic converter
Recovery
448
central locking
241
Car functions
in centre display
110
Cargo area
electrical socket
lighting
mounting points
parcel shelf
protective net
548
545
148
551
555
553
Cargo area floor
foldable
551
552
Centre display
change appearance
119
cleaning
597
climate control
191
function view
110
Keyboard
114
messages
128, 129
operation
100, 103, 107, 112
overview
97
settings
120, 121
switch off and change volume
119
symbols in status bar
112
views
103
Cargo cover
555
Change of owner
cargo net
553
Car holiday
421
Car care
601, 603, 604, 605, 606, 607
Leather upholstery
600
122
Change of target
with adaptive cruise control
with Pilot Assist
295
295
Checking the engine oil level
571
Child safety
58
Child safety locks
243
Child seat
58, 61, 62
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
60
lower mounting points
60
overview table
64
positioning/fitting
61, 62
table for location
65
table of i-Size
67
table of ISOFIX
68
Upper mounting points
59
Cigarette lighter
544
City Safety
brakes for oncoming vehicles
cross traffic
evasive manoeuvre prevented
Limitations
limitations in the case of cross traffic
obstacle detection
set warning distance
subfunctions
Symbols and messages
316
324
322
324
325
Cleaning
automatic car wash
323
320
319
317
328
599, 600, 601
604
643
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
car washing
601, 603, 604, 605,
606,
607
centre display
597
Fabric upholstery
597, 598, 600
rims
607
Seatbelts
599
upholstery
597, 598, 599, 600, 601
Cleaning wheel rims
607
Cleaning wiper blades
606
Clean Zone
183
Clean Zone Interior Package
184
Climate control
auto-regulation
centre display
experienced temperature
fan control
Parking
rear seat
sensors
temperature control
voice control
zones
180, 191
195
191
181
200
203
191
181
201, 202
182
180
Climate control system
Refrigerant
Clock, adjustment
82
CO2 emissions
631
Coat hanger
553
Collision
644
629
42, 44, 49, 56
Collision warning
from behind
329
Collision warning system
cross traffic rear
see City Safety
334
316
Colour code, paint
609
Colour codes
609
Combined instrument panel
settings
Compass
calibration
Condensation in headlamps
75
77
455
455
603, 604,
605, 606
Cornering lights
143
Corner Traction Control
259
Crash, see Collision
42
Cross Traffic Alert
activate/deactivate
Limitations
messages
334
335
335
337
Cruise control
activate
deactivate
managing speed
standby mode
273
274
275
296
275
Customer privacy policy
36
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package)
Connect car to Internet
no or poor connection
via a mobile device (WiFi)
via car modem
via telephone (Bluetooth)
498
495
495
494
Connected Safety
activate/deactivate
Limitations
263
264
265
Connect phone
485
Controls lighting
148
Coolant
filling
628
572
Cooling system
overheating
436
184
D
Data
recording
35
transfer between car and workshop 560
Data link connector
Data sharing
38
499, 500
Daytime running lights
138
Deadlock
deactivation
254
255
Defrosting
197
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Diesel
run out of fuel
427
428
Diesel particle filter
429
Digital radio (DAB)
468
Dimensions
Towbar
619
440
dipped beam
139
Dipstick, electronic
571
Direction indicator
141
Direction indicators
141
direction of rotation
517
Display
driver information
75
Display lighting
148
Distance Warning
Set time interval
297
DivX®
474
Door mirrors
Dipping
resetting
store position
155
155
156
172
Download Centre
using
561
561
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy
28
Driver Alert Control
activate/deactivate
guide to rest stops
Limitations
Driver display
application menu
messages
settings
Driver performance
settings
Driver profile
edit
select
345
346
346
347
75
91, 92
93
77
81
81
124
125, 126, 128
125
driver support system
Driving mode
258
299
Drivetrain
Gearbox
399
Driving
cooling system
with a tailer
436
443
Driving economy
420
Driving in water
422
Driving mode
change
Driver support
ECO
407
409
299
409, 411
Driving with a trailer
towball load
towing capacity
622
622
E
ECO climate
409
ECO mode
activate with function button
409
411
Economical driving
409, 420
ECO pressure
520, 639
Electrically operated parking brake
394
Electrical socket
using
545
545
Electrical system
578
emergency brake lights
145
Emergency equipment
first aid kit
warning triangle
556
557
Emergency puncture repair kit
implementation, follow-up inspection
Pump up tyre
using
534
535
538
535
Emission control
430
Emissions of carbon dioxide
631
645
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Engine
deactivate
overheating
start
Start/Stopfunction
Engine braking
392, 418
Engine compartment
coolant
Engine oil
overview
572
570
569
Engine drag control
259
Engine oil
adverse driving conditions
filling
filter
grade and volume
Engine specifications
Engine temperature
high
570, 627
627
571
570
625
624
F
Front seat, manual
Fan
Air distribution
Air vents
Control
187
187
200
Fault tracing
Adaptive Cruise Control
Camera unit
City Safety
Radar unit
Front seat, power
adjusting seat
Lumbar support
massage
multi-function control
store position
281
311
325
311
Ferry transport
416
First aid
556
First aid kit
556
Flooded road
422
Fluids, capacities
612, 629
Fluids and oils
628, 629
28
Fog lamp
front
rear
143
144
Ethanol content
425
Foot brake
392
External dimensions
619
Four-C
416
Front seat
Climate control
Fan
heating
Temperature
191
200
193
201
Environment
646
387
436
386
412
436
FSC, ecolabelling
Fuel
fuel consumption
identifier
fuel gauge
170
171
171
174
173
173, 174
172
23
425, 427
631
425, 427
78
Fuelling
filling
fuel filler flap
423
423
Fuel tank
volume
629
Fuel vapour
425
Fuse box
583
Fuses
changing
in engine compartment
under glovebox
583
584
585
590
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
G
Gearbox
automatic
manual
399
400, 401
400
Heated washer nozzles
162
I
Heater
auxiliary heater
parking heater
210
212
211
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System)
184
IC (Inflatable Curtain)
55
ID, Volvo
26
Gear positions
automatic gearbox
401
Gear selector inhibitor
405
Heating
seats
steering wheel
Windows
Gear shift indicator
406
High engine temperature
436
Glass, laminated/reinforced
152
High-pressure washing
605
Glovebox
546
Gracenote®
472
Hill descent control
activate with function button
418
419
Gross vehicle weight
621
Hill Descent Control
GSI - Gear selector assistance
406
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Hill Start Assist
451
452
454
454
Infotainment system (Audio and
media)
458
Instrument lighting
148
H
Handbrake
394
Handwash
603
HomeLink®
program
Type approval
using
193, 194
194, 195
198, 199
417, 418, 419
Individual drive mode
83
407
399
Information display
Horn
176
227
Indicator symbols
399
145
head restraint
227
Immobilizer
Immobiliser
55
418
136, 148
Immobiliser
55
HDC
Headlamp control
39
388, 389
Inflatable Curtain
Hazard warning flashers
501
Ignition position
Inflatable curtain
Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting,
Follow me home lighting, follow-mehome lighting
146
Hard disk
space
Identification number
177
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car
right-hand drive car
Instruments and controls
IntelliSafe
Driver support
Interior Air Quality System
75, 77
72
73
72, 73
31
184
647
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Interior lighting
adapt
146
148
Interior rearview mirror
Dipping
155
155
Keyless
Locking/unlocking
settings
touch-sensitive surfaces
Intermittent wiping
163
Keypad in the steering wheel
177
License agreement
Internet, see Internet-connected car
493
Key tag
215
Lifting tool
Internet-connected car
book service and repair
send car information
system updates
563
564
561
iPod®, connection
475
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
520
J
Jack
Journey statistics
Jump starting
526
81
437
K
L
Labels
location
616
Laminated glass
152
Lamps
change
location
specifications
trailer
573
574
577
445
Lane assistance
activate/deactivate
display mode
Limitations
select assistance option
Symbols and messages
347
349
353
350
349
351
347
Kerb weight
621
Lane Keeping Aid
see Lane assistance
Key
215
Language
120
Large Animal Detection (LAD)
320
Keyboard
change language
648
238
239
237
114, 117
117
Leather upholstery, washing instructions
Level control
damping
600
416
86, 502
526
Lighting
active bending lights
142
approach lighting
146
Automatic main beam
140
brake light
144
controls
136, 146
controls, instruments, display
148
cornering lights
143
daytime running lights
138
dipped beam
139
direction indicators
141
emergency brake lights
145
fog lamp
143
Hazard warning flashers
145
home safe lighting
146
in the passenger compartment
146
lamp positions
574
main beam
140
position lamps
138
rear fog lamp
144
settings
137
Lighting, bulb replacement
brake light
573
576
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
bulbs, specifications
direction indicator, rear
rear fog lamp
577
574
577
M
Meters
fuel gauge
Main beam
78
140
Mileage
Limp home
399
78
Maintained climate comfort
start/shut-off
208
208
Load carriers
549
Misting
condensation in headlamps
maintenance
Rustproofing
607
Manual gearbox
oil
400
628
621
Loading
General
load retaining eyelets
long load
548
551
549
Loading hooks
550
Max. roof load
Load retaining eyelets
cargo area
551
Media player
compatible file formats
voice control
Lock
Locking/unlocking
217
Lockable wheel bolts
527
Lock confirmation
setting
214
215
Locking/unlocking
tailgate
219, 239
Low battery voltage
Battery
437
Low speed control
activate with function button
417
417
469, 471
476, 477
133
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control
Assistance at risk of collision
BLIS
City Safety
Cross Traffic Alert
Lane assistance
Park Assist
Park assist camera
Park Assist Pilot
Pilot Assist
stability and traction control system
Messages in displays
manage
saved
283
359
333
328
337
351
364
373
383
293
262
93, 128
94, 129
95, 129
601, 604
Mobile phone, see Phone
485
Mood lighting
148
Motion sensor
252
N
Net
cargo area
553
O
Obstacle detection
City Safety
octane rating
Oil, see also Engine oil
320
425
625, 627
Oil level low
571
Online car
no or poor connection
493
498
Option/accessory
Output
21
624
649
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
outside temperature gauge
Overheating
82
436, 443
Overtaking Assistance
Adaptive Cruise Control
Pilot Assist
start with adaptive cruise control
start with Pilot Assist
Owner's information
Owner's manual
ecolabelling
in centre display
in mobile
300
300
300
300
16
21
23
17, 18
20
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch)
Paddle on the steering wheel
Paintwork
colour code
damage and touch-up
650
52
177
609
608, 609
Panorama roof
opening and closing
pinch protection
sun blind
ventilation position
158
159
152
161
160
Parallel parking
375
Parcel shelf
555
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch
Park Assist
activate/deactivate
forward, backward and along the
sides
Limitations
Symbols and messages
360
362
Passenger compartment filter
Park assist camera
activate
Limitations
park assist lines
sensor fields
Symbols and messages
views
365
371
311
368
370
373
366
Park Assist Pilot
leave parking
parallel parking
perpendicular parking
using
375
380
376
376
377
Parking
on hill
396
Parking brake
activate/deactivate
automatic activation
low battery voltage
394
395
396
397
Parking climate
Symbols and messages
203
209
Parking heater
361
363
364
211
52
185
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater)
211
Passenger compartment interior
ashtray
cigarette lighter
electrical socket
glovebox
Sun visor
tunnel console
542
544
544
545
546
548
543
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic
147
Personal information (Customer privacy
policy)
36
petrol
425
Petrol particle filter
426
Phone
Calls
change to another
connect
connect automatically
connect manually
disconnect
remove
text message
voice control
Phone charger
484
488, 491
488
485
486
487
487
488
489
133
492
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Pilot Assist
activate
Auto brake
change of target
deactivate
disabled steering assistance
Limitations
managing speed
overtaking
setting the time interval
standby mode
Symbols and messages
WARNING
285
288
298
295
289
291
291
296
300
297
290
293
294
Pinch protection
resetting
152
153
PIN code
Private locking
496
250
Polishing
602
Position lamp
138
Power operated tailgate
244
Power panorama roof
158
Power save mode
Power seat
Power windows
pinch protection
Preconditioning
start/shut-off
Timer
437
171
153, 154
152
203
204
205
Privacy policy (Customer privacy policy)
36
Private locking
activate/deactivate
250
250
Protective net
553
Pump up tyre
538
R
Radar sensor
see Radar unit
301
Radar unit
Limitations
maintenance and cleaning
Type approval
301
311
315
302
Radio
462
change radio frequency and radio station
463
DAB
468
search for radio station
464
settings
466
start
463
voice control
133
Radio favourites
Rain sensor
465
163, 164
Rear Collision Warning
Limitations
329
329
Rear seat
Climate control
head restraint
heating
lowering the backrest
191
176
194
174
Rearview and door mirrors
angle external mirrors
compass
Dipping
door
electrically retractable
heating
interior
156
455
155
155
156
199
155
rear window
heating
Washers
Wiper
Recommendations during driving
199
166, 167
166, 167
421
Recommendations for loading
548
Recovery
450
Refrigerant
climate control system
567
629
423
432
Rain sensor memory function
164
Refuelling
AdBlue
Raising the car
565
Regeneration
426, 429
651
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable
451
Remote control immobiliser
227
Remote control key
battery replacement
connect to driver profile
detachable key blade
loss
range
215
220
126
224
223
219
Remote control key system, type approval
228
Remote updates
Resetting, trip meter
652
Sensus Navigation
settings
speed camera information
Speed warning
342
343
342
342
Rollover protection
263
Roll Stability Control
263
Roof load, max. weight
621
Run out of fuel
diesel
428
Rustproofing
607
561
80
Resetting the door mirrors
156
Restore settings
change of owner
Driver profile
122
122
128
Retractable power door mirrors
156
Reversing camera
365
Rims
dimensions
517
Road run-off protection
355
Road sign information
Limitations
338
344
Road Sign Information
activate/deactivate
display
339
339
S
Safety
pregnancy
42
42
Safety mode
start/movement
56
57
Sealing fluid
Seat, see Seats
seatbelt tensioner
Resetting
48
Seatbelt tensioner
47
Seats
heating
manual front seat
power front seat
store position
whiplash protection
193, 194
170
171
172
43
Security code
250
sensors
Air quality
Camera unit
Climate control
Radar unit
185
310
181
301
Sensus
connection and entertainment
534
Sensus Navigation
Road Sign Information
170
Service position
32
342
611
Service programme
560
Set time interval for Distance Warning
297
44
Settings
Categories
contextual
Resetting
123
121
122
48
Side airbag
Seatbelt
buckle/unbuckle
pregnancy
seatbelt reminder
seatbelt tensioner
44
45
42
48
47
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder
55
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Side Impact Protection System
SIM card
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System)
55
496
55
Skidding
422
Ski hatch
551
slippery driving conditions
422
Snow chains
533
Software updates
35
Stability and traction control system
259
sport mode
260, 261
Symbols and messages
262
Stains
597, 598, 599, 600, 601
Storage spaces
glovebox
Sun visor
tunnel console
542
546
548
543
Sun blind
panorama roof
pinch protection
158, 161
152
Sunroof
pinch protection
152
386
57
Sun visor
mirror lighting
548
147
Start the car
386
Support battery
581
Steering assistance at risk of collision
354
Switching off the engine
387
258
Switch off engine
387
Start/Stop
car function
deactivate
Driving
Limitations
412
414
412
414
Starting the engine
after collision
Soot filter
429
Sound experience
459
spare wheel
manage
531
532
Speed camera information
342
Steering force, speed related
Speed limiter
activate
automatic
change speed
deactivate
Limitations
temporary deactivation
266
267
269
296
268
269
268
Steering force level, see Steering force 258
Speed ratings, tyres
516
Steering wheel paddles
403
Spin control
259
Stabiliser
trailer
Stickers
location
616
444
Steering lock
Steering wheel
heating
keypad
paddle
steering wheel adjustment
Stone chips and scratches
Stop/start function
178
177, 178
194, 195
177
177
178
Symbols
dynamic
indicator symbols
warning symbols
75
83
85
Symbols and messages
centre display status field
parking climate
112
209
system updates
561
608, 609
412
653
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking
219, 239
opening/closing with foot movement
248
power
244
unlock from inside
242
Temperature
Control
experienced
Temporary Spare
531
466
Trailer
cable
driving with a trailer
Lamps
snaking
443
443
445
444
Trailer stability assist
260, 444
Trailer Stability Assist
260
Transmission
399
Transmission oil
grade
628
Tread
518
Type approval
HomeLink®
radar system
radio equipment
remote control key system
454
302
309
228
Type designations
616
Tyre dimension
516
Tyre dimensions
when changing wheels
525
Tyre load index
516
Tyre pressure
Adjust
Check
label showing recommended pressure
520
520
524
522
523
639
Terms and conditions
services
user
36
499
Tread depth
winter tyres
518
532
Through-load hatch
551
Tread wear indicators
518
Tilt detector
252
Tools
525
Trip computer
show in driver display
78
79
Top view
120
Trip meter
78
Tyre pressure monitoring
action
save a new tyre pressure
Status
Total airing function
215
Trip meter, resetting
80
Tyre pressure table
439
441
440
Trip statistics
settings
Towbar
foldable
specifications
Towing
654
201, 202
181
Traffic information
447, 450
Towing capacity and towball load
622
Towing eye
449
Traction control
259
81
TSA - trailer stability assist
444
Tunnel console
543
Tunnel detection
139
519
518
Tyres
514
dimensions
635
direction of rotation
517
installation
529
pressure
639
removal
527
rotation during replacement
514
specifications
635, 637, 639
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
storage
tread wear indicators
tyre pressure table
winter tyres
514
518
639
532
Volvo ID
create and register
26
26
W
U
Units
120
Unlocking
settings
with key blade
218
225
USB
jack for connecting media
475
V
Ventilation
Vibration damper
Video
settings
Voice control
Climate control
phone
radio and media
settings
VOL marking
186, 187
439
473, 475
474
130
182
133
133
134
514
washer fluid, filling
windscreen
612
165
Waxing
602
Weights
kerb weight
621
Warning lamps
Adaptive Cruise Control
294
Airbags – SRS
85
alternator not charging
85
Fault in brake system
85
Low oil pressure
85
Parking brake applied
85
Pilot Assist
294
seatbelt reminder
85
stability and traction control system 259
starter battery not charging
85
system error
85
Warning
85
Wheel bolts
527
Wheel change
525
Wheel rims
cleaning
607
Wheels
installation
removal
snow chains
529
527
533
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions
tyre load index and speed rating
635
637
whiplash protection
43
Warning sound
Parking brake
Whiplash Protection System
43
397
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System)
43
Warning symbols
Safety
85
42
Warning triangle
557
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet
delete network
share internet connection, hotspot
technology and security
495
498
497
499
Windows and glass
152
Windscreen
heating
198
Washer fluid
Washer nozzles, heated
Washers
Headlamps
rear window
162, 612
162
165
166, 167
655
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Windscreen washing
Windscreen wiper
rain sensor
Winter driving
snow chains
winter tyres
Wiper blades
changing
Service position
656
165
162
163, 164
422
533
532
162
609, 610
611
Wiper blades and washer fluid
162
WPC
492
TP 29561 (English), AT 1917, MY20, Copyright © 2000-2019 Volvo Car Corporation

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement